Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

12th Physics Guide Recent Developments in Physics Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – I

TextBook Evaluation:

I. Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
The particle size of ZnO material is 30 nm. Based on the dimension it is classified as
a) Bulk material
b) Nanomaterial
c) Soft material
d) Magnetic material
Answer:
b) Nanomaterial

Question 2.
Which one of the following is the natural nanomaterial.
a) Peacock feather
b) Peacock beak
c) Grain of sand
d) Skin of the Whale
Answer:
a) Peacock feather

Question 3.
The blue print for making ultra-durable synthetic material is mimicked from ________.
a) Lotus leaf
b) Morpho butterfly
c) Parrot fish
d) Peacock feather
Answer:
c) Parrot fish

Question 4.
The method of making nanomaterial by assembling the atoms is called ______.
a) Top down approach
b) Bottom up approach
c) Cross down approach
d) Diagonal approach
Answer:
b) Bottom up approach

Question 5.
“Sky wax” is an application of nano product in the field of ________.
a) Medicine
b) Textile
c) Sports
d) Automotive industry
Answer:
c) Sports

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 6.
The materials used in Robotics are ________.
a) Aluminium and silver
b) Silver and gold
c) Copper and gold
d) Steel and aluminium
Answer:
d) Steel and aluminium

Question 7.
The alloys used for muscle wires in Robots are _______.
a) Shape memory alloys
b) Gold copper alloys
c) Gold silver alloys
d) Two-dimensional alloys
Answer:
a) Shape memory alloys

Question 8.
The technology used for stopping the brain from processing pain is ______.
a) Precision medicine
b) Wireless brain sensor
c) Virtual reality
d) Radiology
Answer:
c) Virtual reality

Question 9.
The particle which gives mass to protons and neutrons are _______.
a) Higgs particle
b) Einstein particle
c) Nanoparticle
d) Bulk particle
Answer:
a) Higgs particle

Question 10.
The gravitational waves were theoretically proposed by _______.
a) Conrad Rontgen
b) Marie Curie
c) Albert Einstein
d) Edward Purcell
Answer:
c) Albert Einstein

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

II. Short Answers Questions:

Question 1.
Distinguish between Nanoscience and Nanotechnology.
Answer:

NanoscienceNanotechnology
1. Nanoscience is the science of objects with a typical size of 1-100 nm.
Nano means one-billionth of a metre that is 10-9m.
Nanotechnology is a technology involving design, production.
2. If matter is divided into such small objects the mechanical, electrical, optical magnetic and other properties change.Characterization and application of nano structured materials.

Question 2.
What is the difference between Nano materials and Bulk materials?
Answer:

Nano MaterialsBulk Mateerials
1. Nano materials are particle that have their size in 1-100 nm range atleast in one dimension.Bulk materials are particle that have their size above lOOnm in all dimensions.
2. We cannot see particles of nanomaterials from the naked eye.We can see particle of most of the bulk materials from the naked eye.
3. The example of nanomaterials include nano zymes, titanium dioxide, nano particles, graphene, etc.The example of bulk materials include plaster sand, gravel, cement, ore, slag, salts, etc.

Question 3.
Give any two examples for “Nano” in nature.
Answer:
1.  Single-strand DNA:
A single strand of DNA, the building block of all living things, is about three nanometers wide.

2. Morpho Butterfly:
The scales on the wings of a morpho butterfly contain nanostructures that change the way light waves interact with each other, giving the wings brilliant metallic blue and green hues. Mimic in laboratories – Manipulation of colours by adjusting the size of nanoparticles with which the materials are made.

Question 4.
Mention any two advantages and disadvantages of Robotics.
Answer:
Advantage:

  1. The robots are much cheaper than humans.
  2. Robots never get tired like humans.
  3. Stronger and faster than humans.

Disadvantage:

  1. Robots have no sense of emotions or conscience.
  2. They lack empathy and hence create an emotionless workplace.
  3. Unemployment problem will increase.

Question 5.
Why steel is preferred in making Robots?
Answer:
Steel is several times stronger. In any case, because of the inherent strength of metal, robot bodies are made using a sheet, bar, rod, channel, and other shapes.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 6.
What are black holes?
Answer:

  1. Black holes are the end-stage of stars which are the highly dense massive objects. Its mass ranges from 20 times mass of the sun to 1 million times mass of the sun.
  2. It has very strong gravitational force such that no particle or even light can escape from it.
  3. The existence of black holes is studied when the stars orbiting the black hole behave differently from the other stars. Every galaxy has a black hole at its center.

Question 7.
What are sub atomic particles?
Answer:

  1. The three main subatomic particles that form an atom are protons, neutrons, and electrons.
  2. Subatomic particles are particles that are smaller than the atom, proton and neutron are made up of quarks which is interact through gluons.
  3. A subatomic particle having two types of particles, they are elementary particles and composite particles.

III. Long Answer Questions:

Question 1.
Discuss the applications of Nanomaterials in various fields.
Answer:

(i) Automotive industry:

  • Lightweight construction
  • Painting (fillers, base coat, clear coat)
  • Catalysts
  • Tires (fillers)
  • Sensors
  • Coatings for window screen and car bodies

(ii) Chemical industry:

  • Fillers for paint systems
  • Coating systems based on nanocomposites
  • Impregnation of papers
  • Switchable adhesives
  • Magnetic fluids

(iii) Engineering

  • Wear protection for tools and machines (anti blocking coatings, scratch resistant coatings on plastic parts, etc.)
  • Lubricant – free bearings

(iv) Electronic industry

  • Data memory
  • Displays
  • Laser diodes
  • Glass fibres
  • Optical switches
  • Filters (IR-blocking)
  • Conductive, antistatic coatings

(v) Construction:

  • Construction materials
  • Thermal insulation
  • Flame retardants
  • Surface – functionalised building materials for wood, floors, stone, facades, tiles, roof tiles, etc.
  • Facade coatings
  • Groove mortar

(vi) Medicine:

  • Drug delivery systems
  • Contrast medium
  • Prostheses and implants
  • Agents in cancer therapy
  • Active agents
  • Medical rapid tests
  • Antimicrobial agents and coatings

(vii) Textile / fabrics / non – wovens:

  • Surface – processed textiles
  • Smart clothes

(viii) Energy:

  • Fuel cells
  • Solar cells
  • Batteries
  • Capacitors

(ix) Cosmetics:

  • Sun protection
  • Lipsticks
  • Skin creams
  • Tooth paste

(x) Food and drinks:

  • Package materials
  • Additives
  • Storage life sensors
  • Clarification of fruit juices

(xi) Household:

  • Ceramic coatings for irons
  • Odors catalyst
  • Cleaner for glass, ceramic, floor, windows

(xii) Sports / outdoor:

  • Ski wax
  • Antifogging of glasses/goggles
  • Antifouling coatings for ships/boats
  • Reinforced tennis rackets and balls.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 2.
What are the possible harmful effects of the usage of Nanoparticles? Why?
Answer:

  1. The research on the harmful impact of the application of nanotechnology is also equally important and fast developing.
  2. The major concern here is that the nanoparticles have the dimensions same as biological molecules such as protein.
  3. They may easily get absorbed onto the surface of living organisms and they might enter the tissues and fluids of the body.
  4. The interaction with living systems is also affected by the dimensions of the nanoparticles.
  5. For instance, nanoparticles of a few nanometers size may reach well inside biomolecules.
  6. It is also possible for the inhaled nanoparticles to reach the blood to reach other sites such as the liver, heart, or blood cells.
  7. Researchers are trying to understand the response of living organisms to the presence of nanoparticles of varying size, shape, chemical composition, and surface characteristics.

Question 3.
Discuss the functions of key components in Robots?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics 1
Power conversion unit:
Robots are powered by batteries, solar power, and hydraulics.

Actuators:

  1. Converts energy into movement.
  2. The majority of the actuators produce rotational (or) linear motion.

Most robots are composed of 3 main parts.

The Controller:

  1. This is also known as the “brain” which is run by a computer program.
  2. It gives commands for the moving parts to perform the job.

Most robots are composed of 3 main parts.

Mechanical parts:

  1. Motors
  2. Pistons
  3. Grippers
  4. Wheels and gears that make the robot move, grab, turn and lift.

Sensors:

  1. To tell the robot about its surroundings.
  2. It helps to determine the sizes and shapes of the objects around, the distance between the objects, and the directions as well.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 4.
Elaborate any two types of Robots with relevant examples.
Answer:
(i) Human-Robot: Certain robots are made to resemble humans in appearance and replicate human activities like walking, lifting, and sensing, etc.

  1. Power conversion unit: Robots are powered by batteries, solar power, and hydraulics.
  2. Actuators: Converts energy into movement. The majority of the actuators produce rotational or linear motion.
  3. Electric motors: They are used to actuate the parts of the robots like wheels, arms, fingers,
    legs, sensors, camera, weapon systems etc. Different types of electric motors are used. The most often used ones are AC motor, Brushed DC motor, Brushless DC motor, Geared DC motor, etc.
  4. Pneumatic Air Muscles: They are devices that can contract and expand when air is pumped inside. It can replicate the function of a human muscle. The contract almost 40% when the air is sucked inside them.
  5. Muscle wires: They are thin strands of wire made of shape memory alloys. They can contract by 5% when an electric current is passed through them.
  6. Piezo Motors and Ultrasonic Motors: Basically, we use it for industrial robots.
  7. Sensors: Generally used in task environments as it provides information of real-time knowledge.
  8. Robot locomotion: Provides the types of movements to a robot.
    The different types are:

    • Legged
    • Wheeled
    • Combination of Legged and Wheeled Locomotion
    • Tracked slip/skid.

(ii) Industrial Robots:
Six main types of industrial robots:

  1. Cartesian
  2. SCARA (Selective Compliance Assembly Robot Arm)
  3. Cylindrical
  4. Delta
  5.  Polar
  6. Vertically articulated

Six-axis robots are ideal for:

  1. Arc Welding
  2. Spot Welding
  3. Material Handling
  4. Machine Tending
  5. Other Applications

Question 5.
Comment on the recent advancement in medical diagnosis and therapy.
Answer:
The recent advancement in medical diagnosis and therapy:

  1. Virtual reality
  2. Precision medicine
  3. Health wearables
  4. Artificial organs
  5.  3 – D printing
  6. Wireless brain sensors
  7. Robotic surgery
  8. Smart inhalers

1. Virtual reality:
Medical virtual reality is effectively used to stop the brain from processing pain and cure soreness in the hospitalized patients. Virtual reality has enhanced surgeries by the use of 3D models by surgeons to plan operations. It helps in the treatment of Autism, Memory loss, and Mental illness.

2. Precision medicine:
Precision medicine is an emerging approach for disease treatment and prevention that takes into account individual variability in genes, environment, and lifestyle for each person. In this medical model, it is possible to customise healthcare, with medical decisions, treatments, practices, or products which are tailored to the individual patient.

3. Health wearables:
A health wearable is a device used for tracking a wearer’s vital signs or health and fitness-related data, location, etc. Medical wearables with artificial intelligence and big data provide an added value to healthcare with a focus on diagnosis, treatment, patient monitoring, and prevention.

Note Big Data: Extremely large data sets that may be analysed computationally to reveal patterns, trends, and associations, especially relating to human behavior and interactions.

4. Artificial organs:
An artificial organ is an engineered device or tissue that is implanted or integrated into a human. It is possible to interface it with living tissue or to replace a natural organ. It duplicates or augments a specific function or functions of human organs so that the patient may return to normal life as soon as possible.

5. 3D printing:
Advanced 3D printer systems and materials assist physicians in a range of operations in the medical field from audiology, dentistry, orthopedics, and other applications.

6. Wireless brain sensors:
Wireless brain sensors monitor intracranial pressure and temperature and then are
absorbed by the body. Hence there is no need for surgery to remove these devices.

7. Robotic surgery:
Robotic surgery is a type of surgical procedure that is done using robotic systems. Robotically-assisted surgery helps to overcome the limitations of pre – existing minimally invasive surgical procedures and to enhance the capabilities of surgeons performing open
surgery.

8. Smart inhalers:
Inhalers are the main treatment option for asthma. Smart inhalers are designed with health systems and patients in mind so that they can offer maximum benefit. Smart inhalers use Bluetooth technology to detect inhaler use, remind patients when to take their medication, and gather data to help guide care.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Part – II:

12th Physics Guide Recent Developments in Physics Additional Questions and Answers

I. Match the following:

Question 1.

III
1. Moleculea. Located in the center of an atom
2. Nucleonb. Electrons revolving around the atomic nucleus
3. Atomc. Protons & Neutrons comprising the nucleus of an atom
4. Nucleusd. Composed of two (or) more

Answer:

  1. d
  2. c
  3. b
  4. a

Question 2.

III
1. Geroge Devola. Audiology
2. Nanob. No need surgery
3. Wireless brain sensorsc. One billionth of a meter (109 m)
4. 3D Printingd. Unimate

Answer:

  1. d
  2. c
  3. b
  4. a

Question 3.

III
1. Higgs Particlea. Slavic word
2. Albert Einsteinb. Mass of particle
3. Black Holesc.Gravitational waves
4. Robotd. End stage of stars

Answer:

  1. b
  2. c
  3. d
  4. a

Question 4.

III
1. Stephen Hawkinga. Rossum universal robots
2. Einstein’s theoryb. Twin mars rovers
3. Karl Capekc. Field of black holes
4. Outer spaced. General relativity

Answer:

  1. c
  2. d
  3. a
  4. b

Question 5.

III
1. Inhalersa. Aluminium and steel
2. 3D Printingb. Mars pathfinder mission
3. Make robotsc. Dentistry
4. Outer Spaced. Asthma

Answer:

  1. d
  2. c
  3. a
  4. b

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

II. Fill in the blanks:

Question 1.
_____ existed in nature long before scientists began studying them in laboratories.
Answer:
Nanoscale structures

Question 2.
_____ and _____ is the interdisciplinary area covering its applications in various fields.
Answer:
Nanoscience, technology

Question 3.
Chinese scientists have created the world’s first autonomous DNA robots to combat _______.
Answer:
cancer tumours

Question 4.
________ is the fundamental entity of matter.
Answer:
Atom

Question 5.
There are two ways of preparing the nanomaterials _____ and _____ approaches.
Answer:
top-down, bottom-up

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

III. Choose the odd man out:

Question 1.
The robotic system mainly consists of ________.
a) sensors
b) power supplies
c) blood cells
d) control system
Answer:
c) blood cells

Question 2.
The key components of a robot are _______.
a)Power conversion unit
b) Actuators
c) Electric motors
d) Muscle wires
e) Delta
f) Sensors
Answer:
e) Delta

Question 3.
Six main types of industrial robots are _______.
a) Cartesian
b) SCARA
c) Cylindrical
d) Delta
e) Polar
f) Ultrasonic motors
Answer:
f) Ultrasonic motors

Question 4.
The recent advancement in medical technology includes ________.
a) Artificial organs
b) Precision medicine
c) Virtual reality
d) Pool cleaning
e) 3D printing etc
Answer:
d) Pool cleaning

Question 5.
Household robots are used as _______.
a) floor cleaners
b) gutter cleaners
c) Pool cleaning
d) Investigation of the rocks
e) Lawn mowing
Answer:
d) Investigation of the rocks

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

IV. Find the correct pair:

Question 1.
a) SCARA – Spot welding
b) George Devol and – First robot Joseph Engalberger company
c) Found rocks and soils – Pool cleaning
d) Size less than 100 nm – Bulk solid
Answer:
b) George Devol and Joseph Engalberger – First robot company

Question 2.
a) Top-down approach – Plasma etching
b) Chemical Industry – Glass Fibres
c) Medicine – Active agents
d) Human-Robot – Machine Tending
Answer:
c) Medicine – Active agents

V. Find the incorrect pair:

Question 1.
a) 3D Printing – Audiology
b) Karel Capek – Rossum universal robots
c) Inhalers – Asthma
d) Higgs particle – End stage of stars
Answer:
d) Higgs particle – End stage of stars

Question 2.
a) Higgs particles – God particles
b) Stephen Hawking – Field of Black holes
c) Molecule – Fundamental entity of matter
d) George Devol – Unimate
Answer:
c) Molecule – Fundamental entity of matter

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

VI. Choose the incorrect statement:

Question 1.
Statement 1: Nanotechnology is a technology involving the design, production, characterization, and applications of nanostructured materials.
Statement 2: Nanoparticles of a few micrometers size may reach well inside biomolecules, which is not possible for larger nanoparticles.
a) statement 1
b) statement 2
c) statement 1 and 2
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Statement 2:
Correct Sentence:
Nanoparticles of a few nanometer-size may reach well inside biomolecules, which is not possible for larger nanoparticles.

Question 2.
a) Statement 1: Five major fields of robotics are human-robot interface, mobility, manipulation, programming, and sensors.
b) Statement 2: Aluminum is a softer metal and is, therefore, easier to work with.
c) Statement 3: Industrial robots are used for exploring stars, planets, etc.
d) Statement 4: The robotic system mainly consists of sensors, power supplies, control systems, manipulators and
necessary software.
Answer:
c) Statement 3
Correct Sentence:
Industrial robots are used for welding, cutting, robotic water jet cutting, lifting, etc.

Question 3.
a) Statement 1: Accelerated mass emits gravitational force which is very week.
b) Statement 2: Black holes are the strongest source of gravitational waves.
c) Statement 3: Cosmology is the branch that involves the origin and evolution of the universe.
Answer:
a) Statement 1:
Correct Sentence:
Accelerated mass emits gravitational wave which is very week.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

VII. Choose the correct statement:

Question 1.
a) Statement 1: Human is a mechanical device.
b) Statement 2: Nanoparticles can also cross cell membranes.
c) Statement 3: Top up and Bottom down are the two ways to preparing the nanomaterials.
d) Statement 4: It is possible to deliver a drug directly to a specific cell in the body by designing the surface of bulk particles.
Answer:
b) Statement 2: Nanoparticles can also cross cell membranes.

Question 2.
a) Statement 1: Manipulation of colours is found in laboratories by Morpho butterfly in nature.
b) Statement 2: Similar nanostructures are made in a lab to glow in different colors from peacock feathers in nature.
c) Statement 3: Water repellent nano paints are made from a lotus leaf surface idea.
d) Statement 4: All statements are correct.
Answer:
d) Statement 4: All statements are correct

Question 3.
Nanomaterial-based products in different fields.
a) Statement 1: Lightweight construction in medicine.
b) Statement 2: Displays nanomaterial application in the engineering field.
c) Statement 3: Antimicrobial agents and coating in the medical field.
d) Statement 4: None of these
Answer:
c) Statement 3: Antimicrobial agents and coating in the medical field.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

VIII. Assertion and Reason:

a) Assertion is correct, the reason is correct; the reason is a correct explanation for the assertion.
b) Assertion is correct, the reason is correct; the reason is not a correct explanation for the assertion.
c) Assertion is correct, reason is incorrect.
d) Assertion is incorrect, reason is correct.

Question 1.
Assertion (A):
Nanoparticles can also cross cell membranes.
Reason (R):
It is also possible for the inhaled nanoparticles to reach the blood, other sites as the liver, heart.
Answer:
a) Assertion is correct, the reason is correct; the reason is a correct explanation for the assertion.

Question 2.
Assertion (A):
A drug delivery system is a medical application of a nano-based product.
Reason (R):
The mechanical parts of Robotics are motors, pistons, grippers, wheels, and gears.
Answer:
b) Assertion is correct, the reason is correct; the reason is not a correct explanation for the assertion.

Question 3.
Assertion (A):
Human robots replicate human activities like walking, lifting, and sensing, etc.
Reason (R):
Electric motors are not used in robots.
Answer:
c) Assertion is correct, reason is incorrect.

Question 4.
Assertion (A):
Face recognition is a natural intelligence of robots.
Reason (R):
Robot can translate words from one language to another.
Answer:
d) Assertion is incorrect, reason is correct.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

IX. Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
An automatic apparatus or device that performs functions ordinarily ascribed to human or operate with what appears to be almost human intelligence is called ……………..
(a) Robot
(b) Human
(c) Animals
(d) Reptiles.
Answer:
(a) Robot.

Question 2.
If the particle of a solid is of size less than 100 nm, it is said to be a .
a) nano solid
b) bulk solid
c) nano & bulk solids
d) None of these
Answer:
a) nano solid

Question 3.
The basic components of the robot are ……………..
(a) mechanical linkage
(b) sensors and controllers
(c) user interface and power conversion unit
(d) All the above.
Answer:
(d) All the above.

Question 4.
Nano means ________.
a) 10-33 m
b) 10-6 m
c) 10-9 m
d) 10-12 m
Answer:
c) 10-9 m

Question 5.
_______ and _______ are the two important phenomena that govern nano properties.
a) Quantum confinement effects
b) Surface effects
c) Quantum confinement (or) Surface light
d) Quantum confinement effect and Surface confinement effects
Answer:
d) Quantum confinement effect and Surface confinement effects

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 6.
Which of the following atoms do not move from each other ……………..
(a) Shape memory alloys
(b) Nanomaterials
(c) Dielectrics
(d) Static materials.
Answer:
(b) Nanomaterials

Question 7.
A health wearable is a device used for ________.
a) health and fitness-related data, location, etc.
b) to replace a natural organ
c) (a) and (b)
d) (a) or (b)
Answer:
a) health and fitness-related data, location, etc.

Question 8.
Atom is made up of ________.
a) electrons
b) protons
c) neutrons
d) above all
Answer:
d) above all

Question 9.
For nanometers whose diameters less than …………….are used for welding purposes.
(a) 10 nm
(b) 20 nm
(c) 30 nm
(d) 40 nm.
Answer:
(a) 10 nm

Question 10.
The Strongest source of gravitational waves is _______.
a) black holes
b) accelerated mass
c) sun
d) stars
Answer:
a) black holes

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 11.
This is the black hole at the centre of the milky way galaxy.
a) Sagittarius A*
b) Sagittarius B*
c) Sagittarius C*
d) Sagittarius D*
Answer:
a) Sagittarius A*

Question 12.
Who worked in the field of black holes.
a) Marie curie
b) Stephen Hawking
c) Conrad Rontgen
d) Edward Purcell
Answer:
b) Stephen Hawking

Question 13.
Who is the father of the modem robotics industry formed the world’s first robotic company in 1956 ……………..
(a) Joliot
(b) Cormark
(c) Engelberger
(d) Edward purcell.
Answer:
(c) Engelberger

Question 14.
Slavic word robota means ________.
a) labour
b) work
c) labour (or) work
d) None of these
Answer:
c) labour (or) work

Question 15.
These robots are used for vacuum cleaners, floor cleaners, pool cleaning, etc.,
a) Household robots
b) Industrial robots
c) Space robots
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Household robots

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 16.
Similar nanostructures are made in a lab to glow in different colors.
a) Morpho butterfly
b) Peacock feathers
c) DNA
d) Parrotfish
Answer:
b) Peacock feathers

Question 17.
Manipulation of colours by adjusting the size of nanoparticles from this idea is _______.
a) Morpho butterfly
b) Peacock feathers
c) Parrotfish
d) Lotus leaf surface
Answer:
a) Morpho butterfly

Question 18.
The phenomenon of artificial radioactivity was invented by ……………..
(a) Joliot and Irene curie
(b) Felix Bloch and Edward Purcell
(c ) Connick and Hounsfield
(d) Wilhelm Conrad – Rontgen.
Answer:
(a) Joliot and Irene curie

Question 19.
Bottom up approach example is _______.
a) ball milling
b) sol-gel
c) lithography
d) plasma etching
Answer:
d) plasma etching

Question 20.
Coatings for wind-screen and car bodies
a) Chemical industry
b) Electronic industry
c) Automotive industry
d) Medicine
Answer:
c) Automotive industry

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 21.
This is effectively used to stop the brain from processing pain and cure soreness in the hospitalized patients.
a) Virtual reality
b) Precision medicine
c) Health wearables
d) Artificial organs
Answer:
a) Virtual reality

Question 22.
This is an emerging approach for disease treatment.
a) Artificial organs
b) Health wearables
c) Precision medicine
d) Virtual reality
Answer:
c) Precision medicine

Question 23.
This is possible to interface it with living tissue (or) to replace a natural organ.
a) Precision medicine
b) Health wearables
c) Virtual reality
d) Artificial organs
Answer:
d) Artificial organs

Question 24.
This device used for tracking a wearer’s vital signs.
a) 3D printing
b) Health wearables
c) Artificial organs
d) Robotic surgery
Answer:
b) Health wearables

Question 25.
This monitor intracranial pressure and temperature and then are absorbed by the body.
a) 3D printing
b) Health wearables
c) wireless brain sensors
d) Robotic surgery
Answer:
c) wireless brain sensors

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 26.
Composed of two or more atoms.
a) Molecule
b) Atom
c) Nucleus
d) Nucleon
Answer:
a) Molecule

Question 27.
Electrons revolving around the atomic nucleus.
a) Molecule
b) Atom
c) Nucleus
d) Nucleon
Answer:
b) Atom

Question 28.
Composed of protons and neutrons located in the center of an atom.
a) Molecule
b) Atom
c) Nucleus
d) Nucleon
Answer:
c) Nucleus

Question 29.
Protons and neutrons comprising the nucleus of an atom.
a) Molecule
b) Atom
c) Nucleus
d) Nucleon
Answer:
d) Nucleon

Question 30.
Smart inhaler uses this technology to detect inhaler use.
a) system technology
b) Bluetooth technology
c) both (a) and (b)
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Bluetooth technology

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

X. Two mark questions:

Question 1.
What is physics?
Answer:
Physics is the basic building block for Science, Engineering, Technology, and Medicine.

Question 2.
What is Robotics?
Answer:
Robotics is an integrated study of mechanical engineering, electronic engineering, computer engineering, and science.

Question 3.
What are Robots?
Answer:
The robot is a mechanical device designed with electronic circuitry and programmed to perform a specific task.

Question 4.
What is meant by ‘Robot’? Write its uses?
Answer:
Robot is a mechanical device designed with electronic circuitry and programmed to perform a specific task. These automated machines are highly significant in this robotic era where they can take up the role of humans in certain dangerous environments that are hazardous to people like defusing bombs, finding survivors in unstable ruins, and exploring mines and shipwrecks.

Question 5.
Name main types of industrial robots.
Answer:
Six main types of industrial robots are,

  1. Cartesian
  2. SCARA
  3. Cylindrical
  4. Delta
  5. Polar
  6. Vertically articulated

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 6.
Name the axis robots.
Answer:
Six-axis robots are ideal for

  1. Arc Welding
  2. Spot Welding
  3. Material Handling
  4. Machine Tending
  5. Other applications

Question 7.
What is the aim of artificial intelligence?
Answer:
The aim of artificial intelligence is to bring in human-like behavior in robots.

Question 8.
Define cosmology?
Answer:
Cosmology is the branch that involves the origin and evolution of the universe. It deals with the formation of stars, galaxy, etc.

Question 9.
What are the uses of outer space robots?
Answer:
In outer space, robots are used for exploring stars, planets, etc., investigation of the mineralogy of the rocks and soils on Mars, analysis of elements found in rocks and soils.

Question 10.
Name some outer space robots.
Answer:

  1. Mars Rovers of NASA
  2. Twin Mars Rovers
  3. Mars Pathfinder Mission

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 11.
What are the uses of household robots?
Answer:
Household robots are used as,

  1. Vacuum cleaners
  2. Floor cleaners
  3. Gutter cleaners
  4. Lawn mowing
  5. Pool cleaning
  6. To open and close doors

Question 12.
What are the developments in Nano-robots?
Answer:
Nano-robots are being developed to be in the bloodstream to perform small surgical procedures, to fight against bacteria, repairing individual cells in the body.

Question 13.
Define Particle physics.
Answer:
Particle physics deals with fundamental particles of nature. Protons and neutrons are made of quarks.

Question 14.
What is cosmology?
Answer:
Cosmology is the branch that involves the origin and evolution of the universe.

Question 15.
What is physics?
Answer:

  1. Physics is the basic building block for Science, Engineering, Technology and Medicine.
  2. Nanoscience is the science of objects with typical sizes of 1-100 nm.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 16.
What is Nano?
Answer:
Nano means one-billionth of a meter that is 10-9 m.

Question 17.
What is nano solid?
Answer:
If the particle of a solid is of size less than lOOnm, it is said to be a nano solid.

Question 18.
What is bulk solid?
Answer:
When the particle size exceeds 100 nm, it forms a bulk solid.

Question 19.
Name the two ways of preparing the nanomaterials.
Answer:

  • Top-down approaches
  • Bottom-up approaches

Question 20.
What are the major fields of robotics?
Answer:
Five major fields of robotics are

  1. Human-robot interface
  2. Mobility
  3. Manipulation
  4. Programming
  5. Sensors

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 21.
Is the accelerated mass emits gravitational waves?
Answer:
Yes, the accelerated mass emits gravitational waves which are very weak.

Question 22.
What is the important phenomena of nano properties?
Answer:
Quantum confinement effects and surface effects are the two important phenomena that govern nano properties.

Question 23.
Is the nano form of the material the same as its bulk counterpart?
Answer:
No, The nano form of the material shows strikingly different properties when compared to its bulk counterpart.

Question 24.
Can nanoparticles get absorbed?
Answer:
Yes, Nanoparticles can easily get absorbed onto the surface of living organisms and they might enter the tissues and fluids of the body.

Question 25.
What is the function of inhaled nanoparticles?
Answer:
The inhaled nanoparticles reach the blood and that may also reach other sites such as the liver, heart, and blood cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 26.
Can nanoparticles cross the cell membrane?
Answer:
Yes, nanoparticles can also cross cell membranes.

Question 27.
Is the larger nanoparticles can reach inside the biomolecules?
Answer:

  1. The absorbing nature depends on the surface of the nanoparticle.
  2. Nanoparticles of a few nanometers size may reach well inside biomolecules, which is not possible for larger nanoparticles.

Question 28.
What is Unimate?
Answer:
In 1954, George Devol invented the first digitally operated programmable robot called “Unimate”.

Question 29.
Write a short note on Human-Robot.
Answer:
Certain robots are made to resemble humans in appearance and replicate human activities like walking, lifting and sensing, etc.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

XI. Three mark questions:

Question 1.
List out the nanomaterial-based products in the automotive industry.
Answer:

  1. Lightweight construction
  2. Painting (fillers, base coat, clear coat)
  3. Catalysts
  4. Tires (fillers)
  5. Sensors
  6. Coatings for wind-screen and car bodies

Question 2.
Give five examples of nanomaterial-based products in the chemical industry.
Answer:

  1. Fillers for paint systems
  2. Coating systems based on nanocomposites
  3. Impregnation of papers
  4. Switchable adhesives
  5. Magnetic fluids

Question 3.
Write the application of nanomaterial-based products in construction.
Answer:

  1. Construction materials
  2. Thermal insulation
  3. Flame retardants
  4. Surface-functionalized building materials for wood, floors, stone, facades, tiles, roof tiles, etc.
  5. Facade coatings
  6. Groove mortar

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 4.
What are the applications of nanomaterial-based products in the following areas?
i) Textile
ii) Energy
iii) cosmetics
Answer:

Textile/fabrics/ non-wovensEnergyCosmetics
1. Surface Processed textiles
2. Smart clothes
1. Fuel cells
2. Solar cells
3. Batteries
4. Capacitors
1. Sun protection
2. Lipsticks
3. Skin creams
4. toothpaste

Question 5.
List the nanomaterial-based products in Engineering.
Answer:

  1. Wear protection for tools and machines (anti-blocking coatings, scratch-resistant coatings on plastic parts, etc.)
  2. Lubricant-free bearings.

Question 6.
Write about the top-down approach of nanomaterials synthesis.
Answer:
Top-down approach:

  • Nanomaterials are synthesised by breaking down bulk solids into nano sizes.
  • Ex: Ball milling, sol-gel, lithography.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 7.
What is bottom-up approach?
Answer:

  1. Nanomaterials are synthesised by assembling the atoms/molecules together.
  2. Selectively atoms are added to create structures.
  3. Example: Plasma etching and chemical vapour deposition.

Question 8.
Short note on nano in laboratories.
Answer:

  1. The nanostructures made in the laboratory mimic some of nature’s amazing nanostructures.
  2. As the nanostructures are so small, specialized methods are needed to manufacture objects in this size range.
  3. There are two ways of preparing the nanomaterials, top-down and bottom-up approaches.

Question 9.
Mention the uses of wireless brain sensors.
Answer:

  1. Wireless brain sensors monitor intracranial pressure and temperature and then are absorbed by the body.
  2. Hence there is no need for surgery to remove these devices.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 10.
What is robotic surgery?
Answer:

  1. Robotic surgery is a type of surgical procedure that is done using robotic systems.
  2. Robotically assisted surgery helps to overcome the limitations of pre-existing minimally-invasive surgical procedures and to enhance the capabilities of surgeons performing open surgery.

Question 11.
What do you know about smart inhalers?
Answer:

  1. Inhalers are the main treatment option for asthma.
  2. Smart inhalers are designed with health systems and patients in mind so that they can offer maximum benefit.
  3. Smart inhalers use BlueTooth technology to detect inhaler use, remind patients when to take their medication, and gather data to help guide care.

Question 12.
What is the role of physics in medical diagnosis?
Answer:

  1. Medical science very much revolves around physics principles.
  2. Medical instrumentation has widened the life span due to the technology integrated diagnosis and treatment of most of the diseases.
  3. This modernisation in all fields is possible due to the efficient application of fundamental physics.

Question 13.
What is gravitational waves? How are they produced?
Answer:

  1. Gravitational waves are the disturbances in the curvature of space-time and it travels with the speed of light.
  2. Any accelerated charge emits an electromagnetic wave. Any accelerated mass emits gravitational waves but these waves are very weak even for masses like earth. The strongest source of gravitational waves is black holes.
  3. The recent discoveries of gravitational waves are emitted by two black holes when they merge into a single black hole.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 14.
Can we completely replace humans with robots? Give any three reasons.
Answer:
No, we cannot completely replace humans with robots. Following are the reasons:

  1. Robots have no sense of emotions or conscience.
  2. Robots cannot handle unexpected situations.
  3. Humans cannot be replaced by robots in decision-making.

Question 15.
What is a quark?
Answer:

  1. A quark is a type of elementary particle and a fundamental constituent of matter.
  2. Quarks combine to form composite particles called hadrons, the most stable of which are protons and neutrons, the components of atomic nuclei.

Question 16.
How nano are found in mimic in laboratories from i) Morpho butterfly ii) Peacock feathers.
Answer:

  1. Morpho butterfly: Manipulation of colours by adjusting the size of nanoparticles with which the materials are made.
  2. Peacock feathers: Similar nanostructures are made in a lab to glow in different colors.

Question 17.
From parrotfish, how nano are found in laboratories?
Answer:
The natural structure provides a blueprint for creating ultra-durable synthetic materials that could be useful for mechanical components in electronics and in other devices that undergo repetitive movement, abrasion, and contact stress.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 18.
How the lotus leaf surface (Nano in nature) found in laboratories?
Answer:

  1. Water repellant nano paints are made.
  2. Coating with such nano paints gives durability, protection against stains and dirt also enhances fuel efficiency when coated on ships.

Question 19.
What do you know about animate?
Answer:

  1. In 1954, George Devol invented the first digitally operated programmable robot called Unimate.
  2. George Devol and Joseph Engelberger, the father of the modern robotics industry formed the world’s first robot company in 1956.
  3. In 1961, Unimate was operated in a General Motors automobile factory for moving car parts around in New Jersey.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

XII. Five mark questions:

Question 1.
Write the advantage of Robotics.
Answer:

  1. Robots are much cheaper than humans.
  2. Robots never get tired like humans. It can work 24 x 7. Hence absenteeism in the workplace can be reduced.
  3. Robots are more precise and error-free in performing the task.
  4. Stronger and faster than humans.
  5. Robots can work in extreme environmental conditions: extreme hot (or) cold, space (or) underwater.
  6. In dangerous situations like bomb detection and bomb deactivation.
  7. In warfare, robots can save human lives.
  8. Robots are significantly used in handling materials in chemical industries especially in nuclear plants which can lead to health hazards in humans.

Question 2.
List out the disadvantage of Robotics.
Answer:

  1. Robots have no sense of emotions or conscience.
  2. They lack empathy and hence create an emotionless workplace.
  3. If ultimately robots would do all the work, and the humans will just sit and monitor them, health hazards will increase rapidly.
  4. The unemployment problem will increase.
  5. Robots can perform defined tasks and can’t handle unexpected situations
  6. The robots are well programmed to do a job and if a small thing goes wrong it ends up in a big loss to the company.
  7. If a robot malfunctions, it takes time to identify the problem, rectify it, and even program if necessary. This process requires significant time.
  8. Humans can’t be replaced by robots in decision-making.
  9. Till the robot reaches the level of human intelligence, the humans in the workplace will exit.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 3.
Give an example of “Nano” in nature.
Answer:

  1. A single strand of DNA the building block of all living things is about three nanometers wide.
  2. The scales on the wings of a morpho butterfly contain nanostructures that change the way light waves interact with each other, giving the wings brilliant metallic blue and green hues.
  3. Peacock feathers get their iridescent coloration from light interacting with 2-dimensional photonic crystal structures just tens of nanometers thick.
  4. Parrotfish crunches up coral all day. The source of the parrot fish’s powerful bite is the interwoven fiber nanostructure.
  5. Crystals of a mineral called fluorapatite are woven together in a chain mail-like arrangement. This structure gives parrotfish teeth incredible durability.
  6. Lotus leaf surface scanning electron micrograph (SEM) showing the nanostructures on the surface of a leaf from a lotus plant. This is the reason for the self-cleaning process in lotus leaf.

Question 4.
List out the applications of Nanotechnology in various fields.
Answer:

  1. Optical engineering and communication
  2. Electronics
  3. Metallurgy and materials
  4. Defense and security
  5. Energy storage
  6. Biomedical and drug delivery
  7. Agriculture and food
  8. Cosmetics and paints
  9. Biotechnology
  10. Textile

Question 5.
Explain about Nanorobots.
Answer:

  1. The size of the nanorobots is reduced to a microscopic level to perform a task in very small spaces.
  2. However, it is only in the developmental stage.
  3. The future prospects of it are much expected in the medical field:
    • Nano-robots in the bloodstream to perform small surgical procedures.
    • To fight against bacteria
    • Repairing individual cells in the body.
  4. It can travel into the body and once the job is performed it can find its way out.
  5. Chinese scientists have created the world’s first autonomous DNA robots to combat cancer tumours.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 6.
List out the recent advancement in medical technology.
Answer:

  1. Virtual reality
  2. Precision medicine
  3. Health wearables
  4. Artificial organs
  5. 3D printing
  6. Wireless brain sensors
  7. Robotic surgery
  8. Smart inhalers

Question 7.
Discuss the applications of nanomaterial-based products in
i) Electronic Industry
ii) Medicine.
Answer:

Electronic industryMedicine
1. Data memory
2. Displays
3. Laser diodes
4. Glass fibers
5. Optical switches
6. Filters
7. Conductive, antistatic coatings
1. Drug delivery system
2. Active agents
3. Contrast medium
4. Medical rapid tests
5. Prostheses and implants
6. Antimicrobial agents and coatings
7. Agents in cancer therapy

Question 8.
Write about artificial intelligence briefly.
Answer:
The aim of artificial intelligence is to bring in human-like behaviour in robots. It works on

  1. Face recognition
  2. Providing a response to player’s actions in computer games
  3. Taking decisions based on previous actions
  4. To regulate the traffic by analyzing the density of traffic on roads.
  5. Translate words from one language to another

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 11 Recent Developments in Physics

Question 9.
What are the uses of industrial robots?
Answer:
Industrial robots are used for

  1. Welding
  2. Cutting
  3. Lifting
  4. Packing
  5. Transport
  6. Sorting
  7. Bending
  8. Assembling
  9. Manufacturing
  10. Weaponry
  11. Industrial goods
  12. Laboratory research
  13. Mass production of consumer
  14. Robotic water jet cutting
  15. Robotic laser cutting
  16. Handling hazardous materials like nuclear waste.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 10 Communication Systems Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Communication Systems

12th Physics Guide Communication Systems Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – I:

Textbook Evaluation:

I. Multiple Choice questions:

Question 1.
The output transducer of the communication system converts the radio signal into
a) Sound
b) Mechanical energy
c) Kinetic energy
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) Sound

Question 2.
The signal is affected by noise in a communication system
a) At the transmitter
b) At the modulator
c) In the channel
d) At the receiver
Answer:
c) In the channel

Question 3.
The variation of frequency of carrier wave with respect to the amplitude of the modulating signal is called
a) Amplitude modulation
b) Frequency modulation
c) Phase modulation
d) Pulse width modulation
Answer:
b) Frequency modulation

Question 4.
The interntionally accepted frequency deviation for the purpose of FM broadcasts.
a) 75 kHz
b) 68 kHz
c) 80 kHz
d) 70 kHz
Answer:
a) 75 kHz

Question 5.
The frequency range of 3 MHz to 30 MHz is used for
a) Ground wave propagation
b) Space wave propagation
c) Sky wave propagation
d) Satellite communication
Answer:
c) Sky wave propagation

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

II. Short Answers Questions:

Question 1.
Give the factors that are responsible for transmission impairments.
Answer:
Attenuation:
The strength of signal decreases with increasing distance which causes loss of energy.
Distortion:
Change in the shape of the signal
Noise:
Random or unwanted signal mixes up with the original sound.

Question 2.
Distinguish between wireline and wireless communication? Specify the range of electromagnetic waves in which it is used.
Answer:

Wireline CommunicationWireless Communication
It uses wires, cables and optical fibres as a mediumIt uses free space as a medium
It cannot be used for long distance transmissionIt can be used for long distance transmission
Ex. Telephone, intercom and cable TVEx. Mobile, radio or TV broadcasting and satellite communication

Question 3.
Explain centre frequency or resting frequency in frequency modulation.
Answer:
When the frequency of the baseband signal is zero (no input signal), there is no change in the frequency of the carrier wave. It is at its normal frequency and is called center frequency or resting frequency.

Question 4.
What does RADAR stand for?
Answer:

  • RADAR stands for Radio Detection and Ranging
  • It is used to sense, detect and locate distant objects like aircraft, ships, spacecraft, etc.

Question 5.
What do you mean by the Internet of Things?
Answer:
Internet of Things (IoT), it is made possible to control various devices from a single device. Example: home automation using a mobile phone.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

III. Long Answers Questions:

Question 1.
What is modulation? Explain the types of modulation with necessary diagrams.
Answer:
Modulation:
For long-distance transmission, the low-frequency baseband signal (input signal) is superimposed onto a high-frequency radio signal by a process called modulation.

i) Amplitude modulation:
1. If the amplitude of the carrier signal is modified according to the instantaneous amplitude of the baseband signal.
2. The frequency and the phase of the carrier signal remains constant.
3. It is used in radio and TV broadcasting.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems 1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems 2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems 3

Advantages of AM:
1. Easy transmission and reception
2. Lesser bandwith
3. Low cost

Disadvantages of AM:
1. High noise level
2. Low efficiency
3. Small operating range

ii) Frequency modulation:
1. Frequency of the carrier signal is modified according to the instantaneous amplitude of the baseband signal.
2. The amplitude and the phase of the carrier signal remain constant.
3. Increase in the amplitude of the baseband signal increases the carrier signal frequency.
4. Louder signals form compressions and weaker signals form rarefactions.
5. When the frequency of the baseband signal is zero, there is no change in the frequency of the carrier wave. This is known as centre frequency or resting frequency.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems 4

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems 5

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems 6

Advantages:
1. Decrease in noise
2. Efficiency is high
3. Operating range is quite large
4. Better quality

Disadvantages:
1. Requires wider channel
2. Less area is covered.
3. Transmitters and receivers are complex and costly.

Phase Modulation:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems 7

1. The instantaneous amplitude of the baseband signal modifies the phase of the carrier signal keeping the amplitude and frequency constant.
2. The frequency shift depends on

  • the amplitude of the modulating signal and
  • the frequency of the signal.

3. When the modulating signal goes positive, the amount of phase lead increases with the amplitude of the modulating signal.
4. The carrier signal is compressed or its frequency is increased.
5. The negative half cycle of the baseband signal produces lag in the carrier signal.
6. Phase modulated wave also comprises of compressions and rarefactions.
7. When the signal voltage is zero, (A, C and E) the carrier frequency is unchanged.

Advantages:
1. FM Signal produced from PM signal is very stable.
2. The center frequency called resting frequency is stable.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 2.
Elaborate on the basic elements of a communication system with the necessary block diagram.
Answer:
1. Information (Baseband or input signal):
i. Information can be in the form of a sound signal like speech, music, pictures or computer data.
ii. These can be given as input to the input transducer.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems 10

 

2. Input transducer:
i. It converts variation in a physical quantity such as pressure, temperature, sound into equivalent electrical signals or vice versa.
ii. It converts the information into corresponding electrical signals.
iii. The electrical equivalent of the original information is called baseband signal.

3. Transmitter:
It is located at the broadcasting station.

a) Amplifier:
Very weak transducer output is amplified

b) Oscillator:
i. For long-distance, the high-frequency carrier wave is transmitted into space.
ii. Energy of the wave is proportional to its frequency, so the carrier wave has very high energy.

c) Modulator:
It superimposes the baseband signal onto the carrier signal and generates the modulated signal.

d) Power amplifier:
To cover a large distance, the power level of the electrical signal is increased.

4. Transmitting antenna:
i. It travels in the form of electromagnetic waves with the velocity of light
ii. Used for long-distance transmission
iii. Ex: Mobile, radio or TV broadcasting, satellite communication.

5. Communication channel:
To carry the electrical signal from transmitter to receiver with less noise or distortion.

Wireline Communication:
i. Medium – Wires, Cables, and optical fibers
ii. Cannot be used for long-distance transmission
iii. Ex: Telephone, intercom and Cable TV

Wireless communication:
i. Medium – free space
ii. Signals are transmitted in the form of electromagnetic waves.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

6. Noise:
i. Undesirable electrical signal
ii. Reduces the quality of the transmitted signal.
iii. It may be man-made or natural.
iv. It cannot be completely eliminated but it can be reduced.

7. Receiver:
i. The transmitted signals are fed into the receiver.
ii. Receiver consists of the demodulator, amplifier, detector etc.
iii. Demodulator extracts the baseband signal from the carrier.
iv. Then it is amplified and detected, then fed to the output transducer.

8. Repeaters:
i. Combination of transmitter and receiver
ii. Increase the range or distance through which the signals are sent.
iii. Signals are received, amplified, and retransmitted with a different frequency to the destination.
iv. Ex. Communication satellite in space.

9. Output transducer:
i. Converts the electrical signal back to its original form such as sound, music, pictures or data.
ii. Ex : Loudspeakers, Picture tubes, Computer monitor etc.

10. Attenuation:
The loss of strength of a signal while propagating through a medium.

11. Range:
i. Maximum distance between the source and the destination.
ii. The signal is received with sufficient strength.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 3.
Explain the three inodes of propagation of electromagnetic waves through space.
Answer:
According to the frequency range, the electromagnetic wave transmitted by the transmitter travels in three different modes.

1. Ground Wave propagation (or) Surface Wave propagation:
i. The electromagnetic waves are transmitted by the transmitter glide over the surface of the earth to reach the receiver.
ii. Both transmitting and receiving antennas must be close to the earth.
iii. The size of the antenna decides the efficiency of the radiation of signals.
iv. Some reasons for attenuation are

a) Increasing distance:
Attenuation of the signal depends on
(i) Power of the transmitter
(ii) frequency of the transmitter
(iii) Condition of the earth surface.

b) Absorption of energy by the Earth:
i. Transmitted signal is in contact with the Earth, it induces charges in the Earth and constitutes a current.
ii. The Earth behaves like a leaky capacitor which leads to the attenuation of the wave.

c) Tilting of the wave:
i. The wavefront starts gradually tilting according to the curvature of the Earth.
ii. When the tilt increases, the electric field strength decreases.
iii. At some distance, the surface wave dies out due to energy loss.
iv. The frequency of the ground waves is mostly less than 2 MHz
v. It is used in local broadcasting, radio navigation, for ship – to ship, ship – to shore communication and mobile communication.

2. Skywave propagation (or) Ionospheric propagation:
i. The electromagnetic waves are radiated from an antenna, directed upwards at large angles gets reflected by the ionosphere back to earth.
ii. Due to the absorption of ultraviolet rays, cosmic ray and other high energy radiations like α, β rays from sun get ionized.
iii. These charged ions provide a reflecting medium for the reflection of radio waves.
iv. The phenomenon of bending the radio waves back to earth is due to total internal reflection.
v. The shortest distance between the transmitter and the point of reception of the skywave along the surface is called as the skip distance.
vi. When the angle of emission increases, the reception of ground waves decreases.
vii. A zone where there is no reception of electromagnetic waves neither ground nor sky is called skip zone or skip area.
viii. In this mode of propagation, the frequency range of EM waves is 3 to 30 MHz.
ix. It is used for short wave broadcast services.
x. Extremely long-distance communication is possible.
xi. A single reflection helps to travel a distance of approximately 4000 km.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

3. Space Wave propagation:
i. The process of sending and receiving information signal through space.
ii. EM waves of very high frequencies above 30 MHz are used.
iii. Waves travel in a straight line from the transmitter to the receiver.
iv. The transmission towers must high.
v. For high frequencies, the signals will not encounter the curvature of the earth.
vi. It travels with less attenuation and loss of signal strength.
vii. TV broadcast, satellite communication and RADAR are based on this propagation
viii. It has some advantages, larger bandwith, high data rates, better directivity, small antenna size, low power consumption etc.
ix. Range depends on the height of the antenna (h).
x. Range or distance (d) = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{Rh}}\)
R – Radius of the earth
R = 6400 Km.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 4.
What do you know about GPS? Write a few applications of GPS.
Answer:
GPS:

  1. GPS stands for Global Positioning System.
  2. It offers geolocation and time information anywhere on or near the earth.
  3. It works with the assistance of a satellite network.
  4. It broadcasts a precise signal like an ordinary radio signal.
  5. It convey the location data which is translated by the GPS software.
  6. This software recognize the satellite, its location ahd time taken to travel from each satellite.
  7. Then the data from each satellite is processed to estimate the location of the receiver.

Applications:

  1. It is used in fleet vehicle management for tracking cars, trucks and buses.
  2. In wildlife management for counting of wild animals.
  3. In engineering for making tunnels, bridges etc.

Question 5.
Give the applications of ICT is mining and agriculture sectors.
Answer:
ICT in mining:

  1. Improves operational efficiency, remote monitoring and disaster locating system.
  2. Provides audio – visual warning to the trapped underground miners.
  3. Helps to connect remote sites.

ICT in agriculture:

  1. Increases food productivity and farm management.
  2. Optimize the use of water, seeds and fertilizers etc.
  3. It is used in farming to decides the suitable place for the species to be planted.
  4. It can be used in sophisticated technologies like robots, temperature, moisture sensors, aerial images and GPS technology.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 6.
Modulation helps to reduce the antenna size in wireless communication Explain.
Answer:

  1. Antenna is used at both transmitter and receiver.
  2. Antenna height is important in wireless communication.
  3. The height of the antenna must be a muiltiple of \(\frac{\lambda}{4}\).
    i.e h = \(\frac{\lambda}{4}\)
    Where, λ = \(\frac{C}{\gamma}\), C = Velocity of light
    γ – frequency λ – wavelength
  4. Consider two base band signals.
  5. One is modulated and the other is not modulated
  6. Frequency of the original baseband signal, γ = 10 KHz
  7. Frequency of the modulated signal, γ = 1 MHz
  8. Height required to transmit the original baseband signal is,
    h1 = \(\frac{\lambda}{4}=\frac{C}{4 \gamma}\)
    = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{4 \times 10 \times 10^{3}}\) = 7.5 Km
    Height required to transmit the modulated signal is
    h2 = \(\frac{\lambda}{4}=\frac{C}{4 \gamma}\)
    = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{4 \times 10 \times 10^{6}}\) = 75 m
  9. From the above example, it is clear that modulated signals reduce the height of the antenna.

Question 7.
Fiber-optic communication is gaining popularity among the various transmission media – justify.
Answer:
The method of transmitting information from one place to another in terms of light pulses through an optical fiber is called fiber optic communication. It is in the process of replacing wire transmission in communication systems. Light has very high frequency (400 THz – 790 THz) than microwave radio systems.  The fibers are made up of silica glass or silicon dioxide which is highly abundant on Earth.

Now it has been replaced with materials such as chalcogenide glasses, fluoro aluminate crystalline materials because they provide larger infrared wavelength and better transmission capability. As fibers are not electrically conductive, it is preferred in places where multiple channels are to be laid and isolation is required from electrical and electromagnetic interference.

Applications:
Optical fiber system has a number of applications namely, international communication, inter-city communication, data links, plant and traffic control and defense applications.

Merits:

  1. Fiber cables are very thin and weight lesser than copper cables.
  2. This system has much larger bandwidth. This means that its information-carrying capacity is larger.
  3. Fiber optic system is immune to electrical interferences.
  4. Fiber optic cables are cheaper than copper cables.

Demerits:

  1. Fiber optic cables are more fragile when compared to copper wires.
  2. It is an expensive technology.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

PART – II:

12th Physics Guide Communication Systems Additional Questions and Answers

I. Matching Type Questions:

Question 1.

Column 1Column 2
1. Wireless communicationa. 30 MHz to 400 GHz
2. Ground wave propagationb. 3 MHz to 30 GHz
3. Sky wave propagationc. 2 KHz to 2 MHz
4. Space wave propagationd. 2 KHz to 400 GHz

Answer:

  1. d
  2. c
  3. b
  4. a

Question 2.

Column 1Column 2
1. GPSa. Fisheries
2. GSMb. Military and Navigation systems
3. ICTc. Mobile communication
4. RADARd. Counting of wild animals

Answer:

  1. d
  2. c
  3. a
  4. b

Question 3.

Column 1Column 2
1. Uplink Frequency banda. 20 – 20,000 Hz
2. Downlink Frequency bandb. 400 THz – 790 THz
3. Very High frequency of lightc. 6 GHz
4. Audio frequencyd. 4 GHz

Answer:

  1. c
  2. d
  3. b
  4. a

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

II. Fill in the blanks:

Question 1.
_______ gives the difference between the upper and lower frequency limits of the signal.
Answer:
Bandwidth

Question 2.
For a frequencv less than the critical frequencv, skip distance is _______.
Answer:
Zero

Question 3.
Multimode fibers operate at the speed of _______.
Answer:
10 Mbps

Question 4.
Radar uses _______ for communication.
Answer:
electromagnetic waves.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

III. Choose the Odd man out:

Question 1.
a) Input transducer
b) Amplifier
c) Oscillator
d) Demodulator
Answer:
d) Demodulator

Question 2.
a) Telephone
b) mobile
c) intercom
d) Cable TV
Answer:
b) Mobile

Question 3.
a) Weather satellites
b) Communication
c) satellites
d) Navigation satellites
e) RADAR
Answer:
e) RADAR

Question 4.
a) Total internal reflection
b) skip distance
c) amplitude modulation
d) skip zone
Answer:
c) Amplitude modulation

IV. Choose the incorrect pair:

Question 1.
i) Space wave propagation – LOS
ii) Tracking cars – ICT
iii) Counting of wild animals – GPS
iv) Home automation using
a mobile phone – IoT
Answer:
ii) Tracking cars – ICT

Question 2.
i) Input transducer – Microphone
ii) Output transducer – Loudspeakers
iii) Transmitter – Broadcasting station
iv) Oscillator – Low-frequency carrier wave
Answer:
iv) Oscillator – Low-frequency carrier wave

Question 3.
i) Bandwidth, BW – γ1 – γ2
ii) Amplitude modulation system – 10 KHz
iii) Single side – band system – 5 KHz
iv) Height of the Antenna – \(\frac{\lambda}{4}\)
Answer:
i) Bandwidth, BW – γ1 – γ2

Question 4.
i) Amplitude – High-efficiency modulation
ii) Baseband signal – input signal
iii) Carrier signal – a radio signal
iv) Resting frequency – centre frequency
Answer:
i) Amplitude modulation – High efficiency

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

V. Choose the correct pair:

Question 1.
i) Attenuation – Amplitude of the transmitter
ii) High frequency – High skip distance
iii) Skip distance – The longest distance
iv) RADAR – Ground wave propagation
Answer:
ii) High frequency – High skip distance

Question 2.
i) Audio frequency – 200 to 2000 Hz
ii) Carrier wave – Cosine wave
iii) Louder signal – Compressions
iv) Frequency shift – Rarefaction
Answer:
iii) Louder signal- Compressions

Question 3.
i) Velocity of light – 3 × 106 m/ s
ii) Radius of the earth – 6800 Km
iii) Date speed for homes – 2 Gbps
iv) Antenna height – d = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{Rh}}\)
Answer:
iv) Antenna height – d = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{Rh}}\)

Question 4.
i) Skywave propagation – 3 MHz to 30 MHz
ii) Space wave propagation – 30 MHz to 40 MHz
iii) Ground wave propagation – 20 KHz to 20 MHz
iv) Wireless communication – 1 KHz to 2 KHz
Answer:
i) Skywave propagation – 3 MHz to 30 MHz

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

VI. Assertion and Reason:

Question 1.
Assertion:
Short wave bands are used for the transmission of radio waves to a large distance.
Reason:
Short waves are reflected by the ionosphere.
a) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
b) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
c) Assertion is true but reason is false
d) Assertion is false but reason is true.
Answer:
a) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.

Question 2.
Assertion:
Television broadcasting becomes weaker with increasing distance.
Reason:
The power transmitted from the TV transmitter varies inversely as the distance of the receiver.
a) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
b) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
c) Assertion is true but reason is false
d) Assertion is false but reason is true.
Answer:
c) Assertion is true but reason is false

Question 3.
Assertion:
Optical fibre communication has immunity to cross talk.
Reason:
Optical interference between fibres is zero.
a) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
b) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
c) Assertion is true but reason is false
d) Assertion is false but reason is true.
Answer:
a) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.

Question 4.
Assertion:
A dish antenna is highly directionals
Reason:
This is because a dipole antenna is omnidirectional.
a) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
b) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
c) Assertion is true but reason is false
d) Assertion is false but reason is true.
Answer:
b) Assertion and the reason are true and the reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

VII. Choose the correct statement:

Question 1.
i) A transducer is a device which converts an electrical signal into variations in a physical quantity.
ii) Transmitting antenna radiates the radio signal into space in all directions.
iii) The power amplifier decreases the power level of the signal
iv) The minimum distance between the source and the destination is called a range
Answer:
Statement (ii) is correct.

Question 2.
i) Attenuation depends on the frequency of the transmitter.
ii) Increase in the tilt increases the electric field strength.
iii) Transmitting and receiving antenna must be close to the earth.
iv) The frequency of the ground waves is most less than 1 MHz.
Answer:
Statements (i) and (iii) are correct

Question 3.
i) The higher the frequency, lower is the skip distance.
ii) Bending of radio waves back to earth is called refraction.
iii)The frequency range of EM wave in skywave propagation is 30 to 300 MHz.
iv) When the angle of emission increases, the reception of ground waves decreases.
Answer:
Statement (iv) is correct.

Question 4.
i) The transducer output is very weak
ii)The electrical equivalent of the original information is called the carrier signal.
iii) Microphone converts electrical energy into sound energy.
iv) Wireline communication uses free space as a communication medium.
Answer:
Statement (i) is correct.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

VIII. Choose the incorrect statement:

Question 1.
i) Noise is the undesirable electrical signal.
ii) It attenautes or reduces the quality of the signal
iii) It may be man – made or natural
iv) Noise can be completely eliminated.
Answer:
Statement (iv) is correct.

Question 2.
i) Operating range is quite large in FM
ii) In FM, there is a large increase in noise
iii) Am radio has better quality compared to FM radio.
iv) FM requires a much under channel
Answer:
Statement (ii) & (iii) are incorrect

Question 3.
i) Noise level is low in AM
ii) There is a lesser landwidth in AM
iii) In A.M the efficiency is low
iv) Small operating range in AM
Answer:
Statement (i) is incorrect

Question 4.
i) ICT in mining helps to connect remote sites.
ii) ICT is widely used in decreasing food productivity
iii) ICT improves operational efficiency
iv) ICT are also used in fisheries
Answer:
Statement (ii) is incorrect

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

IX. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
Which of the following frequencies will be suitable for beyond the horizon communication using sky waves?
(a) 10 kHz
(b) 10 MHz
(c) 1 GHz
(d) 1000 GHz
Answer:
(b) 10 MHz
Hint:
A frequency of 10 kHz will require a very large radiating antenna while frequencies 1GHz and 1000 GHz will penetrate the ionosphere and cannot be reflected by it.

Question 2.
Cellular phones use radio waves in ______ band.
a) long-wave
b) short wave
c) medium wave
d) ultra-high frequency
Answer:
d) ultra-high frequency

Question 3.
Antenna is
(a) inductive
(b) capacitive
(c) resistive above its resonant frequency
(d) resistive at the resonant frequency
Answer:
(d) resistive at the resonant frequency.
Hint:
An antenna is a tuned circuit consisting of an inductance and a capacitance. At the resonant frequency, it is resistive.

Question 4.
In space wave propagation, the range of the propagation depends on the height (h) of the antenna given by the equation.
a) \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{Rh}}\)
b) \(\sqrt{\frac{R h}{2}}\)
c) \(\sqrt{2 R^{2} h}\)
d) \(\frac{h}{2 R}\)
Answer:
a) \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{Rh}}\)

Question 5.
_______ modulation is used in radio and TV broadcasting.
a) Frequency
b) Phase
c) Amplitude
d) Carrier
Answer:
c) Amplitude

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 6.
If a ________ wave is used as the baseband signal, then phase reversal takes place in the modulated signal.
a) Square
b) Sine
c) Cosine
d) triangular
Answer:
a) Square

Question 7.
An oscillator is producing FM waves of frequency 2 kHz with a variation of 10 kHz. What is the modulation index?
(a) 0.67
(b) 5.00
(c) 0.20
(d) 1.5
Answer:
(b) 5.00
Hint:
mf = \(\frac { ∆f }{ f }\) = \(\frac { 10kHz }{ 2kHz }\) = 5

Question 8.
The best example of transducer is________
a) Loudspeaker
b) picture tubes
c) computer monitor
d) microphone
Answer:
d) microphone

Question 9.
________ generates high – frequency carrier wave.
a) Modulator
b) Oscillator
c) Amplifier
d) Power amplifier
Answer:
b) Oscillator

Question 10.
The maximum distance upto which TV transmission from a TV tower of height h can be received is proportional to
(a) h1/2
(b) h
(c) 3/2
(d) h2
Answer:
(a) h1/2
Hint:
d = \(\sqrt { 2Rh } \) ; d ∝ h1/2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 11.
The height of the antenna must be a multiple of _______.
a) \(\frac{\lambda}{4}\)
b) \(\frac{\lambda}{8}\)
c) 4λ
d) 2λ
Answer:
a) \(\frac{\lambda}{4}\)

Question 12.
The relation between the frequency, the velocity of light, and wavelength is given by ________.
a) C = γλ
b) C = \(\frac{\lambda}{\gamma}\)
c) λ = \(\frac{C}{\gamma}\)
d) both (a) and (c)
Answer:
d) both (a) and (c)

Question 13.
In AM, the channel bandwidth is ______ the signal frequency
a) thrice
b) twice
c) equal to
d) half
Answer:
b) twice

Question 14.
The height of the transmitting and receiving antenna must be a multiple of
a) 2λ
b) λ/4
c) λ/2
d) 4λ
Answer:
b) λ/4

Question 15.
A laser beam is used for carrying out surgery because it
(a) is highly monochromatic
(b) is highly coherent
(e) is highly directional
(d) can be sharply focused
Answer:
(d) can be sharply focused
Hint:
A laser beam is highly monochromatic, directional, and coherent and hence it can be sharply focused for carrying out surgery.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 16.
The _______ of the antenna plays a major role in deciding the efficiency of the radiation of the signals.
a) shape
b) distance
c) direction
d) size
Answer:
d) size

Question 17.
A single reflection helps the radio waves to travel a distance of approximately
a) 40 km
b) 400 km
c) 4000 km
d) 4 km
Answer:
c) 4000 km

Question 18.
When the angle of emission increases, the reception of ground waves _______.
a) increases
b) decreases
c) remains constant
d) none of the above
Answer:
b) decreases

Question 19.
The principle used in the transmission of signals through an optical fiber is
(a) total internal reflection
(b) refraction
(c) dispersion
(d) interference
Answer:
(a) total internal reflection
Hint:
Signals propagate through an optical fiber by suffering repeated total internal reflections.

Question 20.
The fibres are made up of _______.
a) glass
b) silicon
c) silica glass
d) both a & c
Answer:
d) both a & c

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 21.
_______ provide the fastest transmission rate compared to any other form of transmission
a) Cable wires
b) Fibers
c) Fiber optic cables
d) Copper wire
Answer:
c) Fiber optic cables

Question 22.
________ is a fast-growing technology in the field communication system.
a) Mobile
b) Satellite
c) Fiber optics
d) Internet
Answer:
d) Internet

Question 23.
The skywave propagation is suitable for radio waves of frequency
(a) from 2 MHz to 50
(b) upto 2MHz
(c) from 2 MHz to 30 MHz
(d) from 2MHz to 20 MHz
Answer:
(c) from 2 MHz to 30 MHz

Question 24.
To store all the information available on the internet, we need over
a) 2 billion DVDs
b) 1 billion DVDs
c) 3 billion DVDs
d) 4 billion DVDs
Answer:
b) 1 billion DVDs

Question 25.
_______ is used to search for information on the World Wide Web
a) Communication
b) Satellite
c) E-Commerce
d) Search engine
Answer:
d) Search engine

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 26.
_______ is used for making tunnels, bridges etc.
a) GSM
b) TDMA
c) GPS
d) GPRS
Answer:
c) GPS

Question 27.
Fiber optic cables provide data speed of ____ for homes and businesses.
a) 1 Gbps
b) 2 Gbps
c) 10 Mbps
d) 5 Gbps
Answer:
a) 1 Gbps

Question 28.
A modem is a device which performs
(a) modulation
(b) demodulation
(c) rectification
(d) modulation and demodulation
Answer:
(d) modulation and demodulation

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

X. Two Marks Questions:

Question 1.
What is a communication system?
Answer:
The setup used to transmit information from one point to another is called a communication system.

Question 2.
What is called a baseband signal?
Answer:
The electrical equivalent of the original information.

Question 3.
What is a transducer?
Answer:
A device that converts variations in a physical quantity into an equivalent electrical signal.

Question 4.
Define bandwidth.
Answer:
The frequency range over which the baseband signals or the information signals such as voice, music, the picture is transmitted.

Question 5.
Define bandwidth?
Answer:
The frequency range over which the baseband signals or the information signals such as voice, music, picture, etc. is transmitted is known as bandwidth.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 6.
What is skip distance?
Answer:
The shortest distance between the transmission and the point of reception of the skywave along the surface.

Question 7.
What is skip zone or skip area?
Answer:

  • The zone in which there is no reception of electromagnetic waves.
  • It is also called as skip area.

Question 8.
What is called fibre optic communication?
Answer:
The method of transmitting information from one place to another in terms of light pulses through an optical fiber.

Question 9.
What is mean by fibre optic communication?
Answer:
The method of transmitting information from one place to another in terms of light pulses through an optical fiber is called fiber optic communication.

Question 10.
Expand GPS and write a note on it.
Answer:

  • GPS stands for Global Positioning System.
  • It is a global navigation satellite system that offers geolocation and time anywhere on or near the earth.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 11.
Why do we need carrier waves of very high frequency in the modulation of signals?
Answer:
High-frequency carrier waves are used

  1. to increase operating range
  2. to reduce antenna length
  3. to convert the wideband signal into the narrowband signal.

Question 12.
Why is modulation needed at all?
Answer:
Modulation is needed.

  1. to transmit a low-frequency signal to a distant place.
  2. for protecting the waveform of the signal
  3. to keep the height of antenna small.

Question 13.
Which is better for high fidelity reception FM or AM?
Answer:
FM transmission gives high fidelity due to the presence of a large number of sidebands.

Question 14.
Why is the transmission of signals through a coaxial cable not possible for frequencies greater than 20 MHz?
Answer:
For frequencies greater than 20 MHz, dielectric loss becomes quite high.

Question 15.
Why are short wave bands used for long-distance transmission of signals?
Answer:
Radio waves of short wave bands can be easily reflected bv the ionosphere. So they are used in long-distance transmission.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 16.
Why microphone is used as an input transducer?
Answer:
A transducer is a device that converts sound into an equivalent electrical signal So, a microphone which converts sound into electrical energy is used as a transducer.

Question 17.
What are the elements in the transmitter?
Answer:

  1. Amplifier
  2. Modulator
  3. Oscillator
  4. Power amplifier

Question 18.
Draw the block diagram of Transmission.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems 8

Question 19.
Define range.
Answer:
The maximum distance between the source and the destination upto which the signal is received with sufficient strength.

Question 20.
Mention the application of ICT is fisheries.
Answer:

  • Satellite vessel monitoring system helps to identify fishing zones.
  • Use of barcodes helps to identify time and date of catch, species name, quality of fish.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 21.
What is satellite communication?
Answer:
A mode of communication of signal between transmitter and receiver via satellite.

Question 22.
What are the basic elements required for the transmission and reception of a signal?
Answer:
Transducer, amplifier, carrier signal, modulator, power amplifier, medium of transmission, tansmitting and receiving antenna, demodulator and detector.

Question 23.
Give the reasons for attenuation in the Ground wave propagation.
Answer:

  1. Increasing distance
  2. Absorption of energy by the earth
  3. Tilting of the wave.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

XI. Three Marks questions:

Question 1.
What are the advantages of FM?
Answer:

  1. Large decrease in noise. An increase in signal noise ratio
  2. The operating range is quite large
  3. The transmission efficiency is very high
  4. FM bandwidth covers the entire frequency range.
  5. FM radio has better quality compared to AM radio.

Question 2.
What are the disadvantages of FM?
Answer:

  1. FM requires a much wider channel
  2. FM transmitters and receivers are more complex and costly.
  3. In FM reception, less area is covered compared to AM.

Question 3.
Give the reason why transmission of TV signals via sky wave is not possible.
Answer:

  1. Television frequencies lie in the range 100 – 220 MHz which cannot be reflected by the ionosphere.
  2. So, sky wave propgation is not used in TV transmission.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 4.
Show in diagram, the skip distance and the skip zone.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems 9

Question 5.
It is necessary to use satellites for long distance TV transmission. Why?
Answer:

  1. TV signals being of high frequency are not reflected by the ionosphere.
  2. Ground wave transmission is possible only up to a limited range.
  3. So, satellites are used for long distance TV transmission.

Question 6.
Which is more efficient mode of transmission FM or AM?
Answer:

  1. FM transmission is more efficient because all the transmitted power is useful.
  2. In AM transmission, most of the power goes waste in transmitting the carrier alone.

Question 7.
Give an account of E-commerce and search engine.
Answer:
E-Commerce:
Buying and selling of goods and services, transfer of funds are done by an electronic network.
Search engine:
A web-based service tool used to search for information on World Wide Web.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 8.
Expand GSM. Give a note on it.
Answer:

  • GSM – Global System for Mobile Communication.
  • Increases the utilization of bandwidth of the network, sharing of the networks, error detections etc.

Question 9.
Mention some of the applications of optical fiber system.
Answer:

  1. International Communication
  2. Intercity communication
  3. data links
  4. plant and traffic control
  5. defence applications.

Question 10.
What are repeaters in an electronic communication system?
Answer:

  1. Repeaters are a combination of transmitter and receivers.
  2. Used to increase the range or distance through which the signals are sent.
  3. The received signals are transmitted with a carrier signal of different frequencies to the destination.

Question 11.
State two factors by which the range of transmission of T.V. signals can be increased.
Answer:
The range of TV transmission can be increased by using

  • tall antenna and
  • geostationary satellites.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 12.
Compare the difference between PM and FM.
Answer:

Phase ModulationFrequency Modulation
1. Smaller bandwidthLarger bandwidth
2. High transmission speedLow transmission speed
3. More information can be sent.Less information can be sent

Question 13.
Why should transmitters broadcasting programmes use different carrier frequencies?
Answer:

  1. Different audio signals fall in the same spectral range.
  2. Different transmitting stations are allowed different slots in radio frequency range.
  3. A single receiver can tune into these frequencies without any confusion or overlap.

Question 14.
Give one example each of a system that uses the (i) sky – wave (ii) space wave mode of propagation.
Answer:

  1. Short broadcast services use skywave propagation.
  2. TV broadcast, microwaves links, satellite communication use space wave propagation.

Question 15.
A transmitting antenna has a height of 40m and the height of the receiving antenna is 30m. What is the maximum distance between them for line-of-sight communication?
[The radius of the earth is 6.4 × 106 m]
Solution:
The total distance d between the transmitting and receiving antennas will be the sum of the individual distances of coverage,
d = d1 + d2
= \(\sqrt{2 R}\left(\sqrt{h_{1}}+\sqrt{h_{2}}\right)\)
= \(\sqrt{2 \times 6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
= 16 × 102√5 × (6.32+ 5.48)
= 42217m
d = 42.217 km

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

XII. Five Mark Questions:

Question 1.
Explain mobile communication? Write its applications.
Answer:
Mobile communication is used to communicate with others in different locations without the use of any physical connection like wires or cables. It allows the transmission over a wide range of area without the use of the physical link. It enables people to communicate with each other regardless of a particular location like office, house, etc. It also provides communication access to remote areas.

It provides the facility of roaming:
that is. the user may move from one place to another without the need of compromising on the communication. The maintenance and cost of installation of this communication network are also cheap.

Applications:

  1. It is used for personal communication and cellular phones offer voice and data connectivity with high speed.
  2. Transmission of news across the globe is done within a few seconds.
  3. Using the Internet of Things (IoT), it is made possible to control various devices from a single device.
    Example: home automation using a mobile phone.
  4. It enables smart classrooms, online availability of notes, monitoring student activities etc. in the field of education.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 2.
Give a brief account on RADAR and its applications.
Answer:

  1. RADAR stands for Radio Detection and Ranging system.
  2. The angle, range or velocity of the objects which are invisible to the human eye can be determined.
  3. Electromagnetic waves are used for communication.
  4. Signal is initially radiated into space by an antenna in all direction.
  5. Then it gets reflected or reradiated in many directions as it strikes the object.
  6. Radar antenna receives the reflected radio signal and it is delivered to the receiver.
  7. These signals are processed and amplified to determine the geographical statistics of the object.
  8. the range is determined by calculating the time taken by the signal to travel from RADAR to the target and back.

Applications:
RADAR is used

  1. to sense, detect and distant objects like aircraft, ships, spacecraft etc.
  2. in military for locating and detecting the targets.
  3. in navigation systems such as ship-borne surface search, air search and weapons guidance system.
  4. to measure precipitation rate and wind speed in meteorological observation
  5. to locate and rescue people in emergency situations.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 3.
What do you know about mobile communication? Give its applications.
Answer:

  1. Mobile communication is used to communicate with others in different locations without the use of any physical connection like wires or cables.
  2. It allows the transmission over a wide range of areas without the use of the physical link.
  3. It also provides communication access to remote areas.
  4. It provides the facility of roaming.
  5. User may move from one place to another without the need of compromising on the communication.
  6. The maintenance and cost of installation are cheap.

Applications:

  1. It is used to communicate with each other regardless of a particular location like office, house etc.
  2. It is used for personal communication.
  3. Cellular phones offer voice and data connectivity with high speed.
  4. Transmission of news across the globe is done within a few seconds.
  5. IoT is used to control various devices from a single device
    Ex. home automation using a mobile phone.
  6. It enables smart classrooms, online availability of notes, monitoring student activities etc in the field of education.

Question 4.
What is bandwidth? Explain the bandwidth of the transmission system.
Answer:

  1. The frequency range over which the baseband signals or the information signals such as voice, music, picture, etc is transmitted.
  2. Each of these signals has different frequencies. The communication system depends on the nature of the frequency band for a given signal.
  3. Bandwidth gives the difference between the upper and lower frequency limits df the signal.
  4. The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum occupied by the signal.
  5. If γ1 and γ2 are the lower and upper-frequency limits of a signal.
  6. Bandwidth, BW = γ2 – γ1

Bandwidth of Transmission system:

  1. The range of frequencies required to transmit a piece of specified information in a particular channel.
  2. An amplitude modulation system requires a channel bandwidth of 10 kHz to transmit a 5 kHz signal.
  3. A single side-band system requires only 5 kHz channel bandwidth for a 5 kHz signal.
  4. Because in amplitude modulation, the channel bandwidth is twice the signal frequency.
  5. It is required to reduce the channel bandwidth to accommodate more channels in the available electromagnetic spectrum.

Question 5.
Explain the process of modulation.
Answer:

  1. For long-distance transmission, the low-frequency baseband signal is superimposed onto a high-frequency radio signal.
  2. The energy of the information signal is sufficient to send directly.
  3. A very high-frequency signal called carrier signal is used to carry the baseband signal.
  4. As the frequency of the carrier signal is very high, it can be transmitted to long distances with less attenuation.
  5. The carrier wave is a sine wave signal.
  6. The carrier signal will be more compatible.
  7. It propagates in free space with greater efficiency.
  8. A sine wave can be represented as
    ec = Ec sin (2πγct + φ)
    Where, Ec – amplitude γc – frequency
    φ – the initial phase of the carrier wave at time ‘t’
  9. The characteristics of the carrier signal are modified in three types.
    • Amplitude modulation
    • Frequency modulation
    • Phase modulation.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Communication Systems

Question 6.
What do you know about INTERNET? Write its few applications?
Answer:
Internet is a fast-growing technology in the field of a communication system with multifaceted tools. It provides new ways and means to interact and connect with people. Internet is the largest computer network recognized globally that connects millions of people through computers. It finds extensive applications in all walks of life.

Applications:

  1. Search engine: The search engine is basically a web-based service tool used to search for information on World Wide Web.
  2. Communication: It helps millions of people to connect with the use of social networking: emails, instant messaging services, and social networking tools.
  3. E-Commerce: Buying and selling of goods and services, transfer of funds are done over an electronic network.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

12th Physics Guide Semiconductor Electronics Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part I:

Textbook Evaluation:

I. Multiple choice questions:

Question 1.
The barrier potential of a silicon diode is approximately
a) 0.7 V
b) 0.3V
c) 2.0 V
d) 2.2V
Answer:
a) 0.7 V

Question 2.
Doping a semiconductor results in
a) The decrease in mobile charge carriers
b) The change in chemical properties
c) The change in the crystal structure
d) The breaking of the covalent bond
Answer:
c) The change in the crystal structure

Question 3.
A forward-biased diode is treated as
a) An open switch with infinite resistance
b) A closed switch with a voltage drop of 0V
c) A closed switch in series with a battery voltage of 0.7V
d) A closed switch in series with a small resistance and a battery.
Answer:
d) A closed switch in series with a small resistance and a battery.

Question 4.
If a half -wave rectified voltage is fed to a load resistor, which part of a cycle the load current will flow?
a) 0° – 90°
b) 90° – 180°
c) 0° – 180°
d) 0° – 360°
Answer:
c) 0°-180°

Question 5.
The primary use of a zener diode is
a) Rectifier
b) Amplifier
c) Oscillator
d) Voltage regulator
Answer:
d) Voltage regulator

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 6.
The principle in which a solar cell operates
a) Diffusion
b) Recombination
c) Photovoltaic action
d) Carrier flow
Answer:
c) Photovoltaic action

Question 7.
The light emitted in an LED is due to
a) Recombination of charge carriers
b) Reflection of light due to lens action
c) Amplification of light falling at the junction
d) Large current capacity.
Answer:
a) Recombination of charge carriers

Question 8.
When a transistor is fully switched on, it is said to be
a) Shorted
b) Saturated
c) Cut-off
d) Open
Answer:
b) Saturated

Question 9.
The specific characteristic of a common emitter amplifier is
a) High input resistance
b) Low power gain
c) Signal phase reversal
d) Low current gain
Answer:
c) Signal phase reversal

Question 10.
To obtain sustained oscillation in an oscillator,
a) Feedback should be positive
b) Feedback factor must be unity
c) Phase shift must be 0 or 2π
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 11.
If the input to the NOT gate is A = 1011, its output is
a) 0100
b) 1000
c) 1100
d) 0011
Answer:
a) 0100

Question 12.
The electrical series circuit in digital form is
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOR
d) NAND
Answer:
a) AND

Question 13.
Which one of the following represents a forward bias diode? (NEET)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 1
Answer:
a) A node must have a high potential

Question 14.
The given electrical network is equivalent to
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 2
a) AND gate
b) OR gate
c) NOR gate
d) NOT gate
Answer:
c) NOR gate
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 96

Question 15.
The output of the following circuit is 1 when the input ABC is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 3
a) 101
b) 100
c) 110
d) 010
Answer:
a) 101
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 4

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

II. Short Answer Questions:

Question 1.
Define electron motion in a semiconductor.
Answer:
To move the hole in a given direction, the valence electrons move in the opposite direction. Electron flow in an N-type semiconductor is similar to electrons moving in a metallic wire. The N-type dopant atoms will yield electrons available for conduction.

Question 2.
Distinguish between intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.
Answer:

Intrinsic SemiconductorExtrinsic Semiconductor
1. It is pure form of semiconductorSmall amount of impurity is added
2. No doping takes place in intrinsic semiconductorDoping takes place
3. Number of free electrons in conduction is equal to number of holes in valence band.Number of free electrons and holes are not equal
4. It has bad electrical characteristicsIt has good electrical conductivity

Question 3.
What do you mean by doping?
Answer:
The process of adding impurities to the intrinsic semiconductor is called doping.

Question 4.
How electron-hole pairs are created in a semiconductor material?
Answer:
When external voltage is applied in semiconductor free electrons from valence band moves to conduction band and recombined with holes. So electron-hole pairs are created.

Question 5.
A diode is called a unidirectional device. Explain
Answer:
A diode is called a unidirectional device, i.e., current flows in only one direction (anode to cathode internally) when a forward voltage is applied, the diode conducts and when a reverse voltage is applied, there is no conduction. A mechanical analogy is a rat chat, which allows motion in one direction only.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 6.
What do you mean by leakage current in a diode?
Answer:

  1. Under biasing very small current (μA) flows across the junction in a diode.
  2. It is due to minority charge carriers.
  3. This current is called leakage current or reverse saturation current.

Question 7.
Draw the output waveform of a full-wave rectifier.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 5
Input and output waveforms

Question 8.
Distinguish between avalanche and Zener breakdown.
Answer:

Avalanche breakdownZener breakdown
1. The phenomenon of increasing the free electrons or current in the semiconductor by applying a higher voltageThe process in which electrons are moving across the barrier from valence band of P-type material to conduction band of lightly filled n -material
2. Depletion layer is thickDepletion layer is thin
3. Electric field is weakElectric field is strong
4. Produces pairs of electrons and holesProduces electrons
5. Doping is lowDoping is heavy
6. Breakdown voltage varyVoltage remains constant

Question 9.
Discuss the biasing polarities in NPN and PNP transistors.
Answer:
In a PNP transistor, base and collector will be negative with respect to emitter indicated by the middle letter N whereas base and collector will be positive in an NPN transistor [indicated by the middle letter P.

Question 10.
Explain the current flow in an NPN transistor.
Answer:

  1. In NPN transistor electron flow from Emitter to collector. So conventional current flow from collector to emitter.
  2. Electrons from emitter region flow towards base region constitute emitter current (IE). Electrons after reaching base region recombine with holes – Most of electrons reach collector region. This constitute collector current (Ic). After recombination of holes in base region by bias voltage VEE constitute base current IB.
    IE = IB + IC [Since base current is very low Ic ≈ IC]

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 11.
What is the phase relationship between the AC input and output voltages in a common emitter amplifier? What is the reason for the phase reversal?
Answer:
In a common emitter amplifier, the input and output voltages are 180° out of phase or in, opposite phases. The reason for this can be seen from the fact that as the input voltage rises, so the current increases through the base circuit.

Question 12.
Explain the need for a feedback circuit in a transistor oscillator.
Answer:
If the portion of the output fed to the input is in phase with the input, then the magnitude of the input increases. It is necessary for sustained oscillations, so feed back circuit is needed for transistor oscillator.

Question 13.
Give circuit symbol, logical operation, truth table, and Boolean expression of AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, and EX-OR gates.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 6

Question 14.
State De Morgan’s first and second theorems.
Answer:
First Theorem:
The complement of the sum is equal to the product of its complements
\(\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{A}} \cdot \overline{\mathrm{B}}\)
Second Theorem:
The complement of the product is equal to sum of its complements
\(\overline{A \cdot B}=\bar{A}+\bar{B}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

III. Long Answer Questions:

Question 1.
Elucidate the formation of a N – type and P – type semiconductors.
Answer:
1. N – type semiconductor:
N – type semiconductor is obtained by doping a pure Germanium or silicon with dopant from group V pentavalent elements like phosphorous, Arsenic, Antimony.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 7

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 8
n-type extrinsic semiconductor:
(a) Free electron which is loosely attached to the lattice
(b) Representation of donar energy level.

1. Dopants has 5 valence electrons, Germanium has 4 valence electrons.
2. During the process of doping few Ge atoms’ are replaced by group V dopants.
3. Four of the five valence electrons of impurities bound with 4 valence electrons of neighbouring Ge atoms.
4. The 5th valence electron of impurity atom is loosely attached, it has not formed covalent bond.
5. Energy level loosely attached electron is just below the conduction band edge which is called donor energy level.
6. At room temperature electrons easily moves to conduction band with absorption of thermal energy.
7. These thermally generated electrons leave holes in valance band.
8. Such a semiconductor doped with a pentavalent impurity is called n-type semiconductor.

2. P-type semiconductor.
1. Trivalent atom from group III elements such as Boron, Aluminium, Gallium, Indium is added with Germanium or silicon is a p-type semiconductor.
2. The dopants with 3 valence electrons bound with neighbouring Germanium atom one electron position of the dopant in Ge lattice will remain vacant.
3. The missing electron position in covalent band is denoted as a hole.
4. To make complete covalent bond with all 4 neighbouring atom, dopant needs one more electrons.
5. Dopants accept electron from neighbouring atoms. This impurity is called acceptor impurity.
6. Energy level of hole created by each impurity atom is just above valence band, which is called acceptor energy level.
7. In such extrinsic semiconductor holes are majority carriers and thermally generated electrons are minority carriers. This semiconductor is called a p-type semiconductor.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 9

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 10
P-type extrinsic semiconductor
(a) Hole generated by the dopant
(b) Representation of acceptor energy level.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 2.
Explain the formation of PN junction diode. Discuss its V-I characteristics.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 11

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 12
p-n junction diode
(a) Schematic representation
(b) Circuit symbol

i. A p-n junction diode is formed when p-type semiconductor is fused with N-type semiconductor.
ii. Depending on polarity of external source to the p-n junction there are two types of biasing
1. Forward bias
2. Reverse bias

1. Forward bias:
i. If positive terminal of external voltage source is connected to p-side and negative terminal to n-side forward bias takes place.
ii. Electron moves to n-side holes move to p side Recombination takes place near junction and reduce depletion region.
iii. Electron from n-side accelerate towards p side it experience reduced potential barrier at junction.
iv. Applied voltage is increased, width of depletion region and barrier potential further reduced.
v. So large number of electrons pass through junction.

2. Reverse bias:
i. If positive terminal of external voltage source is connected to p-side and negative terminal to n-side reverse bias takes place.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 13

ii. Depletion region is increased potential barrier is also increased.
iii. Majority charge carriers from both sides experience a great barrier to cross the junction. So diffusion current reduces.
iv. The current flows under reverse bias is called reverse saturation current IS

V-I Characteristics:

1. Forward characteristics:
i. A graph is plotted by taking forward bias voltage in X axis and current i Y axis.
ii. Current flow is negligible when applied voltage is less than threshold voltage beyond that increase in current is significant even for small increase in voltage.
iii. Graph shows clearly current flow is non linear. It doesnot obey ohm’s law.
iv. Forward resistance rf = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}}\)
v. Diode behaves as conductor when it is forward bias.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 14

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 15
p-n junction diode
(a) diode under forward bias
(b) forward characteristics

2. Reverse characteristics:
i. In reverse bias p-region is connected to negative terminal and n-region to positive terminal, Graph is drawn for reverse bias characteristics.
ii. Very small current in pA flows across junction. This is due to leakage current or reverse saturation current.
iii. The reverse bias voltage can be increased only up to rated value otherwise diode will enter into breakdown region.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 16

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 17

p-n junction diode
(a) diode under reverse bias
(b) reverse characteristics

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 18
Forward and reverse characteristics of a diode

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 3.
Draw the circuit diagram of a half wave rectifier and explain its working.
Answer:
i. The circuit consist of transformer, p-n junction diode and resistor.
ii. In half wave rectifier either a positive half or the negative half of AC input is passed through it, other half is blocked.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 19

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 20
(a) Input signal
(b) half wave rectifier circuit
(c) input and output waveforms

During positive half cycle:
1. When positive half cycle of input signal passes. A becomes positive with respect to B.
2. Diode is forward bias, current flows through RL output voltage V0 is developed.
3. Waveform is shown in figure.

During negative half cycle:
1. When negative half cycle of input signal passes A is negative with respect to B.
2. Diode is reverse bias, does not conduct No current is passed through RL. No voltage drop across RL.
3. Negative half cycle of ac supply is suppressed at output waveform is shown in figure.
4. Efficiency of half wave rectifier is 40.67%.

Question 4.
Explain the construction and working of a full wave rectifier.
Answer:
i. Full wave rectifier consist two p-n junction diodes a center tapped transformer and load resistor (RL)
ii. Due to centre tap transformer output voltage rectified by each diode is only one half of total secondary voltage.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 21

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 22
(a) Full wave rectifier circuit
(b) Input and output waveforms

During positive half cycle:
1. Input signal passes through the circuit M is positive, G is zero, N is negative potential.
2. D1 forward bias, D2 reverse bias.
3. Current flows through MD1 AGC
4. Positive half cycle of voltage appears across RL in direction G to C.

During negative half cycle:
1. Terminal N is positive, G is at zero, M is negative potential.
2. D2 is forward bias, D1 is reverse bias.
3. Current flows through ND2BGC
4. Negative half cycle of voltage across RL from G to C.
5. Hence in full wave rectifiers both postive and negative half cycle of input signals pass through the circuit in same direction.
6. Efficiency of full wave rectifier is 31.2%.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 5.
What is an LED? Give the principle of operation with a diagrajm?
Answer:
1. LED is a p-n junction diode which emit visible or invisible light when it is forward bias.
2. It converts electrical energy to light energy.
3. It consists of p-layer, n-layer and substrate. External resistance in series with biasing source is required to limit forward current through LED. It has anode and cathode.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 23

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 24

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 25
(a) Circuit symbol of LED
(b) Inside view of LED
(c) Schematic diagram to explain recombination process

4. When p-n junction is forward bias, conduction band electron on n-side and valence band hole on p side diffuse across the junction.
5. When they cross junction, they become excess minortiy carriers. These excess minority carriers recombine with opposite charged majority carriers in respective region.
6. During recombination process energy is released is the form of light or heat.
7. The colour of the light is determined by energy band gap of the material.
8. LED’s with wide range colours such as blue (Sic), green (AlGaP), red(GaAsP), white(GaInN) is also available.

Question 6.
Write notes on Photodiode.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 26                      Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 27
(a) Circuit symbol
(b) Schematic view of photodiode

1. Photodiode is a p-n junction diode which converts an optical signal into electric current.
2. It works in reverse bias.
3. It consists of F p-n junction semiconductor made of photosensitive material kept safely inside a plastic case.
4. It has small transparent window to allow light.
5. When photon (hυ) strikes depletion region of diode some valence band electrons elevated to conduction band. In turns holes are developed in valence band. This creates electron hole pair.
6. Amount of electron – hole pair generated depends on intensity of light.
7. These electrons and hole swept across the junction by electric field. Thus holes moves to -n side, electrons to p side.
8. When external circuit is made, electrons flow through external circuit and constitute the photo current.

Applications:
Alarm system, count items in conveyer belt, photo conductors, CD players, smoke detectors, detectors for computed tomography etc.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 7.
Explain the working principle of a solar cell. Mention its applications.
Answer:
11. Solar cell converts light energy directly into electricity or electric potential difference by photovoltaic effect.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 28
Cross-sectional view of a solar cell

2. It generates emf when radiations falls on p-n junction. A solar cell is of two type p-type and n-type.
3. Both types use a combinations of p-type and n-type silicon which together forms the p-n junction.
4. In solar cell, electron – hole pairs are generated due to absorption of light near junction.
5. Electrons move towards n-type silicon, holes moves towards p-type silicon layer.
6. Electrons reaching n-side are collected by front contact and holes reaching p-side are collected by back electrical contact.
7. Thus potential difference is developed across solar cell. When external load is connected, photocurrent flows through it.
8. Many solar cells are connected in series or parallel to form solar panel or module.

Applications:
1. Widely used in calculators, watches, toys, portable power supplies etc.
2. Used in satellites and space stations.
3. Solar panels are used to generate electricity.

Question 8.
Sketch the static characteristics of a common emitter transistor and bring out the essence of input and output characteristics.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 29
Static characteristics of a NPN transistor in common emitter configuration

i. The circuit to study the static characteristics of NPN transistor is given in figure
ii. Bias supply voltages VBB and VCC bias, base – emitter junction and collector – emitter junction
iii. Junction potentials are VBE and YCE
iv. R1 and R2 are used to vary base and collector currents respectively.

1. Input Characteristics:
i. Input Characteristics curve gives relationship between IB and VBE at constant VCE
ii. For constant collector emitter voltage VCE, Base emitter voltage VBE increases for corresponding Base current IB which is recorded and graph is ploted.
iii. The curve looks like forward characteristics

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 30
Input characteristics of a NPN transistor in common emitter configuration

iv. Beyond knee voltage base current increases with increase in base emitter voltage for silicon 0.7 V & for Germanium 0.3 V
v. Increase is VCE decreases IB. This shift the curves outward.
vi. Input resistance Ri = \(\left(\frac{\Delta V_{B E}}{\Delta I_{B}}\right)_{V_{C B}}\)

2. Output characteristics:

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 31
Output characteristics of a NPN transistor in common emitter configuration

i. The output characteristics gives the relation between ∆IC with respect to ∆VCE at constant IB
ii. Initially base current IB is set to particular value. Increasing collector emitter voltage VCE corresponding collector current IC increases. A graph is plotted.

iii. Saturation region:
When VCE increased above 0V, IC increases rapidly almost independent of IB called knee voltage Transistor operated above this knee voltage

iv. Cut off region:
A small IC exist even after IB is reduced to zero. This current is due to presence of minority carriers across collector – base junction and the surface leakage current (ICEO). This region is called cut-off region.

v. Active region:
In this region emitter – base junction is forward bias, collector – base junction is reverse bias. Transistor in this region can be used for voltage, current and power amplification.

vi. Breakdown region:
If VCE is increased beyond rated value, given Ic increases enormously leading to junction breakdown of transistor. This avalanche breakdown can damages the transistor.
vii. Output resistance Ro = \(\left(\frac{\Delta V_{C E}}{\Delta I_{C}}\right)_{I_{B}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 9.
Describe the function of a transistor as an amplifier with the neat circuit diagram. Sketch the input and output wave form.
Answer:
i. Amplification is the process of increasing the signal strength (increase in the amplitude)
ii. NPN transistor is connected in CE configuration
iii. To start with, Q point is fixed to get maximum signal swing at the output.
iv. RC – to measure output voltage
C1 allows only AC signals to pass,
Bypass capacitor CE provides a low resistance path
Coupling capacitor CC is used to couples next stage amplifier.
Vs input source signal
IC = BIB (∴ B = \(\frac{I_{C}}{I_{B}}\))
VCE = VCC – ICRC

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 32                       Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 33
(a)Transistor as an amplifier
(b) Input and output waveform showing 180° phase reversal.

Working of the amplifier:

During positive half cycle:
1. Input signal Vs increases the forward voltage across emitter base. IB increases. also increases IC also increases β times.
2. This increase the voltage drop across Rc which decreaseVCE.
3. Therefore input signal in the positive direction produces an amplified signal in negative direction at the output. Hence output signal is reversed by 180°

During negative half cycle:
1. Input signal Vs decreases the forwarded voltage across emitter – base. As a result IB decreases, IC increases.
2. Increase in IC decreases potential drop across Rc and increases VCE.
3. Input signal in negative direction produces amplified signal in the positive direction at the output.
4. Therefore 180° phase reversal is observed during negative half signal.

Question 10.
Transistor functions as a switch. Explain.
Answer:
1. In saturation and cut-off region transistor works as an electronic switch that helps to turn ON or OFF a circuit.
2. presence of dc source at the input (saturation region):

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 34
Transistor as a switch

3. When high input voltage (Vin = +5V) is applied, IB increases and in turn increases IC.
4. Transistor will move into saturation region (turned ON)
5. Increase in IC increases voltage drop across Rc lowering the output voltage close to zero.
6. Transistor acts like a closed switch (ON condition)

Absence of dc source at the input (cut-off region) :
1. At low input voltage (Vin = 0V), decreases the IB and in turn decreases IC.
2. Transistor moves to cut off region (turned ON)
3. Decrease in IC decreases voltage drop across Rc, increasing output voltage +5V transistor acts as open switch (OFF condition)
4. It is manifested that high input gives low output and low input gives high output.

Question 11.
State Boolean laws. Elucidate how they are used to simplify Boolean expressions with suitable example.
Answer:
1. Complement law:
\(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) = A
A Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\)
O Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{O}}\) = 1
I Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{I}}\) = \(\overline{\mathrm{O}}\)

2. OR laws:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 35

3. AND laws:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 36

4. Commutative laws:
A + B = B + A
A.B = B.A

5. Associative laws
A + (B + C) = (A + B) + C
A.(B.C) = (A.B).C

6. Distributive laws
A (B + C) = AB + AC
A + BC = (A + B) (A + C)

Question 12.
State and prove De Morgan’s First and Second theorems.
Answer:
First Theorem:
The complement of the sum is equal to the product of its complements
\(\overline{A+B}=\bar{A} \cdot \bar{B}\)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 37

Second Theorem:
The complement of the product of two inputs is equal to the sum of its complements.
\(\overline{\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{A}}+\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 38

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

IV. Numerical Problems:

Question 1.
The given circuit has two ideal diodes connected as shown in figure below. Calculate the current flowing through the resistance R1
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 39
Solution:
D1 will act as Reverse bias so current will not pass through it
Total Resistance = 4Ω
V = 10 V
Current flow through R1I = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
= \(\frac{10}{4}\) = 2.5 A

Question 2.
Four silicon diodes and a 10Ω resistor are connected as shown in figure below. Each diode has a resistance of 1Ω. Find the current flows through the 18Ω resistor.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 40
Solution:
Current flow through D1 and D3 = 2Ω
Current flow through D2 and D4 = 2Ω
These two are in parallel so
Net resistants = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1Ω
Total Resistance = 1Ω+ 18Ω = 19Ω
V = 2.5Ω
I = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\frac{2.5}{19}\)
I = 0.13 A

Question 3.
Assuming VCESat = 0.2 V and β = 50, find the minimum base current (IB) required to drive the transistor given in the figure to saturation.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 41
Solution:
VCC = 3V
β = 50
IB =?
Collector current
VCC = 3 – 0.2 = 2.8 V
IC = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{CC}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{c}}}\)
= \(\frac{2.8}{1 \times 10^{3}}\) = 2.8 × 10-3 A

β = \(\frac{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
IB = \(\frac{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\beta}\) = \(\frac{2.8 \times 10^{-3}}{50}\)
= 56 × 10-6 A
IB = 56 µA

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 4.
A transistor having α = 0.99 and VBE = 0.7 V, is given in the circuit. Find the value of the collector current.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 42
Solution:
Vcc = 12 V
α = 0.99
VBE = 0.7 V
IC =?
Applying Kirchoff’s voltage law,
VBE + (IC + IB) 1k + 10k.IB + (IC + IB) 1k = 12 ………………(1)
IB = \(\frac{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{C}}}{\beta}\)

β = \(\frac{\alpha}{1-\alpha}\) = \(\frac{0.99}{1-0.99}\) = 0.99

IB = \(\frac{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{C}}}{99}\)

IC = β IB
IC = 99 IB
IC = \(\frac{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{C}}}{99}\)
VBE = 0.7 V
Substitute in equation (1)
\(\frac{0.7}{10^{3}}\) + (99 IB + IB) + 10 IB + (99 IB + IB) = \(\frac{12}{10^{3}}\)
100 IB + 10 IB + 100 IB = \(\frac{12-0.7}{10^{3}}\)
210 IB = \(\frac{11.3}{10^{3}}\) ;
IB = 0.054 × 10-3 A
IC = 99 IB = 99 × 0.054 × 10-3 A
IC = 5.34 × 10-3 A
IC = 5.34 mA

Question 5.
In the circuit shown in the figure, the BJT has a current gain (β) of 50. For an emitter-base voltage VEB = 600 mV, calculate the emitter-collector voltage VEC (in volts)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 43
Solution:
β = 50
VEB = 600 × 10-3V
RB = 60 kΩ
RC = 500 kΩ
VB = VE – VEB
= 3 – 0.6 = 2.4 V
IB = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
= \(\frac{2.4}{60 \times 10^{3}}\)
= 0.04 × 10-3 A
IB = 40 µA
IC = β IB
= 50 × 40 × 10-6
IC = 2mA
VC = IC RC = 500IC
= 500 × 2 × 10-3
VEC = VE – VC
= 3 – 1 = 2V

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Part II:

12th Physics Guide Semiconductor Electronics Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
A transistor has α = 0.95, it has change in emitter current of 100 milliampere then the change in collector current is
a) 95 mA
b) 99.05 mA
c) 100.95 mA
d) 100 mA
Answer:
a) 95 mA
Solution:
α = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{e}}}\)
∆IC = ∆Ie × α
= 100 × 0.95
= 95 mA

Question 2.
Diode can works as
a) Demodulator
b) Modulator
c) Amplifier
d) Rectifier
Answer:
a) Demodulator

Question 3.
Three amplifiers of each with gain 10 volt are connected in series then the overall amplification is ______.
a) 10/3
b) 13
c) 1000
d) none of these
Answer:
c) 1000
Solution:
10 × 10 × 10 = 1000

Question 4.
A Transistor has an α = 0.95 then β is
a) 1/19
b) 19
c) 1.5
d) 0.95
Answer:
b) 19
Solution:
β = \(\frac{\alpha}{1-\alpha}\) = \(\frac{0.95}{1-0.95}\)

Question 5.
In p – type semiconductor germanium is doped with _______.
a) aluminium
b) boron
c) gallium
d) all of these
Answer:
d) all of these

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 6.
For an npn transistor, the collector current is 10 mA. If 90% of electron emitted reach the collector then
a) base current will be 1 mA
b) base current will be 10 mA
c) emitter current will be 11 mA
d) emitter current will be 9 mA
Answer:
a) & c)
Solution:
0.9 Ie10 = IC
Ie = \(\frac{10}{0.9}\) = 11 mA
IB = 11 – 10 = 1 mA

Question 7.
The depletion layer in p-n junction region is caused by _______.
a) drift of holes
b) diffusion of charge carriers
c) drift
d) drift of electrons
Answer:
b) diffusion of charge carriers

Question 8.
When – n – type semiconductor is heated ______.
a) number of electrons only increase
b) number of holes increase
c) number of electrons and holes remains same
d) number of electrons and holes increase equally
Answer:
d) number of electrons and holes increase equally

Question 9.
The device that can act as complete electronic circuit is _______.
a) junction diode
b) IC
c) transistor
d) diode
Answer:
b) IC

Question 10.
In following circuit the output Y for all possible input A and B is expressed by truth table
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 44
a) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 97

b) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 98

c) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 99

d) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 100

Answer:
c) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 99

Y’ = \(\overline{A+B}\)
Y = \(\overline{Y^{\prime}}\) = \(\overline{\overline{A+B}}\)
Y = A + B

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 11.
Which one is correct for reverse bias is applied in junction diode
a) Increase minority career
b) lower potential barrier
c) raise in potential barrier
d) increase in majority carrier
Answer:
c) raise in potential barrier

Question 12.
In common emitter configuration Vc = 1.5 Vc change in base current from 100 µA to 150 µA produce change in collector current from 5 mA to 10 mA. The current gain (β) is
a) 75
b) 100
c) 50
d) 67
Answer:
b) 100
Solution:
∆IB = 50 µA
∆IC = 5 mA
β = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{C}}\)
= \(\frac{5 \mathrm{~mA}}{50 \mu \mathrm{A}}\)
= 100

Question 13.
To use a transistor as an amplifier
a) the emitter base junction is forward biased and base collector junction is reverse biased
b) no bias voltage is required
c) both junction are forward bias
d) both junctions are reverse bias
Answer:
a) the emitter base junction is forward biased and base collector junction is reverse biased

Question 14.
The circuit shown in figure contains two diodes each with forward resistance of 50Ω and with infinite backward resistance. If battery voltage is 6V the current through 100Ω resistance is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 45
a) Zero
b) 0.02 mA
c) 0.03 mA
d) 0.36 mA
Answer:
b) 0.02 mA
Solution:
Current will not pass through D2
Total resisatnce = 50 + 150 + 100 = 300Ω
Current = \(\frac{6}{300}\) = 0.02 V

Question 15.
Type of material which emits white light in LED
a) GaInN
b) Sic
c) AlGaP
d) GaInP
Answer:
a) GalnN

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 16.
Blue colour LED is made up of
a) Sic
b) AIGaP
c) GaAsP
d) GaInP
Answer:
a) Sic

Question 17.
The energy band gap is maximum in
a) metals
b) super conductors
c) insulators
d) semiconductors
Answer:
c) insulators

Question 18.
The part of transistor which is mostly heavily doped to produce large majority carriers
a) emitter
b) base
c) collector
d) None of these
Answer:
a) emitter

Question 19.
In the middle of depletion layer of reverse – biased p-n junction
a) electric field is zero
b) potential is maximum
c) electric field is maximum
d) potential is zero
Answer:
c) electric field is maximum

Question 20.
What is the current flowing in the circuit?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 46
a) 1.71 A
b) 2.0 A
c) 2.31 A
d) 1.33 A
Answer:
b) 2.0 A
Solution:
D1 is reverse bias will not conduct = \(\frac{12}{6}\) = 2 A

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 21.
A diode as a rectifier converts _______.
a) a.c to d.c
b) d.c to a.c
c) AC only
d) dc only
Answer:
a) ac to d.c

Question 22.
An oscillator is nothing but an amplifier with
a) positive feedback
b) large gain
c) no feed back
d) negative feedback
Answer:
a) positive feedback

Question 23.
In Intrinsic semiconductor at room temperature number of electrons and holes are
a) equal
b) zero
c) unequal
d) infinite
Answer:
a) equal

Question 24.
The level formed due to impurity atom in forbidden energy gap, very near to valence band is p-type semiconductor is called
a) An acceptor level
b) A donor level
c) Conduction level
d) A forbidden level
Answer:
a) An acceptor level

Question 25.
The symbol represents _______ gate.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 47
a) NAND gate
b) OR gate y
c) AND gate
d) NOT gate
Answer:
d) NOT gate

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 26.
In p-n junction, avalanche current flows is circuit when biasing
a) Forward
b) Reverse
c) Zero
d) Excess
Answer:
b) Reverse

Question 27.
For detecting light, which is correct?
a) Photodiode has to be forward biased
b) Photodiode has to be reversed biased
c) LED has to be connected in forwarded bias
d) LED in reverse bias
Answer:
b) Photodiode has to be reversed biased

Question 28.
What is the output Y in the above circuit, when all the three inputs A, B and C are 0?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 48
a) 0
b) 1
c) 10
d) 11
Answer:
a) 0

Question 29.
Which type of semiconductor device does not need any bias voltage
a) Photodiode
b) Zero diode
c) Solar cell
d) Transistor
Answer:
c) Solar cell

Question 30.
The frequency of oscillator is_____ 2 1
a) f = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi \mathrm{LC}}\)

b) ω2 = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{LC}}\)

c) ω = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{\mathrm{LC}}}\)

d) f = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{\mathrm{LC}}}\)
Answer:
d) \(\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{\mathrm{LC}}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 31.
The logic circuit shown in figure represents ______ gate.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 49
a) OR
b) AND
c) NOR
d) NAND
Answer:
d) NAND

Question 32.
Maximum efficiency of full wave rectifier
a) 100%
b) 81.2%
c) 40.6%
d) 95%
Answer:
b) 81.2%

Question 33.
The diffusion current in P-N junction is from
a) p side to n side
b) n side top side
c) Both (a) and (b)
d) None
Answer:
a) p side to n side

Question 34.
The current through an ideal PN junction shown in figure
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 50
a) 5 mA
b) 10 mA
c) 70 mA
d) 100 mA
Answer:
b) 10 mA
Solution:
V = 5-(-2)
V = 7V
I = \(\frac{7}{100}\)
I = 10 MA

Question 35.
Efficiency of half wave rectifier is
a) 81.2%
b) 100%
c) 40.6%
d) 95%
Answer:
c) 40.6%

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 36.
In common base amplifier, phase difference between input voltage and output voltage
a) 0
b) π/4
c) π/2
d) π
Answer:
a) 0

Question 37.
What will be the input of A and B for Boolean expression \(\overline{(A+B)}\) \(\overline{(\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{B})}\) = 1
a) 0,0
b) 0,1
c) 1,0
d) 1,1
Answer:
a) 0,0
Solution:
\(\overline{0} \cdot \overline{0}\) = 1
1.1 = 1

Question 38.
The value of current flowing through AB in this circuit
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 51
a) 10 mA
b) 20 mA
c) 15 mA
d) 11 mA
Solution:
PD = 3 -(-7) = 10V
I = \(\frac{10}{1000}\)
= 10-2 A = 10 mA

Question 39.
To get output, 1 for following circuit. The correct choice for input is ________.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 52
a) A = 0, B = 1, C = 0
b) A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
c) A = 1, B = 1, C = 0
d) A = 1, B = 0, C = 1
Answer:
c) A = 1, B = 1, C = 0
Solution:
Y’ = A+B
Y = (A + B) C = 1
(1 + 0).1 = 1

Question 40.
The given electrical network is equal to
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 53
a) AND gate
b) OR gate
c) NOR gate
d) Ex-OR gate
Answer:
c) NOR gate
Y1 = \(\overline{A+B}\) = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}} \cdot \overline{\mathrm{B}}\)
Y2 = \(\overline{\mathrm{Y}}_{1}\) = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}} \cdot \overline{\mathrm{B}}\) = A + B
Y = \(\overline{A+B}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 41.
Which gate will give high input when odd numbers of input are high
a) NAND gate
b) OR gate
c) NOR gate
d) EX-OR gate
Answer:
d) EX-OR gate

Question 42.
The current gain (β) of a transistor in common emitter mode is 40. To change the collector current by 160 mA at constant VCE, The necessary change in the base current is
a) 0.2 mA
b) 4 µA
c) 4 mA
d) 40 mA
Answer:
c) 4 mA

Question 43.
Which one is Barkhausen condition for sustained Oscillation
a) phase shift 0°
b) loop gain is unity
c) \(|A B|\) = 0
d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
d) Both (a) and (b)

Question 44.
Tank circuit consists of ________.
a) Capacitor
b) Inductor
c) Both (a) and (b)
d) Diode
Answer:
c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 45.
The given electrical network is equivalent to:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 54
(a) NAND gate
(b) OR gate
(c) NOT gate
(d) Ex-OR gate
Answer:
b) OR gate

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 46.
The maximum reverse bias that can be applied before entering into zener region is referred as
a) PIV rating
b) PAV rating
c) RIM rating
d) None
Answer:
a) PIV rating

Question 47.
For reverse voltage between 4 and 6V ___________ are present
a) Zener effect
b) Avalanche effect
c) Both effects
d) None
Answer:
c) Both effects

Question 48.
Solar cell works on _______ effect.
a) Photo emissive
b) Photo electric
c) Photo conducting
d) Photo voltaic
Answer:
d) Photo voltaic

Question 49.
Which one is the symbol for photodiode
a) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 55

b) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 56

c) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 57

d) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 58
Answer:
c) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 57

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

II. Choose the Correct Statement:

Question 1.
Which of the statement is not true?
a) The resistance of intrinsic semiconductor decreases with increase of temperature
b)Doping pure Si with trivalent impurities give p-type semiconductor.
c) The majority carriers in n type semiconductors are holes
d) A p-n type junction can act as a semiconductor diode
Answer:
c) The majority carriers in n type semiconductors are holes

Question 2.
Which one is correct statement A — p type semiconductor is
i) A silicon crystal is doped with arsenic impurity
ii) Si doped with aluminium impurity
iii) Ge doped with phosphorous impurity
iv) Ge doped with boron impurity
a) (i) and (ii) are correct
b) (ii) and (iii) are correct
c) (i) and (iv) are correct
d) (i) only correct
Answer:
b) (ii) and (iii) are correct

Question 3.
Read the following statement carefully
Y: The resistivity of semiconductor decreases with increase of temperature
Z: The resistivity value of semiconductor is 10-5 to 106 Ωm
a) Y is true but Z is false
b) Y is false but Z is true
c) Both Y and Z are true
d) Both Y and Z are false
Answer:
c) Both Y and Z are true

Question 4.
Which one of the following statement is correct?
a) The depletion region of P-N junction diode increase with forward bias
b) The depletion region of P-N junction diode decrease with reverse bias
c) The depletion region of PN junction diode does not change with biasing
d) The depletion region of PN junction diode decreases with forward biasing.
Answer:
d) The depletion region of PN junction diode decreases with forward biasing.

Question 5.
Assertion:
The size, capacity of chips are progressed enormously with advancement of technology
Reason:
Computers, mobile phones are possible in small size and low cost of ICs
a) Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is correct explanation of Assertion
b) Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not correct explanation of Assertion
c) Assertion is true but Reason is false
d) Assertion is false but Reason is true
Answer:
a) Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is correct explanation of Assertion

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

III. Fill in the blanks:

Question 1.
The reverse saturation current of silicon diode doubles for every _______ rise in temperature.
Answer:
10°C

Question 2.
The external voltage applied to p-n junction is called _______.
Answer:
bias voltage

Question 3.
A semiconductor has ________ resistance coefficient.
Answer:
negative

Question 4.
The most commonly used semiconductor is ____________.
Answer:
silicon

Question 5.
Find the odd one out. Trivalent atoms used in doping
a) Boron
b) Aluminium
c) Indium
d) Arsenic
Answer:
d) Arsenic

Question 6.
Find the odd one out Pentavalent dopant used in n-type semiconductor
a) Phosphorus
b) Antimony
c) Galium
d) Arsenic
Answer:
c) Galium

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

IV. Match the following:

Question 1.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 59
a) 1 – d 2 – b 3 – a 4 – c
b) 1 – d 2 – a 3 – b 4 – c
c) 1 – d 2 – a 3 – c 4 – b
d) 1- c 2 – a 3 – b 4 – d
Answer:
b) 1 – d 2 – a 3 – b 4 – c

Question 2.

1. Silicona. 6 ev
2. Germaniumb. holes
3. Insulatorc. 1.1 ev
4. Deficiency of electrond. 0.7 ev

a) 1 – c 2 – d 3 – b 4 – a
b) 1 – a 2 – b 3 – c 4 – d
c) 1 – c 2 – d 3 – a 4 – b
d) 1 – b 2 – c 3 – a 4 – d
Answer:
c) 1 – c 2 – d 3 – a 4 – b

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

V. Two Mark Questions:

Question 1.
Define Energy band.
Answer:
Band of very large number of closely spaced energy levels in a very small energy range is known as energy band.

Question 2.
What is valence band?
Answer:
The energy band formed due to the valence orbits is called valence band.

Question 3.
What is called conduction band?
Answer:
The energy band formed by unoccupied orbits is called conduction band.

Question 4.
What is forbidden energy gap?
Answer:
The energy gap between valence band and conduction band is called forbidden energy gap.

Question 5.
What are passive and active components?
Answer:
Passive components:
Components that cannot generate power in a circuit.
Active components:
components that can generate power in a circuit.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 6.
Give example for Pentavalent elements.
Answer:
Phosphorus, Arsenic and Antimony

Question 7.
Write – the examples of trivalent impurities.
Answer:
Boron, Aluminum, Gallium and Indium

Question 8.
Differntiate Donor impurities, Acceptor impurities.
Answer:

Donor ImpurityAcceptor Impurity
Impurity atoms which donate electrons to the conduction band are called Donor impurities.

Ex: Pentavalent elements like Phosphorous, Arsenic and Antimony

 Dopants (or) Impurities which accept electron from neighbouring atoms are called acceptor impurity.

Ex: Trivalent elements like Boron, Aluminium, Gallium, Indium

Question 9.
What is barrier potential?
Answer:
The difference in potential across the depletion layer is called barrier potential.

Question 10.
What are extrinsic semiconductors?
Answer:
An extrinsic semiconductor is a semiconductor doped by a specific impurity which is able to deeply modify its electrical properties, making it suitable for electronic applications (diodes, transistors etc.) or optoelectronic applications (light emitters and detectors).

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 11.
What is called bias voltage?
Answer:
The external voltage applied to the p-n junction is called bias voltage.

Question 12.
What is called Forward bias and reverse bias in p-n junction diode?
Answer:

  1. If positive terminal of external voltage source is connected to p-side and negative terminal to n-side is called forward bias.
  2. If positive terminal of battery is connected to n-side and negative terminal to p-side. The junction is said
    to be reverse bias.

Question 13.
What is reverse saturation current?
Answer:
The current that flows under a reverse bias is called the reverse saturation current. It is represented as Is.

Question 14.
Write down the applications of Zener diode.
Answer:
The Zener diode can be used as:

  1. Voltage regulators
  2. Peak clippers
  3. Calibrating voltages
  4. Provide fixed reference voltage in a network for biasing
  5. Meter protection against damage from accidental application of excessive voltage.

Question 15.
In the combination of the following gates, write the Boolean equation for output Y in terms of inputs A and B
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 60
Answer:
The output at the 1st AND gate : \(\mathrm{A} \overline{\mathrm{B}}\)
The output at the 2nd AND gate : \(\overline{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{B}\)
The output at the OR gate : Y = \(\mathrm{A.} \overline{\mathrm{B}}+\overline{\mathrm{A}} \cdot \mathrm{B}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 16.
What are the characteristics of ideal diode?
Answer:

  1. It acts like conductor when it is forward biased.
  2. When it is reverse bias it acts like an insulator
  3. The barrier potential is assumed to be zero and hence it behaves like a resistor.

Question 17.
What are Optoelectronic devices?
Answer:
Optoelectronics deals with devices which convert electrical energy into light and light into electrical energy through semiconductors.

Question 18.
Define efficiency of rectifier.
Answer:
Efficiency (η) is the ratio of the output DC power to the ac input power supplied to the circuit.

Question 19.
What is Zener diode. Draw its symbol
Answer:
Zener diode is a reverse biased heavily doped silicon diode. It is specially designed to operate in breakdown region
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 61

Question 20.
What is called optoelectronics?
Answer:

  1. 1. Optoelectronics deals with devices which convert electrical energy into light and light into electrical energy through semiconductors.
  2. Optoelectronic devices are LED, photodiode and solar cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 21.
What is light emitting diode?
Answer:
Light Emitting Diode (LED) is a p-n junction diode which emits visible or invisible light when it is forward biased. Symbol is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 62

Question 22.
What is photodiode? Draw the circuit symbol.
Answer:
A p-n junction – diode which converts an optical signal into electric current is known as photodiode. Circuit symbol is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 63

Question 23.
What is solar cell?
Answer:
A solar cell is photo voltaic cell converts light energy directly into electricity or electric potential difference by photovoltaic effect.

Question 21.
Write down the applications of Oscillators.
Answer:
Applications of oscillators:

  • to generate periodic sinusoidal or nonsinusoidal waveforms.
  • to generate RF carriers.
  • to generate audio tones
  • to generate clock signals in digital circuits.
  • as sweep circuits in TV sets and CRO.

Question 25.
What is Input resistance?
Answer:
The ratio of the change in base emitter voltage (∆VBE) to change in base current (∆IB) at constant collector emitter voltage (VCE) is called input resistance (Ri)
Ri = \(\left(\frac{\Delta V_{B E}}{\Delta I_{B}}\right)_{V_{C E}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 26.
What is output resistance?
Answer:
The ratio of change in collector – emitter voltage (∆VCE) to the corresponding change is collector current (∆IC) at constant base current.
R0 = \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{CE}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{C}}}\right)_{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)

Question 27.
What is forward current gain in common emifter mode?
Answer:
The ratio of change in collector current (∆IC) to change in base current (IB) at constant collector – emitter voltage (VCE) is called forward current gain (B)
B = \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{C}}}{\Delta \mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{B}}}\right)_{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{CE}}}\)
The value is very high and range from 50 to 200.

Question 28.
What is amplification?
Answer:

  1.  Amplification is the process of increasing the signal strength (increase the amplitude)
  2. If large amplification is required, the transistors are cascaded.

Question 29.
Write the Barkhausen conditions for sustained oscillations?
Answer:

  1. The loop phase shift is 0° or integral multiple of 2n.
  2. The loop again must be unity \(|A B|\) = 1
    A – Voltage gain,
    B – Feedback ratio.

Question 30.
Draw the circuit diagrams of transistor in CB and CC modes.
Answer:

CB ModeCC Mode
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 64Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 65

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 31.
Differentiate damped and undamped Oscillations.
Answer:

Damped OscillationUndamped Oscillation
1. If amplitude of electrical oscillations decreases with time due to energy loss is damped oscillation.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 66

1. The amplitude of electrical oscillation remains constant with time is damped oscillation.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 67

VI. Three Mark Questions:

Question 1.
Differentiate Intrinsic semiconductor and Extrinsic semiconductors.
Answer:

Intrinsic SemiconductorExtrinsic Semiconductor
1. It is in pure formIt formed by adding trivalent or pentavalent impurity.
2. Holes and electrons are equalNo. of holes are more in p-type. No of electrons are more in n-type.
3. Conductivity increases with raise in temperatureConductivity depends on the amount of impurity added
4. Conductivity is slightly increasedConductivity is greatly increased.

Question 2.
Find the differences between N-type and p-type semiconductors.
Answer:

N – typeP – type
1. Pentavalent impurities are addedTrivalent impurities are added.
2. Majority carriers are electrons.Majority carriers are holes.
3. Minority carriers are holesMinority carriers are electrons
4. They are negatively charged materialsThey are positively charged materials

Question 3.
Write briefly about common — base configuration. Draw the circuit symbol for it.
Answer:
NPN transistor in common base configuration
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 68
(a) Schematic circuit diagram

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 69
(b) Circuit Symbol

1. Base is common to both input and output
2. Emitter current IE is input collector current is output current IC.
3. Input signal is applied between base and emitter output is measured between collector and base.

Question 4.
What is Zener diode? Write the applications.
Answer:
Zener diode is reverse biased with heavily doped silicon diode specially works in breakdown region. Zener diode can be used as

  1. Voltage regulators
  2. Peak Clippers
  3. Calibrating Voltages
  4. Provide fixed reference voltage in-network for biasing
  5. Meter protection against damage from accidental application of excessive

Question 5.
What are the applications of LED?
Answer:

  1. Indicator lamps on front panel of scientific and lab equipments
  2. Seven – segment displays
  3. Traffic – signals, exit signals in emergency vehicle lighting.
  4. Industrial process control, position encoders, bar graph readers.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 6.
List the applications of photodiodes
Answer:

  1. Alarm system
  2. Count items on a conveyer belt
  3. Photo conductors
  4. CD players smoke detectors
  5. Detectors for computed demography

Question 7.
Explain the different modes of transistor biasing.
Answer:
1. Forward Active:

  • In this bias emitter – base junction is forward bias, collector base junction is reverse bias. .
  • Transistor is in active mode of operation.
  • Transistor functions as amplifier.

2. Saturation:

  • Emitter base junction and collector-base junction are forward biased.
  • Very large flow of current across junction.
  • Transistor is used as closed switch.

3. Cut-Off:

  • Emitter – base and collector-base junction are reverse biased.
  • Transistor is acts as an open switch.

Question 8.
Write a note on common – Emitter configuration Draw the circuit diagram.
Answer:
NPN transistor in common emitter configuration
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 70
(a) Schematic circuit diagram

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 71
(b) Circuit Symbol
1. Emitter is common to both input and output.
2. Base current IB is input current IC is output current.
3. Input signal is applied between base and emitter. Output is measured between collector and emitter.

Question 9.
Write a note on common – collector configuration.
Answer:
1. Collector is common to both the inputs and outputs.
2. In is input current and Ig is output current.
3. Input signal is applied between base and collector. Output is measured between emitter and collector.
NPN transistor in common collector configuration
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 72
(a) schematic circuit diagram

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 73
(b) Circuit diagram

Question 10.
Write the applications of Oscillators.
Answer:

  1. To generate a periodic sinusoidal or non-sinusoidal wave forms.
  2. To generate RF carriers.
  3. To generate audio tones .
  4. To generate clock signals in digital circuits.
  5. As sweep circuits in TV sets and CRO.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 11.
Write a short note on NAND gate.
Answer:
The circuit symbol of NAND gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 74

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 75

Boolean Equation:
Y = \(\overline{A \cdot B}\)

Logic operation:
1. The output Y equals the complement of AND
2. The output is logic zero only when all inputs are high

Question 12.
Write a not on NOR gate.
Answer:
Circuit symbol:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 76

A, B inputs, Y – output

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 77

Boolean equation:
Y = \(\overline{A+B}\)

Logic operation:
1. Y equals to complement of OR
2. The output is high when all inputs are low.

Question 13.
Write a note on Ex – OR gate.
Answer:
The circuit symbol is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 78
A, B inputs, Y – output

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 79
Boolean equation is
Y = \(A \cdot \bar{B}+\bar{A} \cdot B\)
Y = \(A \oplus B\)
Logic operation:
The output is high only when either of two inputs is high.

Question 14.
Write down the concept in details of Integrated Chips (IC’s) Integrated Chips
Answer:
An integrated circuit is also referred as an IC or a chip or a microchip. It consists of thousands to millions of transistors, resistors, capacitors, etc. integrated on a small flat piece of semiconductor material that is normally Silicon. Integrated circuits (ICs) are the keystone of modem electronics. With the advancement in technology and the emergence of Very Large Scale Integration (VLSI) era it is possible to fit more aind more transistors on chips of same piece.

ICs have two main advantages over ordinary circuits: cost and performance. The size, speed, and capacity of chips have progressed enormously with the advancement in technology. Computers, mobile phones, and other digital home appliances are now made possible by the small size and low cost of ICs. ICs can function as an amplifier, oscillator, timer, microprocessor and computer memory.

These extremely small ICs can perform calculations and store data using either digital or analog technology. Digital ICs use logic gates, which work only with values of ones and zeros. A low signal sent to a component on a digital IC will result in a value of 0, while a high signal creates a value of 1.

Question 15.
In the following diagrams, indicate which of the diodes are forward biased and which are reverse biased?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 80
Answer:
a) Forward biased
b) Reverse biased
c) Reverse biased

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 16.
Find the current through the Zener diode when the load resistance is 1 kΩ. Use diode approximation.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 81
Answer:
Voltage across AB, Vz = 9V
Voltage drop across R = 15 – 9 = 6V
Current through the resistor
I = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
= \(\frac{6}{1 \times 10^{3}}\) = 6 mA
Voltage across load resistor,
VAB = 9V
Current through load resistor,
IL = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{AB}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{L}}}=\frac{9}{2 \times 10^{3}}\)
= 4.5 mA
Current through the zener diode,
Iz = I – Ip = 6 mA = 1.5 mA

VII. Five Mark Questions:

Question 1.
Explain the forward and reverse bias of Zener diode. Discuss its V-I Characterestics.
Answer:
1. The forward characteristics of Zener diode is similar to ordinary p-n junction diode.
2. It starts conducting around 0.7 H. However reverse characteristics is highly significant.
3. The increase in reverse voltage normally generate reverse current. While in Zener diode when reverse voltage (V2) increase in current is very sharp the voltage remains constant.
4. If reverse current is increased further diode will be damaged Vz – Zener breakdown voltage
5. Iz(min) minimum current to sustain breakdown
6. Iz(max) maximum current limited by maximum power dissipation.
7. Zener diode is operated is reverse bias having voltage greater than Vz and current less than Iz(max)
8. The reverse characteristics is not exactly vertical so diode posses zener dynamic impedence.
9. Zener resistance in inverse of slope in breakdown region.
10. Increase in the Zener current produces only a very small increase in reverse voltage.
11. Voltage of ideal Zener diode doesn’t change. Vz remains almost constant even when Iz increases.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 82
(a) forward bias

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 83
(b) reverse bias

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 84
(c) V-I characteristics

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 2.
How zener diode works as a voltage regulator? Explain.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 85
Circuit to study voltage regulation by Zener diode

  1. A Zener diode working in breakdown region can serve as a voltage regulator.
  2. It maintains constant output voltage V0 even when input voltage Vi or load current IL varies.
  3. In this circuit, Vi is regulated to constant voltage Zener voltage Vz at output represented as V0 using Zener diode.
  4. The output is maintained constant as long as Vi. does not fall below V2.
  5. When potential developed across the diode is greater than Vz diode moves into Zener breakdown region. It conducts, large current through Ri.
  6. The total current is always less than the maximum Zener diode current. Under all conditions V0 = Vz Thus output voltage is regulated.

Question 3.
Transistor works as oscillator Explain.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 86
Block diagram of an Oscillator

1. An electronic oscillator converts dc energy into ac energy of high frequency
2. An oscillator circuit consist of tank circuit, an amplifier and feed back circuit.
3. Tank circuit generates electrical oscillations and acts as ac input source to transistor amplifier.
4. Amplifier amplifies input ac signal Feed back circuit produces Block diagram of an oscillator a portion of output to tank circuit to sustain the oscillations without energy loss.
5. So an oscillator does not require an external output signal. It is self – sustained.
6. Feedback Network Portion of output is fed to input is in phase with input the magnitude of input increases. It is necessary for sustained oscillations.
Tank Circuit:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 87
tank circuit

1. The LC tank circuit consist of inductance and capacitor connected in parallel
2. Whenever energy is supplied to tank circuit from DC source, energy is stored in inductor and capacitor alternatively This produces oscillations of definite frequency
3. In order to produce undamped oscillations, positive feedback is provided from output to frequency f = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{\mathrm{LC}}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

VIII. Additional Problems:

Question 2.
In PNP transistor circuit, the collector current is 10 mA. If 90% of the holes reach the collector, find emitter and base currents.
Solution:
Here, IE = 10 mA
As 90% of the holes reach the collector, so the collector current.
IC = 90% of IE
IC = \(\frac { 90 }{ 100 }\) IE
IE = \(\frac { 100 }{ 90 }\) IC = \(\frac { 100 }{ 90 }\) x 10
IE ≃ 11mA
Base current, IB = IE – IC = 11 – 10
IB = 1 mA.

Question 2.
An NPN BJT having reverse saturation current IS = 10-15 A is biased in the forward active region with VBE = 700 mV and the current gain (β) may vary from 50 to 150 due to manufacturing variations. What is the maximum emitter current (in μA)
Solution:
IS = 10-15 A
VBE = 700
VT = 25 mV
β range from 50 to 150
IC = I0 e(VBE/VT)
IE = \(\frac { β+1 }{ β }\) IC
IE = \(\frac { β+1 }{ β }\) IS eVBE/VT
IE will be maximum when β is 50
= 1.02 × 10-15 × e700 × 10-3/25 × 10-3
IE = 1475 μA

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 3.
The current gain β of silicon transistor used in circuit shown in figure is 50. (Barrier potential of silicon is 0.69 V) find IB, IE and I.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 88
Solution:
VBB = 2V
VCC = 10V
β = 50
RB = 10 kΩ
Barrier potential of Si VBE = 0.69 V
RC = 1 kΩ
VBB = IB RB + VBE
IB = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{BB}}-\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{BE}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
= \(\frac{2-0.69}{10 \times 10^{3}}\) = 131 µA
β = \(\frac{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{c}}}{\mathrm{I}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
IC = IBβ
= 131 × 10-6 × 50 = 6.55 mA
∴ IE = IC + IB
IE = 6.55 mA + 131 µA
= 6.55 mA + 0.131 mA
IE = 6.681 mA

Question 4.
You are given the two circuits shown in figure show that circuit
(a) acts as OR gate while the circuit
(b) acts as AND gate
Solution:
(a) A, B input Y output
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 89
(a) A, B inputs Y output
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 90
output of NOT gate = \(\overline{A+B}\)
This will be input for NOT gate.
Its output will be
\(\overline{\overline{A+B}}\) = A + B
∴ Y = A + B
Hence the circuit functions as OR gate.

(b) A, B are inputs Y – output
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 91
Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}+\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)
= \(\overline{\overline{\bar{A}} \cdot \overline{\bar{B}}}\)
Y = A.B
Hence this circuit functions as AND gate.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics

Question 5.
In the circuit shown in the figure, the input voltage Vi is 20V, VBE = 0V and VCE = 0V, what are the values of IB IC and β?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 92
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 93

Question 6.
Name the logic gate equivalent of the output Y. If the same waveform I / P is given to both the inputs A and B, draw the corresponding output waveform.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 86
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 9 Semiconductor Electronics 95
b) The output waveform will be the same as that of input waveform as it is OR (Addition) operation and same input is given to both A and B.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

12th Physics Guide Atomic and Nuclear Physics Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – I:

Text Book Evaluation:

I. Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
Suppose an alpha particle accelerated by a potential of V volt is allowed to collide with a nucleus whose atomic number is Z, then the distance of closest approach of alpha particle to the nucleus is
a) 14.4 \(\frac{Z}{V}\) Å
b) 14.4 \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{Z}}\) Å
c) 1.44 \(\frac{Z}{V}\) Å
d) 1.44 \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{Z}}\) Å
Answer:
c) 1.44 \(\frac{Z}{V}\) Å
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 1

Question 2.
In a hydrogen atom, the electron revolving in the fourth orbit, has angular momentum equal to
a) h
b) \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\pi}\)
c) \(\frac{4 h}{\pi}\)
d) \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\pi}\)
Answer:
d) \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\pi}\)
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 2

Question 3.
Atomic number of H – like atom with ionization potential 122.4 V for n = 1 is
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer:
c) 3
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 3

Question 4.
The ratio between the first three orbits of hydrogen atom is
a) 1 : 2 : 3
b) 2 : 4 : 6
c) 1 : 4 : 9
d) 1 : 3 : 5
Answer:
c) 1 : 4 : 9
Solution:
rn α n2
r1 : r2 : r3 = 1 : 4 : 9

Question 5.
The charge of cathode rays is
a) positive
b) negative
c) neutral
d) not defined
Answer:
b) negative
(They are negatively charged particles)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 6.
In J.J. Thomson e/m experiment, a beam of the electron is replaced by that of muons (particle with same charge as that of electrons but mass 208 times that of electrons). No deflection condition is achieved only if
(a) B is increased by 208 times
(b) B is decreased by 208 times
(c) B is increased by 14.4 times
(d) B is decreased by 14.4 times
Answer:
(c) B is increased by 14.4 times
Hint:
In the condition of no deflection \(\frac { e }{ m }\) = \(\frac {{ E }^{2}}{{ 2vB }^{2}}\)
If m is increased by 208 times then B should be increased \(\sqrt { 208 } \) = 14.4 time

Question 7.
The ratio of the wavelengths for the transition from n = 2 to n = 1 in Li++, He+ and H is
a) 1 : 2 : 3
b) 1 : 4 : 9
c) 3 : 2 : 1
d) 4 : 9 : 36
Answer:
d) 4 : 9 : 36
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 4

Question 8.
The electric potential between a proton and an electron is given by V = V0 ln \(\left(\frac{\mathbf{r}}{\mathbf{r}_{0}}\right)\) where r0 is a constant. Assume that Bohr atom model is applicable to potential, then variation of radius nth orbit rn with the principal quantum number n is
a) rn α \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}}\)
b) rn α n
c) rn α \(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\)
d) rn α n2
Answer:
b) rn α n
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 5

Question 9.
If the nuclear radius of 27 Al is 3.6 fermi, the approximate unclear radius of64 Cu is
(a) 2.4
(b) 1.2
(c) 4.8
(d) 3.6
Answer:
(c) 4.8
Hint:
\(\frac {{ R }_{Al}}{{ R }_{Cu}}\) = \(\frac{(27)^{1 / 3}}{(64)^{1 / 3}}\) = \(\frac { 3 }{ 4}\)
Rcu = \(\frac { 4 }{ 3}\) RAl = \(\frac { 4 }{ 3}\) x 3.6 fermi
Rcu = 4.8 fermi

Question 10.
The nucleus is approximately spherical in shape. Then the surface area of the nucleus having mass number A varies as
a) A2/3
b) A4/3
c) A1/3
d) A5/3
Answer:
a) A2/3
Solution:
Surface area = 4πR²
Surface area α R²
R α A1/3
Surface area α (A1/3)2
Surface area α A2/3
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 11.
The mass of a \({ }_{3}^{7} \mathbf{L i}\) nucleus is 0.042 u less than the sum of the masses of all its nucleons. The binding energy per nucleon of \({ }_{3}^{7} \mathbf{L i}\) nucleus is nearly
a) 46 MeV
b) 5.6 MeV
c) 3.9 MeV
d) 23 MeV
Answer:
b) 5.6 MeV
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 6

Question 12.
Mp denotes the mass of the proton and Mn denotes the mass of a neutron. A given nucleus of binding energy B, contains Z protons and N neutrons. The mass M (N, Z) of the nucleus is given by(where c is the speed of light)
(a) M (N, Z) = NMn + ZMp – Bc2
(b) M (N, Z) = NMn + ZMp + Bc2
(c) M (N, Z) = NMn + ZMp – B / c2
(d) M (N, Z) = NMn + ZMp + B / c2
Answer:
(c) M (N, Z) = NMn + ZMp – B / c2
Hint:
Binding energy, B = [ZMp + NMn – M (N, Z)] C2
M(N,Z) = ZMp + NMn – \(\frac { B }{{ C }^{ 2 }}\)

Question 13.
A radioactive nucleus (initial mass number A and atomic number Z) emits 2α and 2 positrons. The ratio of number of neutrons to that of proton in the final nucleus will be
a) \(\frac{A-Z-4}{Z-2}\)

b) \(\frac{A-Z-2}{Z-6}\)

c) \(\frac{A-Z-4}{Z-6}\)

d) \(\frac{A-Z-12}{Z-4}\)
Answer:
b) \(\frac{A-Z-2}{Z-6}\)

Question 14.
The half-life period of radioactive element A is same as the mean lifetime of another radioactive element B. Initially both have the same number of atoms. Then.
a) A and B have the same decay rate initially
b) A and B decay at the same rate always
c) B will decay at faster rate than A
d) A will decay at faster rate than B.
Answer:
c) B will decay at faster rate than A
Solution:
(t1/2)A = (tmean)B
\(\frac{0.693}{\lambda_{\mathrm{A}}}\) = \(\frac{1}{\lambda_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
λA = 0.693λB
λA < λB
rate decay = λN
Intially no. of atoms (N) of both are equal but since λB > λA, B will decay at a faster
rate than A.

Question 15.
A system consists of N0 nucleus at t = 0. The number of nuclei remaining after half of a half – life (that is, at time t = \(\frac{1}{2}\)T1/2)
a) \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{0}}{2}\)

b) \(\frac{N_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}\)

c) \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{0}}{4}\)

d) \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{0}}{8}\)
Answer:
(b) \(\frac{N_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}\)) N0
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 7

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

II. Short answer questions:

Question 1.
What are cathode rays?
Answer:
A cathode ray is a stream of electrons that are seen in vaccum tubes. It is called a “cathode ray” because the electrons are being emitted from the negative charged element in the vaccum tube called the cathode.

Question 2.
Write the properties of cathode rays.
Answer:
Properties of cathode rays:

  1. Cathode rays possess energy and momentum and travel in a straight line with high speed of the order of 107 ms-1. It can be deflected by the application of electric and magnetic fields. The direction of deflection indicates that they are negatively charged particles.
  2. When the cathode rays are allowed to fall of matter, they produce heat. They affect the photographic plates and also produce fluorescence when they fall on certain crystals and minerals.
  3. When the cathode rays fall on a material of high atomic weight, x-rays are produced.
  4. Cathode rays ionize the gas through which they pass.
  5. The speed of rys is upto \(\left(\frac{1}{10}\right)^{\text {th }}\) of the speed of light.

Question 3.
Give the results of Rutherford alpha scattering experiment.
Answer:

  1. Most of the alpha particles are un¬deflected through the gold foil and went straight.
  2. Some of the alpha particles are deflected through a small angle.
  3. A few alpha particles (one in thousand) are deflected through an angle more than 90°

Question 4.
Write down the postulates of Bohr atom model.
Answer:
1. The electron in an atom moves around nucleus in circular orbits under the influence of Coulomb electrostatic force of attraction. This Coulomb force gives necessary centripetal force for the electron to undergo circular motion.
2. Electrons in an atom revolve around the nucleus only in certain discrete orbits called stationary orbits where it does not radiate electromagnetic energy. Only those discrete orbits allowed are stable orbits.
3. The angular momentum of the electrons in these stationary orbits are quantized that is, it can be written as integer or integral multiple of \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2 \mathrm{~h}}\) called as reduced Planck’s constant – that is, h (read it as h-bar) and the integer n is called as principal quantum number of the orbit.
l = nh;
L = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\);
mvr = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\) where h = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2 \pi}\)

This condition is known as angular momentum quantization condition.
4. An electron can jump from one orbit to another orbit by absorbing or emitting a photon whose energy is equal to the difference in energy (∆E) between the two orbital levels.
energy quantization condition
∆E = Efinal – Einitial = hν = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)
λ – Wavelength or radiation
C – Speed of light
ν – Frequency of the radiation

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 5.
What is meant by excitation energy?
Answer:
Excitation energy and excitation potential:
The energy required to excite an electron from lower energy state to any higher energy state is known as excitation energy.

Question 6.
Define the ionization ionization potential.
Answer:
The minimum energy required to remove an electron from an atom in the ground state is known as binding energy or ionization energy.
Eionization = E – En
= 0 – (-\(\frac{13.6}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\) Z2eV)
= \(\frac{13.6}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\) Z2eV
Ionization potential is defined as ionization energy per unit charge.
Vionization = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{e}}\) Eionization = \(\frac{13.6}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\) Z2V

Question 7.
Write down the drawbacks of Bohr atom model.
Answer:
Limitations of Bohr atom model:
The following are the drawbacks of Bohr atom model:

  1. Bohr atom model is valid only for hydrogen atom or hydrogen like-atoms but not for complex atoms.
  2. When the spectral lines are closely examined, individual lines of hydrogen spectrum is accompanied by a number of faint lines. These are often called fine structure. This is not explained by Bohr atom model.
  3. Bohr atom model fails to explain the intensity variations in the spectral lines.
  4. The distribution of electrons in atoms is not completely explained by Bohr atom model.

Question 8.
What is distance of closest approach?
Answer:
The minimum distance between the centre of the nucleus and the alpha particle just before it gets reflected back through 180° is defined as the distance of closest approach r0 (also known as contact distance).
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 8

Question 9.
Define impact parameter.
Answer:
The impact parameter is defined as the perpendicular distance between the centre of the gold nucleus and the direction of velocity vector of alpha particle when it is at a large distance.

Question 10.
Write a general notation of the nucleus of element X. What each term denotes?
Answer:
General notation of nucleus of element X.
ZaX
where x is the chemical symbol of the element
A is the mass number and Z is the atomic number.
For example \(7^{\mathrm{N}^{15}}\)
Z = 7, N = (A – Z) = (15 – 7) = 8

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 11.
What is isotope? Give an example.
Answer:
Isotopes are atoms of the same element having same atomic number Z, but different mass number A. For example, hydrogen has three isotopes and they are represented as \({ }_{1}^{1} \mathrm{H}\) {H (hydrogen), \({ }_{1}^{2} \mathrm{H}\) (deuterium), and \({ }_{1}^{3} \mathrm{H}\) (tritium). Note that all the three nuclei have one proton and, hydrogen has no neutron, deuterium has 1 neutron and tritium has 2 neutrons.

Question 12.
What is isotone? Give an example.
Answer:
Isotones are the atoms of different elements having same number of neutrons. \(_{ 5 }^{ 12 }B\) and \(_{ 6 }^{ 13 }B\) are examples of isotones which 7 neutrons.

Question 13.
What is isobar? Give an example.
Answer:
Isobars are the atoms of different elements having the same mass number A, but different atomic number Z.
For example \({ }_{16}^{40} \mathrm{~S}, \stackrel{40}{17} \mathrm{Cl}, \stackrel{40}{18} \mathrm{Ar}, \underset{19}{40} \mathrm{~K}\) and \({ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{Ca}\) are isobars having same mass number 40 and different atomic number. In other words, isobars are the atoms of different chemical element which has same number of nucleon.

Question 14.
Define atomic mass unit u.
Answer:
One atomic mass unit (u) is defined as the 1/12th of the mass of the isotope of carbon \(_{ 6 }^{ 12 }C\).

Question 15.
Show that nuclear density is almost constant for nuclei with Z > 10.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 9
The nuclear density is independent of the mass number A. The nuclear density is almost constant for all the nuclei (Z > 10) irrespective of its size.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 16.
What is mass defect?
Answer:
In general, if M, mp and m are mass of the nucleus (\({ }_{Z}^{A} \mathrm{X}\)), the mass of proton and the mass of neutron respectively
mass defect ∆m = (Zmp + Nmn ) — M difference in mass ∆m is called mass defect.
The mass of any nucleus is always less than the sum of the mass of its indivitual constituents. The difference in mass ∆m is called mass defect.

Question 17.
What is binding energy of a nucleus? Give its expression.
Answer:
when Z protons and N neutrons combine to form a nucleus, mass equal to mass defect disappears and the corresponding energy is released. This is called the binding energy of the nucleus (BE) and is equal to (∆m) c2.
BE = (Zmp + Nmn – M ) c2

Question 18.
Calculate the energy equivalent of 1 atomic mass unit.
Answer:
Using Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence, the energy equivalent of one atomic mass unit
1u = 1.66 × 10-27 × (3 × 108)2
= 14.94 × 10-11 J ≈ 931 MeV

Question 19.
Give the physical meaning of binding energy per nucleon.
Answer:
The average binding energy per nucleon is the energy required to separate single nucleon from the particular nucleus.
\(\overline{\mathrm{BE}}\) = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Zm}_{\mathrm{H}}+\mathrm{Nm}_{\mathrm{n}}-\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{A}}\right] \mathrm{C}^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}}\)

Question 20.
What is meant by radioactivity?
Answer:
The phenomenon of spontaneous emission of highly penetrating radiations such as α, β and γ rays by an element is called radioactivity.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 21.
Give the symbolic representation of alpha decay, beta decay and gamma decay.
Answer:
Alpha decay:
\({ }_{Z}^{A} \mathrm{X}\) → \(\begin{array}{l}
\mathrm{A}-4 \\
\mathrm{Z}-2
\end{array} \mathrm{Y}\) + \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\)
Here X is called the parent nucleus and Y is called the daughter nucleus.

β decay:
\({ }_{Z}^{A} \mathrm{X}\) → \(\begin{array}{c}
\mathrm{A} \\
\mathrm{Z}+1
\end{array} \mathrm{Y}\) + e + \(\bar{v}\)
It implies that the element X becomes Y by giving out an electron and antineutrino \(\bar{V}\)

β+ decay:
\({ }_{Z}^{A} \mathrm{X}\) → \(\begin{array}{c}
\mathrm{A} \\
\mathrm{Z}-1
\end{array} \mathrm{Y}\) + e+ + ν
It implies that the element X becomes Y by giving out an positron and neutrino (v).

Gamma decay:
\({ }_{Z}^{A} \mathrm{X*}\) → \({ }_{Z}^{A} \mathrm{Y}\) + gamma (γ) rays
Here the asterisk (*) means excited state nucleus. In gamma decay, there is no change in the mass number or atomic number of the nucleus.

Question 22.
In alpha decay, why the unstable nucleus emits \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nucleus? Why it does not emit four separate nucleons?
Answer:
After all \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) consists of two protons and two neutrons. For example, if \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U}\) nucleus decays into \({ }_{90}^{234} \mathrm{Th}\) by emitting four separate nucleons (two protons and two neutrons), then the disintegration energy Q for this process turns out to be negative. It implies that the total mass of products is greater than that of parent \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U}\) nucleus. This kind of process cannot occur in nature because it would Violate conservation of energy. In any decay process, the conservation of energy, conservation of linear momentum and conservation of angular momentum must be obeyed.

Question 23.
What is mean life of nucleus? Give the expression.
Answer:
The mean lifetime of the nucleus is the ratio of sum or integration of life times of all nuclei to the total number nuclei present initially. The expression for mean life time, τ = \(\frac { 1 }{ λ }\).
τ = \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\)

Question 24.
What is half – life of nucleus? Give the expression.
Answer:
The half – life T1/2 is the time required for the number of atoms initally present to reduce to one half of the initial amount.
T1/2 = \(\frac{\ln 2}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{0.6931}{\lambda}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 25.
What is meant by activity (or) decay rate? Give its unit.
Answer:
Activity (R) or decay rate which is the number of nuclei decayed per second and it is denoted as
R \(=\left|\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right|\).

R = \(\left|\frac{\mathrm{dN}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right|\) = λN0e-λt

R = R0e-λt
The SI unit of activity R is Becquerel and one Becquerel (Bq) is equal to one decay per second. There is also another standard unit for the activity called Curie (Ci).
1 Curie = 1 Ci = 3.7 × 1010 decays per second
1 Ci = 3.7 × 1010 Bq

Question 26.
Define curie.
Answer:
One curie was defined as number of decays per second in 1 g of radium and it is equal to 3.7 x 1010 decays/s.

Question 27.
What are the constituent particles of neutron and proton?
Answer:
According to quark model, proton is made up of two up quarks and one down quark and neutron is made up of one up quark and two down quark.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

III. Long answer questions:

Question 1.
Explain the J.J. Thomson experiment to determine the specific charge of electron.
Answer:
1. In 1887, J.J. Thomson, measured the specific charge (e/m) of electron.
2. The specific charge is defined as the charge per unit mass of particle.
Principle:
3. In the presence of electric and magnetic fields, the cathode rays are deflected.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 10
Arrangement of J.J. Thomson experiment to determine the specific charge of an electron

4. A highly evacuated discharge tube is used and cathode rays (electron beam) produced at cathode are attracted towards anode disc A.
5. Anode disc is made with pin hole in order to allow only a narrow beam of cathode rays.
6. These cathode rays are now allowed to pass through the parallel metal plates, maintained at high voltage.
7. Further, this gas discharge tube is kept in between pole pieces of magnet such that both electric and magnetic fields are perpendicular to eacth other.
8. When the cathode rays strike the screen, they produce scintillation and hence bright spot is observed.
9. This is achieved by coating the screen with zinc sulphide.

(i) Determination of velocity of cathode rays :
1. For a fixed electric field between the plates, the magnetic field is adjusted such that the cathode rays (electron beam) strike at the original position O
2. i.e magnitude of electric force is balanced by the magnitude of force due to magnetic field.
eE = eBν
=>ν = \(\frac{E}{B}\) ………………(1)
e- charge of the cathode rays
3. Electric force balancing the magnetic force – the path of electron beam is a straight line.

ii) Determination of specific charge:
1. Since the cathode rays (electron beam) are accelerated from cathode to anode, the potential energy of the electron beam at the cathode is converted into kinetic energy of the electron beam at the anode.
2. Let V be the potential difference between anode and cathode, then the potential energy is eV.
3. Then from law of conservation of energy.
e V = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mν2
⇒ \(\frac{e}{m}=\frac{1}{2 V}\) ν2
4. Substituting the value of velocity from equation (1), we get
\(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{1}{2 \mathrm{~V}} \frac{\mathrm{E}^{2}}{\mathrm{~B}^{2}}\)
5. Substituting the values of E, B and V, the specific charge can be determined as
\(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{m}}\) = 1.7 × 1011 C kg-1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 2.
Discuss the Millikan’s oil drop experiment to determine the charge of an electron.
Answer:
The Millikan’s experiment is used to determine one of the fundamental constants of nature known as charge of an electron.

Principle:
1. This method is based on the study of the motion of uncharged oil drop under free fall due to gravity and charged oil drop in a uniform electric field.
2. By adjusting electric field suitably, the motion of oil drop inside the chamber can be controlled – that is, it can be made to move up or down or even kept balanced in the field of view for sufficiently long time.

Experimental arrangement:
1. The apparatus consists of two horizontal circular metal plates A and B each with diameter around 20 cm and are separated by a small distance 1.5 cm.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 11
Millkan’s Experiment

2. These two parallel plates are enclosed in a chamber with glass walls. Further, plates A and B are given a high potential difference around 10 kV such that electric field acts vertically downward.
3. A small hole is made at the centre of the upper plate A and atomizer is kept exactly above the hole to spray the liquid.
4. When a fine droplet of highly viscous liquid (like glycerine) is sprayed using atomizer, it falls freely downward through the hole of the top plate only under the influence of gravity.
5. Few oil drops in the chamber can acquire electric charge (negative charge) because of friction with air or passage of x – rays in between the parallel plates.
6. Further the chamber is illuminated by light which is passed horizontally and oil drops can be seen clearly using microscope placed perpendicular to the light beam. These drops can move either upwards or downward.

(a) Determination of radius of the droplet:
Fg = gravitational force
Fb = buoyant force
Fv = viscous force
viscous force and buoyant force balance the gravitational force.
7. When the electric field is switched off, the oil drop accelerates downwards. Due to the presence of air drag forces, the oil drops easily attain its terminal velocity and moves with constant velocity.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 12
(a) Free body diagram of the oil drop without electric field
(b) Free body diagram of the oil drop with electric field

8. Let the gravitational force acting on the oil drop (downward) be Fb = mg, m = mass of the oil drop g = Acceleration due to gravity.
9. Let ρ be the density of the oil drop, and r be the radius of the oil drop, then the mass of the oil drop can be expressed in terms of its density as
ρ = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}}\)
m = ρ(\(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3) (volume of the sphere, V = \(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3)
10. The gravitational force can be written in terms of density as
Fg = mg
=>Fg = ρ(\(\frac{4}{3}\)) πr3
11. Let σ be the density of the air, the upthrust force experienced by the oil drop due to displaced air is
Fb = σ(\(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3)g
12. From Stokes law, the viscous force on the oil drop is.
Fv = 6πrυη
The force balancing equation is
Fg = Fb + Fv
ρ(\(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3)g = σ(\(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3)g + 6πrυη
\(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3(ρ – σ) = 6πrυη

\(\frac{2}{3}\) πr3(ρ – σ) = 3πrυη

r = \(\left[\frac{9 \eta v}{2(\rho-\sigma) g}\right]^{\frac{1}{2}}\) …………….(1)
Thus, equation (1) gives the radius of the oil drop.

(b) Determination of electric charge:
(a) Fe = qE
(c) buoyant force Fb
13. When the electric field is switched on, charged oil drops experience an upward electric force (qE).
14. Among many drops, one particulars drop can be chosen in the field of view of microscope and strength of the electric field is adjusted to make that particular drop to be stationary.
15. Under these circumstances, there will be no viscous force acting on the oil drop. Force acting on the oil droplet is
Fe + Fb = Fg
⇒ qE + \(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3 σg = \(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3 ρg
⇒ qE = \(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3 (ρ – σ)g
⇒ q = \(\frac{4}{3 \mathrm{E}}\) πr3 (ρ – σ)g …………..(2)

Substituting equation (1) in equation (2), we get
q = \(\frac{18 \pi}{\mathrm{E}}\left(\frac{\eta^{3} v^{3}}{2(\rho-\sigma) \mathrm{g}}\right)^{\frac{1}{2}}\)
16. Millikan repeated this experiment several times and computed the charges on oil drops. He found that the charge of any oil drop can be written as integral multiple of a basic value, (e = 1.6 × 10-19 C), which is nothing but the charge of an electron.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 3.
Derive the energy expression for hydrogen atom using Bohr atom model.
Answer:
Energy of a Hydrogen atom:
Bohr postulates is find the allowed energies of the atom for different allowed orbits of the electron.
(a) The electron in an atom moves around nucleus in circular orbits under the influence of coulomb electrostatic force of attraction.
(b) Electrons in an atom revolve around the nucleus only in certain discrete orbits called stationary orbits where it does not radiate electromagnetic energy.
Angular momentum quantization condition,
L = n\(\hbar\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\)
h – planck’s constant
n – principal quantum number of the orbit.
c) An electron can jump from one orbit to another orbit by absorbing or emitting a photon whose energy is equal to the difference in energy (∆E) between the two orbital levels.
energy quantization condition
∆E = Efinal – Einitial = hυ = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)
λ – wavelength of the radiation
c – speed of light
υ – frequency of the radiation

Radius of the orbit of the electron:

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 13
Electron revolving around the nucleus

1. The nucleus has a positive charge +Ze.
2. Let z be the atomic number of the atom.
3. Let -e be the charge of the electron.
4. The nucleus at rest and an electron revolving around the nucleus in a circular orbit of radius rn with a constant speed υn
Coulomb’s law, the force of attraction between the nucleus and the electron is
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\text {coulomb }}\) = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{(+\mathrm{Ze})(-\mathrm{e})}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}\)

= –\(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{Z \mathrm{e}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{n}}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}\)

5. This force provides necessary centripetal force.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\text {centripetal }}=\frac{m v_{n}^{2}}{r_{n}} \hat{r}\)

where m be the mass of the electron that moves with a velocity υn in a circular orbit.
Therfore,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 14
Where n∈N ε0, n, e and π → are constant
radius of the orbit,
rn = a0 \(\frac{n^{2}}{Z}\)

Bohr radius a0 = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} h^{2}}{\pi m e^{2}}\)
a0 = 0.529 Å
Bohr radius is also used as unit of length called Bohr
1 Bohr = 0.53 Å
For hydrogen atom Z = 1
rn = a0 n2
rn α n2
For the first orbit (ground sate)
r1 = a0
r2 = 4a0 = 4r1
r3 = 9a0 = 9r1
r4 = 16a0 = 16r1

The energy of an electron in the nth orbit:
Since the electrostatic force is a conservative force, the potential energy for the nth orbit is
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 15
6. The negative sign in the equation indicates that the electron is bound to the nucleus
7. where n stands for a principal quantum number.
8. The energies of the excited states come closer and closer together when the principal quantum number n takes higher values.
9. The ground state energy of hydrogen (-13.6 eV) is used as a unit of energy called Rydberg (lRydberg = -13.6eV).
10. For the first orbit (ground state), the total energy of electron is E1 = -13.6 eV.
11. For the second orbit (first excited state), the total energy of electron is E2 = – 3.4eV.
12. For the third orbit (second excited state), the total energy of electron ie E3 = -1.51 eV and so on.
13. When the electron is taken away to an infinite distance (very far distance) from nucleus, both the potential energy and kinetic energy terms vanish and hence the total energy also vanishes.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 4.
Discuss the spectral series of hydrogen atom.
Answer:
Spectral series of hydrogen atom:
1. As electron in excited states have very small lifetime, these electrons jump back to ground state through spontaneous emission in a short duration of time (approximately 10) by emitting the radiation with same wavelength (or frequency) corresponding to the colours is absorbed. This is called emission spectroscopy.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 16

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 17
Spectral series – Lyman, Balmer, Paschen series

2. In each series, the distance of separation between the consecutive wavelengths decreases from higher wavelength to the lower wavelength, and also wavelength in each series approach a limiting value known as the series limit.
3. The wavelengths of these spectral lines perfectly agree with the equaion derived from Bohr atom model.
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}=\mathrm{R}\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{~m}^{2}}\right)=\overline{\mathrm{v}}\) …………..(1)

where \(\bar{v}\) is known as wave number which is inverse of wavelength, R is known as Rydberg
constant whose value is 1.09737 × 107 m-1 and m and n are positive integers such that m > n.
The various spectral series are discussed below:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 18

Question 5.
Explain the variation of average binding energy with the mass number by graph and discuss its features.
Answer:
Binding energy curve :
1. \(\overline{\mathrm{BE}}\) is plotted against A of all known nuclei.
2. It gives a curve as seen in Figure.
3. average binding energy per nucleon \(\overline{\mathrm{BE}}\).
It is given by,

\(\overline{\mathrm{BE}}=\frac{\left[\mathrm{Zm}_{\mathrm{H}}+\mathrm{Nm}_{\mathrm{n}}-\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{A}}\right] \mathrm{c}^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 19
Avg. binding energy of the nucleus

4. The average binding energy per nucleon is the energy required to separate single nucleon from the particular nucleus.

Important inferences from of the average binding energy curve:
1. The value of \(\overline{\mathrm{BE}}\) rises as the mass number increases until it reaches a maximum value of 8.8 MeV for A = 56 (iron) and then it slowly decreases.
2. The average binding energy per nucleon is about 8.5 MeV for nuclei having mass number between A = 40 and 120. These elements are comparatively more stable and not radioactive.
3. For higher mass numbers, the curve reduces slowly and \(\overline{\mathrm{BE}}\) for uranium is about 7.6 MeV. They are unstable and radioactive.
From Figure if two light nuclei with A < 28 combine with a nucleus with A < 56, the binding energy per nucleon is more for final nucleus than initial nuclei. Thus, if the lighter elements combine to produce a nucleus of medium value A, a large amount of energy will be released. This is the basis of nuclear fusion and is the principle of the hydrogen bomb.
4. If a nucleus of heavy element is split (fission) into two or more nuclei of medium value A, the energy released would again be large. The atom bomb is based on this principle and huge energy of atom bombs comes from this fission when it is uncontrolled.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 6.
Explain in detail the nuclear force.
Answer:
1. Nucleus contains protons and neutrons. From electrostatics, like charges repel each other.
2. In the nucleus, the protons are separated by a distance of about a few Fermi (10-15 m), they must exert on each other a very strong repulsive force. For example,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 20

3. This is nearly 1028 times greater than the acceleration due to gravity.
4. From this observation, it was concluded that there must be a strong attractive force between protons to overcome the repulsive Coulomb’s force.
5. This attractive force which holds the nucleus together is called strong nuclear force.
6. A few properties of strong nuclear force are the strong nuclear force is of very short range, acting only up to a distance of a few Fermi.
7. But inside the nucleus, the repulsive Coulomb force or attractive gravitational forces between two protons are much weaker than the strong nuclear force between two protons.
8. Similarly, the gravitational force between two neutrons is also much weaker than strong nuclear force between the neutrons. So nuclear force is the strongest force in nature.
9. The strong nuclear force is attractive and acts with an equal strength between proton-proton, proton-neutron. and neutron – neutron.
10. Strong nuclear force does not act on the electrons. So it does not alter the chemical properties of the atom.

Question 7.
Discuss the alpha decay process with an example.
Answer:
Alpha decay:
1. When unstable nuclei decay by emitting an a – particle (\({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nucleus), it loses two protons and two neutrons. As a result, its atomic number Z decreases by 2, the mass number decreases by 4. The alpha decay process symbolically represented as.
\({ }_{Z}^{A} \mathrm{X}\) → \({ }_{Z-2}^{A-4} \mathrm{Y}\) + \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\)

2. Here X is called the parent nucleus and Y is called the daughter nucleus.
3. Example:
Decay of Uranium \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U}\) to thorium \({ }_{90}^{234} \mathrm{Th}\) with the emission of \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nucleus (α – particle)

\({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U}\) → \({ }_{90}^{234} \mathrm{Th}\) + \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\)

4. As already mentioned, the total mass of the daughter nucleus and \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nucleus is always
5. less than that of the parent nucleus. The difference in mass (∆m = mx – my -mα ) is released as energy called disintegration energy Q and is given by
Q = (mx – my – mα) c2
6. For spontaneous decay (natural radioactivity) Q > 0. In alpha decay process, the disintegration energy is certainly positive (Q > 0).
7. In fact, the disintegration energy Q is also the net kinetic energy gained in the decay process or if the parent nucleus is at rest, Q is the total kinetic energy of daughter nucleus and the \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nucleus.
8. Suppose Q < 0, then the decay process cannot occur spontaneously and energy must be supplied to induce the decay.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 8.
Discuss the beta decay process with examples.
Answer:

In beta decay, a radioactive nucleus emits either electron or positron. If electron (e) is emitted, it is called β decay and if positron (e+) is emitted, it is called p+ decay. The positron is an anti-particle of an electron whose mass is same as that of electron and charge is opposite to that of electron – that is, +e. Both positron and electron are referred to as beta particles.

1. β decay:
In β decay, the atomic number of the nucleus increases by one but mass number remains the same. This decay is represented by
\(_{ Z }^{ A }{ X }\) → \(_{ Z+12 }^{ A }{ Y}\) + e + \(\bar { v } \) …(1)
It implies that the element X becomes Y by giving out an electron and antineutrino (\(\bar { v } \)). In otherwords, in each β decay, one neutron in the nucleus of X is converted into a proton by emitting an electron (e) and antineutrino. It is given by
n → p + e + \(\bar { v } \)
Where p -proton, \(\bar { v } \) -antineutrino. Example: Carbon (\(_{ 6 }^{ 14 }{ C }\)) is converted into nitrogen (\(_{ 7 }^{ 14 }{ N }\)) through β- decay.
\(_{ 6 }^{ 14 }{ C }\) → \(_{ 7 }^{ 14 }{ N }\) + e + \(\bar { v } \)

2. β+ decay:
In p+ decay, the atomic number is decreased by one and the mass number remains the same. This decay is represented by
\(_{ Z }^{ A }{ X }\) → \(_{ Z-12 }^{ A }{ Y}\) + e+ + v
It implies that the element X becomes Y by giving out a positron and neutrino (v). In other words, for each β+ decay, a proton in the nucleus of X is converted into a neutron by emitting a positron (e+) and a neutrino. It is given by
p → n + e+ + v

However, a single proton (not inside any nucleus) cannot have β+ decay due to energy conservation, because neutron mass is larger than proton mass. But a single neutron (not inside any nucleus) can have β decay.
Example: Sodium (\(_{ 11 }^{ 23 }{ Na }\)) is converted into neon (\(_{ 10 }^{ 22 }{ Ne }\)) decay.
\(_{ 11 }^{ 23 }{ Na }\) → \(_{ 10 }^{ 22 }{ Ne }\) + e+ + v

Beta-decay:
In beta decay, a radioactive nucleus emits either electron or positron. If electron (e) is emitted, it is called β decay and if positron (e+) is emitted, it is called β+ decay. The positron is an anti – particle of an electron whose mass is same as that of electron and charge is opposite to that of electron – that is, +e. Both positron and electron are referred to as beta particles.

Question 9.
Discuss the gamma decay process with example.
Answer:
Gamma decay :
1. In α and β decay, the daughter nucleus is in the excited state most of the time. The typical life time of excited state is approximately 10-11 s. So this excited state nucleus immediately returns to the ground state or lower energy state by emitting highly energetic photons called γ rays. In fact, when the atom is in the excited state, it returns to the ground state by emitting photons of energy in the order of few eV. But when the excited state nucleus returns to its ground state, it emits a highly energetic photon (y rays) of energy in the order of MeV. The gamma decay is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 22

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 21
Gamma decay

2. Here the asterisk (*) means excited state nucleus. In gamma decay, there is no change in the mass number or atomic number of the nucleus.
3. Boron (\({ }_{5}^{12} \mathrm{~B}\)) has two beta decay modes as shown in figure.
4. It undergoes beta decay directly into ground state carbon \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\) by emitting an electron of maximum of energy 13.4 MeV.
5. It undergoes beta decay to an excited state \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}^{*}\) by emitting an electron of maximum energy 9.0 MeV followed by gamma decay to ground state by emitting a photon of energy 4.4 MeV.
It is represented by
\({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{~B} \rightarrow{ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}+\mathrm{e}^{-}+\overline{\mathrm{v}}\)

\({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}^{*} \rightarrow{ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}+\gamma\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 10.
Obtain the law of radioactivity.
Answer:
Law of radioactive decay:
Radioactive law of disintegration:
1. At any instant t, the number of decays per unit time, called rate of decay \(\left(\frac{d N}{d t}\right)\) is proportional to the number of nuclei (N) at the same instant.
\(\frac{d N}{d t}\) α N
\(\frac{d N}{d t}\) = -λN ………………(1)
2. Here proportionality constant λ is called decay constant which is different for different radioactive sample the negative sign in the equaion implies that the N is decreasing with time.
By rewriting the equation (1) we get
dN = -λNdt …………….(2)
3. Here dN represents the number of nuclei decaying in the time interval dt.
4. Let us assume that at time t = 0 s, the number of nuclei present in the radioactive sample is N0
\(\frac{d N}{N}\) = -λdt ……………..(3)
5. By integrating the equaion (3)
6. We can calculate the number of undecayed nuclei N at any time t.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 23
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 24
Law of radioactive decay

7. Taking exponentials on both sides, we get
8. N = N0 e-λt …………..(4) (Note: elnx = ey = x = ey)
9. Equation (4) is called the law of radioactive decay.
10. N0 denotes the number of nuclei at initial time t = 0.
11. N denotes the number of undecayed nuclei present at any time t
12. Note that the number of atoms is decreasing exponentially over the time.
13. This implies that the time taken for all the radioactive nuclei to decay will be infinite.

Activity (R):
Activity or decay rate which is the number of nuclei decayed per second. It is denoted as R. R is a positive quantity.
R = \(\left|\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right|\)
N = N0 e-λt
R = λN0e-λt,
R = R0 eλ ………………(5)
Where R0 = λN0
eqn (1) is also equivalent to radioactive law of decay.
Here,
R0 is the activity of the sample at t = 0
R is the activity of the sample at any time t. Activity also shows exponential decay behavior.
The activity R also canbe expressed interms of number of undecayed atoms present at any time t.
R = λN …………..(3)
λ – decay constant
N – Number of undecayed nuclei at the same time t.
Since N decreases over time, R also decreases.
SI unit: Becquerel (Bq)

Question 11.
Discuss the properties of neutrino and its role in beta decay.
Answer:
Neutrino:
Initially, it was thought that during beta decay, a neutron in the parent nucleus is converted to the daughter nuclei by emitting only electron as given by
\(_{ Z }^{ A }{ X }\) → \(_{ Z+1 }^{ A }{ X}\) Y+e

1. But the kinetic energy of electron coming out of the nucleus did not match with the experimental results. In alpha decay, the alpha particle takes only certain allowed discrete energies whereas in beta decay, it was found that the beta particle (i.e, electron) have a continuous range of energies.

2. But the conservation of energy and momentum gives specific single values for electron energy and the recoiling nucleus Y. It seems that the conservation of energy, momentum are violated and could not be explained why energy of beta particle have continuous range of values. So beta decay remained as a puzzle for several years.

3. After a detailed theoretical and experimental study, in 1931 W. Pauli proposed a third particle which must be present in beta decay to carry away missing energy and momentum. Fermi later named this particle the neutrino (little neutral one) since it has no charge, have very little mass.

4. For many years, the neutrino (symbol v , Greek nu) was hypothetical and could not be verified experimentally. Finally, the neutrino was detected experimentally in 1956 by Fredrick Reines and Clyde Cowan. Later Reines received Nobel prize in physics in the year 1995 for his discovery.
The neutrino has the following properties

  • It has zero charge
  • It has an antiparticle called anti-neutrino.
  • Recent experiments showed that the neutrino has very tiny mass.
  • It interacts very weakly with the matter. Therefore, it is very difficult to detect. In fact, in every second, trillions of neutrinos coming from the sun are passing through our body without any interaction.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 12.
Explain the idea of carbon dating.
Answer:
1. The interesting application of beta decay is radioactive dating or carbon dating.
2. Using this technique, the age of an ancient object can be calculated.
3. All living organisms absorb crabon dioxide (Co2) from air to synthesize organic molecules.
In this absorbed Co2, the major part is \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\) and very small fraction (1.3 × 10-12) is radioactive \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) whose half life is 5730 years.
4. Carbon 14 in the atmosphere is always decaying but at the same time, cosmic rays from outer space are continuously bombarding the atoms in the atmosphere which produces \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\)
5. So the continuous production and decay of \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) in the atmosphere keep the ratio of \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) to \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\) always constant.
6. Since our human body, tree or any living organism continuously absorb Co2 from the atmosphere, the ratio of \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) to \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\) in the living organism is also nearly constnt.
7. But when the organism dies, it stops absorbing Co2
8. Since \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) starts to decay, the ratio of \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) to \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\) in a dead organism or specimen decreases over the years.
9. Suppose the ratio of \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) to \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\) in the ancient tree pieces excavated is known, then the age of the tree pieces can be calculated.

Question 13.
Discuss the process of nuclear fission and its properties.
Answer:
Nuclear Fission :
1. The process of breaking up of the nucleus of a heavier atom into two smaller nuclei with the release of a large amount of energy is called nuclear fission.
2. In 1939, German scientists Otto Hahn and F. Strassman discovered that when uranium nucleus is bombarded with a neutron, it breaks up into two smaller nuclei of comparable masses with the release of energy.
3. Uranium undergoes fission reaction in 90 different ways.
4. The most common fission reactions of \({ }_{92}^{234} \mathrm{U}\) nuclei are shown here.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 25
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 26

5. Here Q is energy released during the decay of each uranium nuclei.
6. When the slow neutron is absorbed by the uranium nuclei, the mass number increases by one and goes to an excited state \({ }_{92}^{234} \mathrm{U}^{*}\)
7. But this excited state does not last longer than 10-12s and decay into two daughter nuclei along with 2 or 3 neutrons.
8. From each reaction, on an average, 2.5 neutrons are emitted.

Energy released in fission:
1. We can calculate the energy (Q) released in each uranium fission reaction
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 27

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 28
2. So the energy released in each fission = 0.225303 × 931 MeV ≈ 200 MeV
3. This energy first appears as kinetic energy of daughter nuclei and neutrons.
4. But later, this kinetic energy is transferred to the surrounding matter as heat.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 14.
Discuss the process of nuclear fusion and how energy is generated in stars?
Answer:

Nuclear Fusion:
1. When two or more light nuclei (A < 20) combine to form a heavier nucleus, then it is called nuclear fusion.

2. In the nuclear fusion, the mass of the resultant nucleus is less than the sum of the masses of original light nuclei. The mass difference appears as energy. The nuclear fusion never occurs at room temperature unlike nuclear fission. It is because when two light nuclei come closer to combine, it is strongly repelled by the coulomb repulsive force.

3. To overcome this repulsion, the two light nuclei must have enough kinetic energy to move closer to each other such that the nuclear force becomes effective. This can be achieved if the temperature is very much greater than the value 107 K. When the surrounding temperature reaches around 107 K, lighter nuclei start fusing to form heavier nuclei and this resulting reaction is called thermonuclear fusion reaction.

Energy generation in stars:
1. The natural place where nuclear fusion occurs is the core of the stars, since its temperature is of the order of 107 K. In fact, the energy generation in every star is only through thermonuclear fusion. Most of the stars including our Sun fuse hydrogen into helium and some stars even fuse helium into heavier elements.

2. The early stage of a star is in the form of cloud and dust. Due to their own gravitational pull, these clouds fall inward. As a result, its gravitational potential energy is converted to kinetic energy and finally into heat.

3. When the temperature is high enough to initiate the thermonuclear fusion, they start to release enormous energy which tends to stabilize the star and prevents it from further collapse.

4. The sun’s interior temperature is around 1.5 x 107 K. The sun is converting 6 x 1011 kg hydrogen into helium every second and it has enough hydrogen such that these fusion lasts for another 5 billion years.

5. When the hydrogen is burnt out, the sun will enter into new phase called red giant where helium will fuse to become carbon. During this stage, sun will expand greatly in size and all its planets will be engulfed in it.

6. According to Hans Bethe, the sun is powered by proton-proton cycle of fusion reaction. This cycle consists of three steps and the first two steps are as follows:
\(_{ 1 }^{ 1 }{ H }\) + \(_{ 1 }^{ 1 }{ H }\) → \(_{ 1 }^{ 2 }{ H }\) + e+ + v …… (1)
\(_{ 1 }^{ 1 }{ H }\) + \(_{ 1 }^{ 2 }{ H }\) → \(_{ 2 }^{ 3 }{ H }\) + γ …… (2)
A number of reactions are possible in the third step. But the dominant one is
\(_{ 2 }^{ 3 }{ H }\) + \(_{ 12}^{ 3 }{ H }\) → \(_{ 2 }^{ 4}{ H }\) + \(_{ 1 }^{ 1 }{ H }\) + \(_{ 1 }^{ 1 }{ H }\)…… (3)
The overall energy production in the above reactions is about 27 MeV. The radiation energy we received from the sun is due to these fusion reactions.

Question 15.
Describe the working of nuclear reactor with a block diagram.
Answer:
Nuclear Reactor:
1. Nuclear Reactor is a system in which the nuclear fission takes place in a self sustained controlled manner and the energy produced is used either for research purpose or for power generation.
2. The first nuclear reactor was built in the year 1942 at Chicago, USA by physicist Enrico Fermi.
3. The main parts of a nuclear reactor are fuel, moderator and control rods.
4. In addition to this, there is a cooling system which is connected with power generation set up.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 29

Fuel:
The fuel is fissionable material, usually uranium or plutonium. Naturally occurring uranium contains only 0.7% of \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) and 99.3% are only \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U}\). So the \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U}\) must be enriched such that it contains at least 2 to 4% 0f \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\).

Neutron Source :
1. In addition to this, a neutron soruce is required to initiate the chain reaction for the first time.
2. A mixture of beryllium with plutonium or polonium is used as the neutron source. During fission of \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\), only fast neutrons are emitted but the probability of initiating fission by it in another nucleus is very low. Therefore, slow neutrons are preferred for sustained nuclear reactions.

Moderators:
1. The moderator is a material used to convert fast neutrons into slow neutrons.
2. Usually the moderators are chosen in such a way that it must be very light nucleus having mass comparable to that of neutrons. Hence, these light nuclei undergo collision with the neutrons and the speed of the neutron is reduced.
3. Most of the reactors use water, heavy water (D20) and graphite as moderators.
4. A billiard ball striking a stationary billiard ball of equal mass would itself be stopped but the same billiard ball bounces off almost with same speed when it strikes a heavier mass. This is the reason for using lighter nuclei as moderators.

Control rods:
1. The control rods are used to adjust the reaction rate. During each fission, on an average 2.5 neutrons are emitted and in order to have the controlled chain reactions, only one neutron is allowed to cause another fission and the remaining neutrons are absorbed by the control rods.
2. Usually cadmium or boron acts are control rod material and these rods are inserted into the uranium blocks.
3. Depending on the insertion depth of control rod into the uranium, the average number of neutrons produced per fission is set to be equal to one or greater than one.
4. If the average number of neutrons produced per fission is equal to one, then reactor is said to be in critical state.
5. In fact, all the nuclear reactors are maintained in critical state by suitable adjustment of control rods.
6. If it is greater than once, then reactor is said to be in super – critical and it may explode sooner or may cause massive destruction.

Shielding:
For protection against harmful radiations, the nuclear reactor is surrounded by a concrete wall of thickness of about 2 to 2.5 m.

Cooling System:
1. The cooling system removes the heat generated in the reactor core.
2. Ordinary water, heavy water and liquid sodium are used as coolant since they have very high specific heat capacity and have large boiling point under high pressure.
3. This coolant passes through the fuel block and carries away the heat to the steam generator through heat exchanger.
4. The steam runs the turbines which produce electricity in power reactors.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 16.
Explain in detail the four fundamental forces.
Answer:
Fundamental forces of nature:

  1. It is known that there exists gravitational force between two masses and it is universal in nature. Our planets are bound to the sun through the gravitational force of the sun.
  2. The force between two charges there exists electromagnetic force and it plays major role in most of our day-to-day events.
  3. The force between two nucleons, there exists a strong nuclear force and this force is responsible for the stability of the nucleus.
  4. In addition to these three forces, there exists another fundamental force of nature called the weak force. This weak force is even shorter in range than nuclear force. This force plays an important role in beta decay and energy production of stars.
  5. During the fusion of hydrogen into helium in sun, neutrinos and enormous radiations are produced through weak force.
  6. Gravitational, electromagnetic, strong and weak forces are called fundamental forces of nature.

Question 17.
Briefly explain the elementary particles of nature.
Answer:
1. An atom has a nucleus surrounded by electrons and nuclei is made up of protons and neutrons.
2. Tikl 1960s, it was thought that protons, neutrons and electrons are fundamental building blocks of matter.
3. In 1964, physicist Murray Geliman and George Zweig theoretically proposed that protons and neutrons are not fundamental particles; in fact they are made up of quarks.
4. These quarks are now considered as elementary particles of nature.
5. Electrons are fundamental or elementary particles because they arc not made up of anything.
6. In the year 1968, the quarks were discovered experimentally by Stan ford Linear Accelerator Center (SLAC), USA.
7. There are six quarks namely, up, down, charm, strange, top and bottom and their antiparticles.
8. All these quarks have fractional charges.
9. Charge of up quarks is +\(\frac{2}{3}\)e
10. Charge of down quark is –\(\frac{1}{3}\)e
According to the quark model:

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 30
Constituents of Nucleons

Proton is made up of two up quarks and one down quarkNeutron is made up of one up quark and two down quarks

11. The study of elementary particles is called particle physics.
12. To date, more than 20 Nobel prizes have been awarded in the field of particle physics.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

IV. Exercises:

Question 1.
Consider two hydrogen atoms HA and HB ground state. Assume that hydrogen atom HA is at rest and hydrogen atom HB is moving with a speed and make head-on collide on the stationary hydrogen atom HA. After the strike, both of them move together. What is the minimum value of the kinetic energy of the moving hydrogen atom HB, such that any one of the hydrogen atoms reaches one of the excitation states?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 31
From conservation of linear momentum, p = p’
\(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{~km}}=\sqrt{2 \mathrm{k}^{\prime}(2 \mathrm{~m})}\)
(or) K = 2K’ …………….(1)
From conservation of energy
K = K’ + ∆E …………….(2)
Solving Eqs (1) and (2), we get
∆E = K/2
Now minimum value of E for hydrogen atom is 10.2 eV
∆E ≥ 10.2 eV
K/2 ≥ 10.2
K ≥ 20.4 eV

Question 2.
In the Bohr atom model, the frequency of transitions is given by the following expression ν = Rc\(\left(\frac{1}{n^{2}}-\frac{1}{m^{2}}\right)\) where n < m, Consider the following transition:

TransitionsM → n
13 → 2
22 → 1
33 → 1

Show that the frequency of these transitions obey the sum rule (which is known as the Ritz combination principle)
Answer:
Data:
ν = Rc\(\left(\frac{1}{n^{2}}-\frac{1}{m^{2}}\right)\) where n < m
The principle states that the spectral lines of any element included frequencies that are either the sum or the difference of the frequencies of two other lines.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 32

Question 3.
(a) A hydrogen atom is excited by radiation of wavelength 97.5 nm. Find the principal quantum number of the excited state.
(b) Show that the total number of lines in emission spectrum is \(\frac{\mathrm{n}(\mathrm{n}-1)}{2}\) and compute the total number of possible lines in emission spectrum.
Answer:
Data :
λ = 97.5 nm = 97.5 × 10-9 m = 975 × 10-10 m
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 33

Question 4.
Calculate the radius of the earth if the density of the earth is equal to the density of the nucleus, (mass of earth 5.97 × 1024 kg].
Answer:
Data:
mass of earth = 5.97 × 1024 kg
Nuclear density = 2.3 × 1017 kg/m3
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 34

Question 5.
Calculate the mass defect and the binding energy per nucleon of the \(\text { }_{47}^{108} \mathrm{Ag}\) nucleus. (atomic mass of Ag = 107.905949)
Answer:
The \(\text { }_{47}^{108} \mathrm{Ag}\) nucleus contains 47 protons and 61 neutrons
mass of 47 protons = 47 × 1.007825 = 47.367775 u
mass of 61 neutrons =61 × 1.008665 = 61.528565 u
Total mass = 47.367775 + 61.528565 = 108.89634 u
Mass defect, ∆M = 108.89634 – 107.905949
∆M = 0.990391 u
BE = 0.990391 u × c2
BE = 0.990391 × 931 MeV
\(\frac{\mathrm{BE}}{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(\frac{0.990391 \times 931}{108}\) Mev
\(\frac{\mathrm{BE}}{\mathrm{A}}\) = 8.5 MeV/A.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 6.
Half-lives of two radioactive elements A and B are 20 minutes and 40 minutes respectively. Initially, the samples have equal number of nuclei. Calculate the ratio of decayed numbers of A and B nuclei after 80 minutes.
Ans:
Data:
(T1/2)A = 20 minutes
(T1/2)B = 40 minutes
t = 80 minutes
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 35

Question 7.
On your birthday, you measure the activity of the sample 210 Bi which has a half – life of 5.01 days. The initial activity that you measure is 1 µCi.
(a) What is the approximate activity of the sample on your next birthday? Calculate
(b) the decay constant
(c) the mean life
(d) an initial number of atoms.
Answer:
Data:
T1/2 = 5.01 days
1 ci = 3.7 × 1010 decays/s
R0 = 1 µci
t = one year = 365 days
n = \(\frac{t}{T_{1 / 2}}\)
= \(\frac{365}{5.01}\) ≈ 73 half lives

(a) R = (1/2)n R0
R = (1/2)73 (1 µci)
R = 10-22 µci

(b) λ = \(\frac{0.6931}{\mathrm{~T}_{1 / 2}}\) (1 day = 86400S)

λ = \(\frac{0.6931}{5.01 \times 86400}\)
λ = 1.6 × 10-6 S

(c) τ = \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\)

τ = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1 / 2}}{0.6931}\)

= \(\frac{5.01}{0.6931}\)
τ = 7.24 days

(d) R0 = N0 λ
N0 = \(\frac{R_{0}}{\lambda}\)

= \(\frac{1 \times 10^{-6} \times 3.7 \times 10^{10}}{1.6 \times 10^{-6}}\)
N0 = 2.31 × 1010

Question 8.
Calculate the time required for 60% of a sample of radon to undergo decay. Given T1/2 of radon = 3.8 days.
Answer:
Data:
Half life of radon = 3.8 days
Amount of sample disintegrated = 60%
Time required =?
λ = \(\frac{0.6931}{3.8}\) per day
Amount of sample disintegrated = 60%
Amount of sample present = 40%
Let N0 be the original amount of the sample present.
From law of disintegration,
N = N0 e-λt
Substituting N = 40% of N0,
\(\left(\frac{40}{100}\right)\) N0 = N0 e-λt
e-λt = \(\left(\frac{40}{100}\right)\)
e-λt = \(\frac{40}{100}\)
e-λt = \(\left(\frac{100}{40}\right)\) = 2.5
Log e 2.5 = λ × t
t = \(\frac{\log _{10} 2.5 \times 2.3026 \times 3.8}{0.6931}\)
t = 5.022 days

Question 9.
Assuming that energy released by the fission of a single \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) nucleus is 200 MeV, calculate the number of fissions per second required to produce 1-watt power.
Answer:
Data:
Energy per fission = 200 MeV
Required power = 1 watt = 1 J/s
Number of fissions per second =?
Since the two energies are in different units, we must convert them into the same unit.
Energy released per fission = 200 MeV
= 200 × 106 eV
= 200 × 106 × 1.6 × 10-19 J
= 320 × 10-13 J [ 1 eV = 1.6 × 10-19 J]
Let N be the number of fission per second, producing 1 W
Energy per fission × N = Total energy released per second.
320 × 10-13 × N= 1 J/S
N = \(\frac{1}{320 \times 10^{-13}}\)
= 3.125 × 1010 fissions
Number of fissions per second to produce the required power is 3.125 × 1010

Question 10.
Show that the mass of radium with (\({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra}\)) an activity of 1 curie is almost a gram. Given T1/2 = 1600 years.
Ans:
Data:
Activity = 1 curie
Half life of Radium = 1600 years
1 curie = 3.7 × 1010 disintegrations per second
From law of disintegration,
N = \(\frac{3.7 \times 10^{10}}{0.6931}\) × 1600 × 365 × 24 × 60 × 60

= \(\frac{1.8669}{0.6931}\) × 1021
= 2.6936 × 1021
According to Avagadro’s principle,
6.023 × 1023 atoms = 226 gm of radium

\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = λN

N = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\)

\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 1 Curie
= 3.7 × 1010 disintegration per second
λ = \(\frac{0.6931}{\mathrm{~T}_{1 / 2}}\) per year

λ = \(\frac{0.6931}{1600 \times 365 \times 24 \times 60 \times 60}\) Per second × 2.6936 × 1021 atoms

= \(\frac{226}{6.023 \times 10^{23}}\) × 2.6936 × 1021
= 101.0715 × 10-2 g
= 1.0107 gram
The activity of 1 curie of 1 gram of radium is approximately 1 gram.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 11.
Characol pieces of tree is found from an archeological site. The carbon-14 content of this characol is only 17.5% that of equivalent sample of carbon from a living tree. What is the age of tree?
Answer:
Data:
activity R = 17.5%
T1/2 = 5730 yr
The activity of the sample R = R0 e-λt
e-λt = R0/R
By taking the algorithm on bothsides, we get
t = \(\frac{1}{\lambda} \ln \left(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{O}}}\right)\)

T1/2 = \(\frac{1 \mathrm{n} 2}{\lambda}\)
t = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1 / 2}}{\ln 2} \ln \left(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{O}}}\right)\)

t = \(\frac{5730}{1 \mathrm{n} 2} \ln \left(\frac{1}{0.175}\right)\) = 14,400 yr
t = 1.44 × 104 yr

Part – II:

12th Physics Guide Atomic and Nuclear Physics Additional Questions and Answers

I. Match the following:

Question 1.
In J.J Thomson’s experiment.

Fielde/m
1. Electrica.  1/2V E2/B2
2. Magneticb. 2yE/Cl2B2
3. Electric and magneticc. E/B2R
4. Nod. Not defined

Answer:

  1. b
  2. c
  3. a
  4. d

Question 2.
In Millikan’s oil drop experiment

ForceFormula
1. gravitational force (Fg)a. σ (4/3 πr3)g
2. Electric force (Fe)b. ρ(4/3 πr3)g
3. Buoyant force (Fb)c. 6πηrυ
4. Viscous force (FV)d. qE (d)

Answer:

  1. b
  2. d
  3. a
  4. c

Question 3.

III
1. Electrona. E. Goldstein
2. Protonb. Ruther ford
3. Neutronc. James Chadwick
4. Atomic nucleusd. J.J Thomson

Answer:

  1. d
  2. a
  3. c
  4. b

Question 4.

III
1. Canal rays consist of Postively charged particles protonsa. Ruther ford
2. Electrons are distributed in shellsb. J. J. Thomson
3. Centre of an atom is densec. J. Dalton
4. Atom is indivisbled. Neil Bohr

Answer:

  1. b
  2. d
  3. a
  4. c

Question 5.

III
1. Deuteriuma. Radio carbon Dating
2. Carbon 14b. Treatment of cancer
3. Isotope of Uraniumc. Nuclear reactors
4. Cobalt 60d. An isotope of hydrogen

Answer:

  1. d
  2. a
  3. c
  4. b

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

II. Choose the odd man out:

Question 1.
a) J.J .Thomson
b) Ruther ford
c) Bohr
d) Millikan
Answer:
d) Millikan
Reason:
Milikan – Charge of an electron, others – Atom models

Question 2.
a) \(\frac{E^{2}}{2 V B^{2}}\)

b) \(\frac{2 y E}{C^{2} B^{2}}\)

c) \(\frac{E}{B^{2} R}\)

d) \(\mathrm{E} / \mathrm{B}\)
Answer:
d) \(\mathrm{E} / \mathrm{B}\)
Reason:
\(\mathrm{E} / \mathrm{B}\) – velocity,
others – Specific charge

Question 3.
a) \(\frac{m e^{4} z^{2}}{8 \varepsilon_{0}^{2} h^{2} n^{2}}\)

b) \(\frac{-m e^{4} z^{2}}{8 \varepsilon_{n}^{2} h^{2} n^{2}}\)

c) \(\frac{-m e^{4} z^{2}}{4 \varepsilon_{0}^{2} h^{2} n^{2}}\)

d) \(\frac{n^{4} h^{2} \varepsilon 0}{\pi m e^{2} Z}\)
Answer:
d) \(\frac{n^{4} h^{2} \varepsilon 0}{\pi m e^{2} Z}\)
Reason:
d) \(\frac{n^{4} h^{2} \varepsilon 0}{\pi m e^{2} Z}\) – radius of nth orbit,
others – Energy of an electron in the nth orbit

Question 4.
a) 10.2 eV
b) 12.1 eV
c) 12.75 eV
d) 13.6 eV
Answer:
d) 13.6 eV
Reason:
13.6eV – Ionization energy, Others – Excitation energy

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 5.
a) Lyman
b) Paschen
c) Brackett
d) Pfund
Answer:
a) Lyman
Reason:
Lyman – UV region, others – IR region

Question 6.
a) \({ }_{1} \mathrm{H}^{1}{ }_{1} \mathrm{H}^{2}\)

b) \({ }_{1} \mathrm{H}^{1}{ }_{1} \mathrm{H}^{3}\)

c) \({ }_{3}^{6} \mathrm{Li},{ }_{3}^{7} \mathrm{Li}\)

d) \({ }_{1}^{3} \mathrm{H},{ }_{2}^{3} \mathrm{He}\)
Answer:
d) \({ }_{1}^{3} \mathrm{H},{ }_{2}^{3} \mathrm{He}\)
Reason:
Millikan – charge of an electron

Question 7.
a) \({ }_{17}^{37} \mathrm{Cl},{ }_{16}^{37} \mathrm{~S}\)

b) \({ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{Ca},{ }_{18}^{40} \mathrm{Ar}\)

c) \({ }_{19}^{40} \mathrm{~K},{ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{Ca}\)

d) \({ }_{19}^{12} \mathrm{~B},{ }_{6}^{13} \mathrm{C}\)
Answer:
d) \({ }_{19}^{12} \mathrm{~B},{ }_{6}^{13} \mathrm{C}\)
Reason:
\({ }_{19}^{12} \mathrm{~B},{ }_{6}^{13} \mathrm{C}\) – Isotones, others – Isobars

Question 8.
a) Water
b) Heavy water
c) graphite
d) Liquid sodium
Answer:
d) Liquid sodium
Reason
liquid sodium – Cooling system, Others – Moderators.

Question 9.
a) Gravitational force
b) Electromagnetic force
c) Centripetal force
d) nuclear force
Answer:
c) Centripetal force
Reason:
Centripetal force – It is not fundamental, Others – Fundamental forces of nature.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

III. Choose the incorrect pair:

Question 1.
a) 110 mm of Hg – No discharge
b) 100mm of Hg – Crackling sound
c) 10 mm of Hg – Cathode rays
d) 0.01mm of Hg – Crooke’s dark space
Answer:
c) 10mm of Hg – Cathode rays
Reason:
10 mm of Hg – Positive column

Question 2.
a) e/m – 1.7 × 1011 C kg-1
b) e – 1.6 × 10-19 C
c) R – 1.09737 × 10-7 m-1
d) R0 – 6.97 × 10-15 m
Answer:
d) R0 – 6.97 × 10-15 m
Reason:
R0 – 1.2 × 10-15 m (or) 1.2 F

Question 3.
a) \({ }_{5}^{12} \mathrm{~B},{ }_{6}^{13} \mathrm{C}\) – Isotones

b) \({ }_{16}^{40} 5,{ }_{17}^{40} \mathrm{C}\) – Isobars

c) \({ }_{6}^{11} \mathrm{C},{ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\) – Isotopes

d) \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C},{ }_{6}^{11} \mathrm{C}\) – Radio isotopes
Answer:
d) \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C},{ }_{6}^{11} \mathrm{C}\) – Radio isotopes
Reason:
\({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) – Radio isotopes
\({ }_{6}^{11} \mathrm{C}\) – It is not Radio isotopes

Question 4.
a) Nuclear reactor fuel – Plutonium
b) Control rods – Aluminum
c) Cooling system – Ordinary water
d) Moderators – Ordinary water
Answer:
b) Control rods – Aluminum
Reason:
Control rods – Cadmium

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

IV. Choose the correct Pair:

Question 1.
a) BE/A of \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) – 28 MeV
b) BE of \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) – 7 MeV
c) BE/A of \({ }_{26}^{56} \mathrm{Fe}\) – 8.8 MeV
d) 56 BE of \({ }_{26}^{56} \mathrm{Fe}\) – 470 MeV
Answer:
c) BE/A of \({ }_{26}^{56} \mathrm{Fe}\) – 8.8 MeV
Reason:
c) BE/A of \({ }_{26}^{56} \mathrm{Fe}\) – 8.8 MeV

Question 2.
a) \({ }_{Z}^{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{X}\) → \(\begin{array}{c}
\mathrm{A}-4 \\
\mathrm{y} \\
\mathrm{Z}-2
\end{array}\) + \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\)

b) \({ }_{Z}^{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{X}\) → \(\begin{array}{c}
\mathrm{A} \\
\mathrm{y} \\
\mathrm{Z}-1
\end{array}\) + e+ + \(\bar{v}\)

c) \({ }_{Z}^{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{X}\) → \(\begin{array}{c}
\mathrm{A} \\
\mathrm{Z}+1
\end{array} \mathrm{Y}\) + e + ν

d) \({ }_{Z}^{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{X}\) → \(\begin{array}{c}
\mathrm{A} \\
\mathrm{Z}+1
\end{array} \mathrm{Y}\) + γ
Answer:
a) \({ }_{Z}^{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{X}\) → \(\begin{array}{c}
\mathrm{A}-4 \\
\mathrm{y} \\
\mathrm{Z}-2
\end{array}\) + \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\)
Reason:
a) \({ }_{Z}^{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{X}\) → \(\begin{array}{c}
\mathrm{A}-4 \\
\mathrm{y} \\
\mathrm{Z}-2
\end{array}\) + \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) – α – decay

Question 3.
a) C – 14 – 5730 years
b) Neutron – 14 Minutes
c) Phosphorous – 4 minutes
d) Nitrogen – 10.7 minutes
Answer:
a) C – 14 – 5730 years
Reason:
C – 14 – 5730 years (Half life period)

Question 4.
a) 60Co – Thyroid gland
b) 24Na – Treatment of cancer
c) 56Fe – Diagnose anaemia
d) 32p – Locate brain tumors
Ans :
c) 56Fe – diagnose anaemia
Reason:
56Fe – diagnose anaemia.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

V. Assertion and Reason:

Question 1.
Assertion:
Density of all the the nuclei is same.
Reason:
Radius of nucleus is directly proportional to the cube root of mass number.
a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the reason.
b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
d) If both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the reason
Solution:
R = Ro A1/3 R α A1/3

Question 2.
Assertion:
For the scattering of a α particles at a large angles, only the nucleus of the atom is responsible.
Reason:
Nucleus is very heavy in comparison to electrons.
a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the reason.
b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
d) If both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the reason
Solution:
We know that an electron is very light particle as compared to an a particle. Hence electron cannot scatter, the α particles scatters at large angles, according to law of conservation of energy.

Question 3.
Assertion:
Bohr had to postulate that the electrons in stationary orbits around the nucleus do not radiate.
Reason:
According to classical physics all moving electrons radiate.
a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the reason.
b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
e) If assertion is true but reason is false.
d) If both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
Solution:
An atom radiates energy, only when electron jumps from a stationary orbit of higher energy to an orbit of lower energy.

Question 4.
Assertion:
Radioactive nuclei emit β-1 particles.
Reason:
Electrons exist inside the nucleus
a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the reason.
b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
d) If both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
Solution:
So electrons do not exist in the nucleus, [n—> p + e-1 + \(\bar{v}\)]

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

VI. Choose the correct statement:

Question 1.
Which of the following statements is correct for cathode rays?
a) They are not deflected by electric and magnetic fields.
b) Cathode rays possess energy and momentum
c) When the cathode rays are allowed to fall on matter, they does not produce heat.
d) The speed of cathode rays is up to \(\left(\frac{1}{20}\right) \mathrm{th}\) of the speed of light
Answer:
b) Cathode rays possess energy and momentum
Solution:
It can be deflected by application of electric and magnetic fields. They produce heat. The \(\left(\frac{1}{10}\right) \mathrm{th}\) of the speed of light

Question 2.
Which of the following statement is correct for isotopes.
a) Same number of neutrons
b) Same number of mass number
c) Same atomic number
d) Same number of electrons
Answer:
c) Same atomic number
Solution:
Same number of protons, same atomic number, different number of neutrons different mass number.

Question 3.
Which of the following statement is correct for an alpha decay.
a) When stable nuclei decay by emitting an α particle
b) It gains two electrons and two neutrons
c) \({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra}\) → \({ }_{86}^{222} \mathrm{Ra}\) + \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\)
d) It does not emit four seperate nucleons.
Answer:
c) \({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra}\) → \({ }_{86}^{222} \mathrm{Ra}\) + \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\)
Solution:
Unstable nuclei, it loses two protons and two neutrons, and It does not emit four separate nucleons.

Question 4.
Which of the following statement is correct for neutrons.
a) Neutrons are unstable inside the nucleus
b) Neutrons are stable outside the nucleus
c) Those radiations are electromagnetic waves
d) \({ }_{4}^{9} \mathrm{Be}+{ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He} \rightarrow{ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}+{ }_{0}^{1} \mathrm{n}\)
Answer:
d) \({ }_{4}^{9} \mathrm{Be}+{ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He} \rightarrow{ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}+{ }_{0}^{1} \mathrm{n}\)
Solution:
Neutrons are stable inside the nucleus. But outside the nucleus they are unstable. Those radiations are not em waves but they are particles.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

VII. Choose the incorrect statements:

Question 1.
Which of the following statements are incorrect for fine structure constant α
a) α = Velocity of an electron in the first orbit / The speed of light
b) α = e2/2ε0 hc
c) \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{1}}{\mathrm{C}}=\frac{1}{137}\)
d) α is dimension number
Answer:
d) α is dimension number
Solution:
α is a dimensionless number

Question 2.
Which of the following statements are incorrect for Bohr atom model.
a) Bohr atom model is valid only for hydrogen atom.
b) Fine structure is explained by Bohr atom model.
c) Bohr atom model fails to explain the intensity variations in the spectral lines.
d) The distribution of electrons in atoms is not completely explained by Bohr atom model.
Answer:
b) Fine structure is explained by Bohr atom model.
Solution:
Fine structure is not explained by Bohr atom model.

Question 3.
Which of the following statements are incorrect for decay.
a) α – decay: atomic number z decreases by 2, mass number decreases by 4.
b) β – decay: atomic number z increases by one and the mass number remains the same.
c) γ – decay: no change in the mass number or atomic number of the nucleus.
d) Both α and β particles are emitted during a single decay.
Answer:
d) Both α and β particles are emitted during a single decay.
Solution:
Both α and β particles are not emitted during a single decay.

Question 4.
Which of the following statements are incorrect for elementary particles.
a) The study of elementary particles is called particle physics.
b) Electrons are not elementary particles.
c) Charge of up quark is + 2/3e
d) Charge of down quark is -1/3e
Answer:
b) Electrons are not elementary particles.
Solution:
Electrons are fundamental particles because they are not made up of anything.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

VIII. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
The potential difference applied to an X-ray tube is 5 kV and the current through it is 3.2 mA. Then the number of electrons striking the target per second is
(a) 2 x 1016
(b) 5 x 1018
(c) 1 x 1017
(d) 4 x 105
Answer:
(a) 2 x 1016
Hint:
n = \(\frac { It }{ e }\) = \(\frac{3.2 \times 10^{-3} \times 1}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) = 2 x 1016.

Question 2.
Proton Carries _______.
a) a positive charge
b) a negative charge
c) No charge
d) None of these
Answer:
a) a positive charge

Question 3.
The radioisotope used for locating brain tumours is ________.
a) Phosphor
b) Potassium
c) Iodine
d) Sodium
Answer:
c) Iodine

Question 4.
The speed of the particle, that can take discrete values is proportional to
(a) n-3/2
(b) n-1
(c) n1/2
(d) n
Answer:
(d) n
Hint:
P = mv = \(\frac { nh }{ 2a }\) ; V ∝ n.

Question 5.
Which of these four elements are essential for the construction of nuclear reactors?
a) Cobalt
b) Nickel
c) Zirconium
d) Tungsten
Answer:
C) Zirconium

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 6.
The nuclei have mass numbers in the ratio 1 : 8. find the ratio of their nuclei radii.
a) 1 : 8
b) 1 : 2
c) 2 : 1
d) 8 : 1
Answer:
b)1 : 2

Question 7.
The source of the sun’s energy is _______.
a) Fission
b) Radioactivity
c) Fusion
d) Ionization
Answer:
c) Fusion

Question 8.
Energy required for the electron excitation in Li++ from the first to the third Bohr orbit is
(a) 12.1 eV
(b) 36.3 eV
(b) 36.3 eV
(c) 108.8 eV
Answer:
(c) 108.8 eV
Hint:
En = – 13.6 \(\frac { { Z }^{ 2 } }{ { n }^{ 2 } } \)
∆E = E3 – E2 = 13.6 (3)2 \(\left[ \frac { 1 }{ { 1 }^{ 2 } } -\frac { 1 }{ { 3 }^{ 2 } } \right] \)
= \(\frac { 13.6×9×8 }{ 9 } \) = 108.8 eV.

Question 9.
Which of the following transition will have the highest emission wavelength.
a) n = 2 to n = 1
b) n = 4 to n = 1
c) n = 6 to n = 2
d) n = 5 to n = 2
Answer:
d) n = 5 to n = 2

Question 10.
One atomic mass unit (u) =
a) 1.660 × 10-27 kg
b) 1.660 × 10-20 kg
e) 1.660 × 10-24 kg
d) 1.660 × 10-22 kg
Answer:
a) 1.660 × 10-27 kg

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 11.
\(\frac{12}{5} \mathrm{~B} \rightarrow \frac{12}{6} \mathrm{C}+\ldots \ldots \bar{v}\)
a) e
b) e+
c) γ
d) None of these
Answer:
a) e

Question 12.
For an electron in the second orbit of hydrogen, what is the moment of momentum as per Bohr’s model?
(a) 2πh
(b) πh
(c) h / π
(d) 2h / π
Answer:
(c) h / π
Hint:
In second orbit of hydrogen, L = 2 \(\left( \frac { h }{ 2\pi } \right) \) = \(\frac { h }{ π }\).

Question 13.
1 curie = ________ Bq
a) 3.7 × 1010
b) 3.7 × 10-10
c) 3.8 × 10-10
d) 3.8 × 1010
Answer:
a) 3.7 × 1010

Question 14.
The mean life of \({ }_{0}^{1} \mathrm{n}\) is
a) 18.75 minutes
b) 8.11 minutes
c) 13 minutes
d) 10 minutes
Answer:
a) 18.75 minutes

Question 15.
A beam of cathode rays is subjected to crossed Electric (E) and magnetic fields. (B). This fields are adjusted such that the beam is not deflected. The specific charge of the cathode rays is given by
a) \(\mathrm{E}^{2} / 2 \mathrm{VB}^{2}\)

b) \(\mathrm{B}^{2} / 2 \mathrm{VE}^{2}\)

c) \(\frac{2 \mathrm{VB}^{2}}{\mathrm{E}^{2}}\)

d) \(\frac{2 V E^{2}}{B^{2}}\)
Answer:
a) \(\mathrm{E}^{2} / 2 \mathrm{VB}^{2}\)
Solution:
eV = 1/2 mv2
e/m = \(\frac{v^{2}}{2 V}\)
∴ V = E/B
\(\frac{e}{m}=\frac{E^{2}}{2 V B^{2}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 16.
The specific charge of an electron is ________.
a) 1.6 × 10-19 C/kg
b) 4.8 × 10-10 C/kg
c) 1.76 × 1011 C/kg
d) 1.76 × 10-11 C/kg
Answer:
c) 1.76 × 1011 C/kg
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 36

Question 17.
The ratio of specific charge of an α – particle to that of a proton is
a) 2 : 1
b) 1 : 1
c) 1 : 2
d) 1 : 3
Answer:
c) 1 : 2
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 37

Question 18.
A narrow electron beam passes undeviated through an electric field E = 3 × 104 v/m and an overlapping magnetic field B = 2 × 10-3 wb/m2. The electron motion, electric field and magnetic field are mutually perpendicular. The speed of the electron is _______.
a) 60 m/s
b) 10.3 × 107 m/s
c) 1.5 × 107 m/s
d) 0.67 × 10-7 m/s
Answer:
c) 1.5 × 107 m/s
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 38

Question 19.
In Bohr’s model of hydrogen atom, the radius of the first electron orbit is 0.53 Å. What will be the radius of the third orbit?
(a) 4.77 Å
(b) 47.7 Å
(c) 9 Å
(d) 0.09 Å
Answer:
(a) 4.77 Å
Hint:
r3 = (3)2 r1 = 9 x 0.53 = 4.77 Å.

Question 20.
In millikan’s oil drop experiment, an oil drop of mass 16 × 10-6 Kg is balanced by an electric field of 106 v/m. The charge in coulomb on the drop, assuming g = 10 m/s2 is
a) 6.2 × 10-11
b) 16 × 10-19
c) 16 × 10-11
d) 16 × 10-13
Answer:
c) 16 × 10-11
Solution:
eE = mg
e = mg/E
= \(\frac{16 \times 10^{-6} \times 10}{10^{6}}\)
= 16 × 10-11 C

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 21.
An alpha nucleus of energy 1/2 mv2 bombards a heavy target of charge Ze. Then, the distance of closest approach for the alpha nucleus will be proportional to
a) V2
b) 1/m
c) 1/V4
d) 1/Ze
Answer:
b) 1/m
Solution:
r0 = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{\mathrm{o}}} \frac{2 \mathrm{ze}^{2}}{1 / 2 \mathrm{mv}^{2}}\)
i.e, r α \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~m}}\)

Question 22.
An α – particle is projected with an energy of 4 MeV directly towards gold nucleus. Calculate the distance of its closest approach, (gold z = 79)
a) 5.688 × 10-14 m
b) 7.699 × 10-14 m
c) 5.688 × 10-14m
d) 7.699 × 10-14 m
Answer:
a) 5.688 × 10-14 m
Solution :
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 39

Question 23.
In terms of Bohr radius a0, the radius of the second Bohr orbit of a hydrogen atom is given by
(a) 4a0
(b) 8a0
(c) √2a0
(d) 2a0
Answer:
(a) 4a0
Hint:
rn = r1 n2
r2 = a0 (2)2 =4a0

Question 24.
The hydrogen atom in the ground state is excited by monochromatic radiation of a wavelength of λ = 975 Å. The number of spectral lines in the resulting spectrum emitted will be:
a) 10
b) 6
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
b) 6

Question 25.
One femtometre is equivalent to
(a) 1015 m
(b) 10-15 m
(c) 10-12 m
(d) 1011 m
Answer:
(b) 10-15 m

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 26.
The ratio of the kinetic energy to the total energy of an electron in a Bohr orbit of the hydrogen
a) 1 : -2
b) 1 : -1
c) 1 : 1
d) 2 : 1
Answer:
b) 1 : -1
Solution :
KE = – (TE);
KE/TE = -1

Question 27.
In the spectrum of hydrogen, the ratio of the longest wavelength in the lyman series to the longest wavelength in Balmer series is
a) 9/4
b) 27/5
c) 5/27
d) 4/9
Answer:
c) 5/27
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 40

Question 28.
The radius of the 5th orbit of a hydrogen atom is 13.25. Calculate the wavelength of the electron in the 5th orbit.
a) λ = 16.64 Å
b) λ = 26.5O Å
c) λ = 13.25 Å
d) λ = 13.64 Å
Answer:
a) λ = 16.64 Å

Question 29.
What would be the radius of the second orbit of He+ ions?
(a) 1.058 Å
(b) 3.023 Å
(c) 2.068 Å
(d) 4.458 Å
Answer:
1.058 Å
Hint:
rn = \(\frac {{ n }^{2}}{ Z }\) r1
For He+ ion, n = 2, Z = 2
∴ r2 = \(\frac {4}{ 2 }\) x 0.59 Å = 1.058 Å.

Question 30.
The first excitation potential to a given atom is 10.2 V. Then ionisation potential must be
a) 20.4 V
b) 13.6 V
e) 30.6 V
d) 40.8 V
Answer:
b) 13.6V
Solution:
First excitation potential energy E2 – E1 = 10.2eV
E1 = -13.6 eV
Ionisation potential energy,
E – E1 = 0 + 13.6 = 13.6 eV
Ionisation potential = 1/e
Eionization = 13.6 V

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 31.
Hydrogen atom excites energy level from fundamental state to n = 3. Number of spectral lines according to Bohr is _______.
a) 4
b) 3
c) 1
d) 2
Answer:
b) 3
Solution:
\(\frac{\mathrm{n}(\mathrm{n}-1)}{2}\) = \(\frac{3(3-1)}{2}\) = 3

Question 32.
What would be the radius of second orbit of He+ ion?
a) 1.058 Å
b) 3.023 Å
e) 2.068 Å
d) 4.458 Å
Answer:
a) 1.058 Å
Solution :
rn = a0 \(\frac{n^{2}}{z}\) for He+ ion
Z = 2, n = 2, a0 = 0.529 Å
r2 = 0.529 Å (4/2) = 1.058 Å

Question 33.
The size of an atom is proportional to
(a) A
(b) A1/3
(c) A2/3
(d) A-1/3
Answer:
(b) A1/3

Question 34.
Energy levels A, B, C of a certain atom correspond to increasing values of energy. (j.c) EA < EB < Ec. ?2 )3 arc in the wavelengths C to B, B to A, and C to A respectively, which of the following statements is correct.
a) λ3 = λ1 + λ2
b) λ3 = \(\frac{\lambda_{1} \lambda_{2}}{\lambda_{1}+\lambda_{2}}\)
c) λ1 = λ2 + λ3
d) λ32 = λ12 + λ22
Answer:
b) λ3 = \(\frac{\lambda_{1} \lambda_{2}}{\lambda_{1}+\lambda_{2}}\)
Solution:
(EC – EA) = (EC – EB) + (EB – EA)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 41

Question 35.
If in nuclear fusion process, the masses of the fusing nuclei be m1 and m2 and the mass of the resultant is m1, then
a) m3 = m1 + m2
b) m3 = m1 – m2
c) m3 < m1 + m2
d) m3 > m1 + m2
Answer:
c) m3 < m1 + m2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 36.
The nuclear radius of \(\begin{array}{l}
8 \\
4
\end{array} \text { Be }\) nucleus is
a) 1.3 × 10-15 m
b) 2.4 × 10-15 m
c) 1.3 × 10-13 m
d) 2.4 × 10-10 m
Answer:
b) 2.4 × 10-15 m
Solution:
R = R0 A1/3
R = 1.2 × 10-15 × 81/3
R = 1.2 × 10-15 × (23)1/3
R = 2.4 × 10-15 e

Question 37.
The mass defect of a \({ }_{3}^{7} \mathrm{Li}\) is 0.042u. Its binding energy per nucleon is
a) 23 MeV
b) 46 MeV
c) 5.6 MeV
d) 3.9 MeV
Answer:
c) 5.6 MeV
Solution:
\(\frac{\mathrm{BE}}{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(\frac{0.042 \times 931 \mathrm{MeV}}{7}\) = 5.6 MeV

Question 38.
The mass defect of a certain nucleus is found to be 0.03u. Its binding energy is _______.
a) 27.93 eV
b) 27.93 KeV
e) 27.93 MeV
d) 27.93 GeV
Answer:
c) 27.93 MeV
Solution:
BE = 0.03 × 931 MeV = 27.93 MeV

Question 39.
The SI unit of radioactivity is _______.
a) Roentgen
b) Rutherford
c) Curie
d) Becquerel
Answer:
d) Becquerel

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 40.
Radioactive material A has decay constant 8λ and material B has decay constant λ. Initially they have same number of nuclei. After what time, the ratio of number of nuclei of material B to that A will be 1/e
a) 1/λ
b) 1/7λ
c) 1/8λ
d) 1/9λ
Answer:
b) 1/7λ
Solution:
NA = N0 e-8λt,
NB = N0 e-λt
\(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{B}}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^{-8 \lambda t}}{\mathrm{e}^{-\lambda \mathrm{t}}}\) \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{e}}\)
= e-7λt e-1 = e-λt
= 7λt = 1
t = 1/7λ

Question 41.
If a radioactive substance to 1/16 of its original mass in 40 days, what is its half life
a) 10 days
b) 20 days
c) 40 days
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 10 days
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 42

Question 42.
The explosion of atom bomb is based on the principle of _______.
a) uncontrolled fission reaction
b) controlled fission reaction
e) fusion reaction
d) Thermonuclear reaction
Answer:
a) uncontrolled fission reaction

Question 43.
The average energy released per fission is _______.
a) 200 eV
b) 200 MeV
c) 200 GeV
d) 200 MeV
Answer:
b)200 MeV
Solution:
Energy released in fission = 200 MeV

Question 44.
In Bohr Atom model when the principal quantum number (n) increases the velocity of electron ________.
a) increases and then decreases
b) increases
c) decreases
d) remains constant
Answer:
c) decreases

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

IX. Two Marks Questions:

Question 1.
Define excitation potential.
Answer:
Excitation potential is defined as excitation energy per unit charge.

Question 2.
Why gas is a poor conductor of electricity?
Answer:
Gases at normal atmospheric pressure are poor conductors of electricity because they do not have free electrons for conduction.

Question 3.
What phenomenon occurs at a pressure of 100mm of Hg in the discharge tube?
Answer:

  1. When the pressure is kept near 100mm of Hg, the discharge of electricity through the tube takes place.
  2. Consequently, irregular streaks of light appear and also crackling sound is produced. 10. State Earnshaw’s theorem.

Question 4.
What is known as positive column?
Answer:
When the pressure is reduced to the order of 10mm of Hg, a luminous column known as positive column is formed from anode to cathode.

Question 5.
What is called crooke’s dark space?
Answer:
When the pressure reaches to around 0.01 mm of Hg, positive column disappears. At this time, a dark space is formed between anode and cathode which is often called crooke’s dark space.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 6.
Write the principle of JJ Thomson’s experiment?
Answer:
In the presence of electric and magnetic fields, the cathode rays are deflected.

Question 7.
The e/m ratio of cathode does not depend on?
Answer:
The specific charge is independent of

  • gas used
  • nature of the electrodes.

Question 6.
Write down the properties of the neutrino.
Answer:
The neutrino has the following properties:

  1. It has zero charge
  2. It has an antiparticle called anti-neutrino.
  3. Recent experiments showed that the neutrino has a very tiny mass.
  4. It interacts very weakly with the matter. Therefore, it is very difficult to detect.
  5. In fact, in every second, trillions of neutrinos coming from the sun are passing through our bodies without any interaction.

Question 9.
Why Thomson’s model of the atom is known as a watermelon model?
Answer:
This is because in Thomson’s model the electrons are assumed to be uniformly embedded in a sphere of positively charged matter like seeds in watermelon.

Question 10.
State Earnshaw’s theorem.
Answer:
From classical electrodynamics, no stable equilibrium points exist in electrostatic configuration.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 11.
What is Thomson’s atom model?
Answer:

  1. It this model, the atoms are visualized as homogeneous spheres which contain uniform distribution of positively charged particles. The negatively charged patticles known as electrons are embedded in it like seeds in water melon.
  2. The atoms are electrically neutral, this implies that the total positive charge in an atom is equal to the total negative charge.

Question 12.
What are the drawbacks of Thomson atom model?
Answer:
It fails to explain the origin of spectral lines observed in the spectrum of hydrogen atom and other atoms.

Question 13.
The large angle scattering is possible only due to nucleus. Why?
Answer:
α particles can be scattered through large angles only if they collide against a positively charged heavy particle such as a nucleus.

Question 14.
What is the value of impact parameter for scattering through 180°?
Answer:
b = K cot(θ/2)
θ is called scattering angle, b = K cot 90° = 0
It can be proved that impact parameter is zero, for θ = 180°

Question 15.
State Bohr’s angular momentum quantization condition.
Answer:
The angular momentum of the electron in stationary orbits are quantized that is it can be written as integer or integral multiple of h/2π
l = nh/2π (or) mvr = nh/2π
where
n = principal quantum number of the orbit.
h/2π = reduced plank’s constant.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 16.
State Bohr’s energy quantization condition.
Answer:
An electron can jump from one orbit to another orbit by absorbing or emitting a photon whose energy is equal between the two orbital levels.
∆E = Efinal – Einitial = hν = hc/λ
C = speed of light, λ = wavelength of the radiation, ν = frequency of the radiation

Question 17.
Define wave number of radiation. Give its unit
Answer:
\(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}\)
where \(\bar{v}\) is known as wave number which is inverse of wavelength.
unit: m-1

Question 18.
What are stationary orbits?
Answer:

  1. Electrons in an atom revolve around the nucleus only in certain discrete orbits called stationary orbits where it does not radiate electromagnetic energy.
  2. Only those discrete orbits allowed are stable orbits.

Question 19.
What is a velocity selector?
Answer:

  1. The velocity selector allows the long of a particular velocity to come out of it, by the combined action of electric and a magnetic field. “
  2. Force due to electric field = Force due to magnetic field
    eE = eBV
    V = E/B

Question 20.
How much is the energy possessed by an electron for n = ∞?
Answer:
For n = ∞,
En = –\(\frac{13.6}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\) ev = 0

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 21.
What is atomic mass unit (u)?
Answer:
One atomic mass unit (u) is defined as the 1/12 th of the mass of the isotope of carbon \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\)
1u = \(\frac{\text { mass of }_{6}^{12} \text { Catom }}{12}\)
= \(\frac{1.992 \times 10^{-26}}{12}\)
lu = 1.660 × 10-27 kg

Question 22.
State empirical formula related to the radius of nucleus and its mass number.
Answer:
The nuclei are found to be approximately spherical in shape. It is experimentally found that the radius of nuclei for Z > 10, satisfies the following empirical formula.
R = R0 A1/3
A = mass number of the nucleus
R0 = 1.2 F

Question 23.
Give the nature of α, β, and γ – radiations.
Answer:
α rays are in fact \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nuclei and β rays are electrons or positrons. Certainly, they are not electromagnetic radiation. The γ ray alone is electromagnetic radiation.

Question 24.
What is an α particle?
Answer:
An α particle is a helium nucleus consisting of two protons and two neutrons. It carrier two units of positive charge.

Question 25.
Define decay constant (λ).
Answer:
It is defined as the reciprocal of mean life λ = 1/τ

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 26.
What is the half-life of nucleus? Give the expression.
Answer:
The half (T1/2) is defined as the time required for the number of atoms initially present to reduce to one half of the initial amount, T1/2 = 0.6931 τ

Question 27.
Nuclear fusion reactions are also known as thermonuclear reactions. Why?
Answer:
When the surrounding temperature reaches around 107K, lighter nuclei start fusing to form heavier nuclei and this resulting reaction is called thermonuclear fusion reaction.

Question 28.
What is nuclear fission?
Answer:
If a heavier nucleus decays into lighter nuclei, it is called nuclear fission.

Question 29.
What are nuclear fusion?
Answer:
If two lighter nuclei fuse to heavier nuclei, it is called nuclear fusion.

Question 30.
Why is nuclear fusion not possible in a laboratory?
Answer:
Nuclear fusion requires very high temperature of 107 K. So nuclear fusion is not possible in a laboratory.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

X. Three Marks Questions:

Question 1.
What were Rutherford’s conclusions on the atom?
Answer:
1. From the experimental observations, Rutherford proposed that an atom has a lot of empty space and contains a tiny matter known as nucleus whose size is of the order of 10-14 m. The nucleus is positively charged and most of the mass of the atom is concentrated in nucleus.
2. The nucleus is surrounded by negatively charged electrons. Since static charge distribution cannot be in a stable equilibrium, he suggested that the electrons are not at rest and they revolve around the nucleus in circular orbits like planets revolving around the sun.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 43
Instability of atom
Spiral in motion of an electron around the nucleus.

Question 2.
Write down the drawbacks of the Rutherford model.
Answer:
Drawbacks of Rutherford model:
1. Rutherford atom model helps in the calculation of the diameter of the nucleus and also the size of the atom but has the following limitations.
2. This model fails to explain the distribution of electrons around the nucleus and also the stability of the atom.
3. According to classical electrodynamics, any accelerated charge emits electromagnetic radiations. Due to emission of radiations, it loses its energy. Hence, it can no longer sustain the circular motion. The radius of the orbit, therefore, becomes smaller and smaller (undergoes spiral motion) and finally the electron should fall into the nucleus and the atoms should disintegrate. But this does not happen.
4. Hence, Rutherford model could not account for the stability of atoms.
5. According to this model, emission of radiation must be continuous and must give a continuous emission spectrum but experimentally we observe only line (discrete) emission spectrum for atoms.

Question 3.
Obtain the expression for the distance of closest approach based on Rutherford atom model.
Answer:
Distance of closest approach :
1. When an alpha particle moves straight towards the nucleus, it reaches a point where it comes to rest momentarily and returns back.
2. The minimum distance between the centre of the nucleus and the alpha particle just before it gets reflected back through 180° is defined as the distance of closest approach rQ (also known as contact distance).

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 44
Distance of closest approach and impact parameter

3. At this distance, all the kinetic energy of the alpha particle will be converted into electrostatic potential energy
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 45
where Ek is the kinetic energy of the alpha particle.
4. This is used to estimate the size of the nucleus but the size of the nucleus is always lesser than the distance of the closest approach.
5. Further, Rutherford calculated the radius of the nucleus for different nuclei and found that it ranges from 10-14 m to 10-15 m.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 4.
Obtain the expression for the impact parameter based on Rutherford atom model.
Answer:
Impact parameter:
1. The impact parameter is defined as the perpendicular distance between the centre of the gold nucleus and the direction of velocity vector of alpha particle when it is at a large distance.
2. The relation between impact parameter and scattering angle can be shown as
b ∝ cot(\(\frac{\theta}{2}\)) ⇒ b = K cot(\(\frac{\theta}{2}\)) …………(1)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 46
Impact parameter

where K = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{2 \mathrm{Ze}^{2}}{\mathrm{mv}_{0}^{2}}\) and θ is called scattering angle.
3. Equation (1) implies that when impact parameter increases, the scattering angle decreases. Smaller the impact parameter, larger will be the deflection of alpha particles.

Question 5.
Obtain the expression for the velocity of electron in nth orbit.
Answer:
1. Bohr’s angular momentum quantization condition leads to
nrn = nh/2π

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 47
Variation of velocity of the electron in the orbit with principal quantum number.

For hydrogen atom ( z = 1), the radius of nth orbit is
rn = a0 n2
na0n2 = nh/2π
υn = (\(\frac{\mathrm{hz}}{2 \pi \mathrm{ma}_{\mathrm{o}}}\)) \(\frac{1}{n}\)

υn ∝ \(\frac{1}{n}\)
2. The velocity of electron decreases as the principal quantum number increases.
3. This curve is the rectangular hyperbola.
4. This implies that the velocity of electron in ground state is maximum when compared to excited states.
5. Variation of velocity of the electron in the orbit with principal quantum number.

Question 6.
Sketch the energy levels for the hydrogen atoms.
Answer:
1. Horizontal linear are drawn which represent the energy levels of the hydrogen atom.
2. The energy of the electron in the nth orbit of the hydrogen atom is given by, En = –\(\frac{13.6}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\) eV
3. For the first orbit (ground state), the total energy of electron is E1 = -13.6 eV
4. For the second orbit (first excited state), the total energy of electron is E2 = -3.4 eV
5. For the third orbit (second excited state), the total energy of electron is E3 = -1.51 eV
6. For the fourth orbit (third excited state), the total energy of electron is E4 = -0.85 eV
7. For the fifth orbit (fourth excited state), the total energy of electron is E5 = -0.54 eV and so on.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 48

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 7.
What is the significance of the negative energy of electron in the orbit?
Answer:
1. This signifies that the electron is bound to the nucleus.
2. Due to electrostatic attraction between electron and nucleus, the potential energy (PE) is negative and is greater than kinetic energy (KE) of electron.
3.Total energy (TE) of electron is negative. It cannot escape from the atom.
4. Potential energy
Un = –\(\frac{1}{4 \varepsilon_{0}^{2}} \frac{Z^{2} m e^{4}}{h^{2} n^{2}}\) ………….(1)

5. Kinetic energy
KEn = –\(\frac{1}{8 \varepsilon_{\mathrm{o}}^{2}} \frac{\mathrm{Z}^{2} \mathrm{me}^{4}}{\mathrm{~h}^{2} \mathrm{n}^{2}}\) ………..(2)

6. Total energy
En = \(\frac{1}{8 \varepsilon_{0}^{2}} \frac{Z^{2} e^{4} m}{h^{2} n^{2}}\) …………(3)
The negative sign in equation (3) indicates that the electron is bound to the nucleus.

Question 8.
Obtain Bohr’s quantisation condition on the basis of the wave picture of an electron.
Answer:
1. The circumference of an electron’s orbit of radius r must be an integral multiple of de Broglie wavelength – that is,
2πr = n(\(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\)) …………(1)
But the de Broglie wavelength (λ) for an electron of mass m moving with velocity ν is
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) where h is called Planck’s constant.
Thus from equation (1)
2πr = n(\(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\))

mvr = \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{27}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 49

2. For any particle of mass m undergoing circular motion with radius r and velocity v, the magnitude of angular momentum / is given by l = r (mv)
mvr = l = nh
This is the famous Bohr’s quantisation condition for angular momentum.

Question 9.
What is the value of charge of a neutrino? Although trillions of neutrinos coining from the sun pass throught our body every second, it is very difficult to detect them. Why?
Answer:
1. The neutrino has zero charge.
2. Neutrino interacts very weakly with the matter. In every second, trillions of neutrinos coming from the sun are passing through our body without any interaction.

Question 10.
Is the nuclear density same for all elements?
Answer:
Yes.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 50
1. The above expression shows that the nuclear density is independent of the mass number A.
2. In other words, all the nuclei (Z > 10) have the same density and it is an important characteristic of the nuclei.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 11.
Why is the mass of a nucleus always less than the sum of the masses of its constituents, neutrons, and protons?
Answer:

  1. When nucleons approach each other to form a nucleus, they strongly attract each other. Their potential energy decreases and becomes negative.
  2. It is this potential energy which holds the nucleons together in the nucleus.
  3. The decrease in potential energy results in a decrease in the mass of the nucleons inside the nucleus.

Question 12.
What do you mean by the charge independent character of nuclear forces?
Answer:

  1. The strong nuclear force is attractive and acts with an equal strength between proton-proton, proton – neutron, and neutron – neutron
  2. This shows that nuclear force is not electrostatic in nature. So nuclear force is charge independent.

Question 13.
How are β – rays emitted from a nucleus, when it does not contain electrons?
Answer:

  1. A neutron of a nucleus decays into a proton, an electron and an antineutrino.
  2. It is this electron which is emitted as β – particle.
    \({ }_{0} \mathrm{n}^{1} \rightarrow{ }_{1} \mathrm{p}^{1}+{ }_{-1} \mathrm{e}^{0}+\overline{\mathrm{v}}\)

Question 14.
Which is more dangerous: radioactive material with a short half-life, or a long half-life?
Answer:
One should not think that shorter half-life material is safer than longer half-life material because it will not last long. The shorter half-life sample will have higher activity and it is more radioactive which is more harmful.

Question 15.
What is radiocarbon dating?
Answer:

  1. Radiocarbon dating is a method of estimating the age of a dead specimen by calculation the amount C present in the specimen having the half-life of C as 5730 years.
  2. Since our human body, tree or any living organism continuously absorb CO2 from the atmosphere, the ratio of \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) to \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\) in the living organism is also nearly constant. But when the organism dies, it stops absorbing CO2.
  3. Since \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) starts to decay, the ratio of \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) to \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\) in a dead specimen decreases over the years.
  4. Suppose the ratio of \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) to \({ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}\) in the ancient tree pieces excavated is known, then the age of the tree pieces can be calculated.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 16.
How do you classify the neutrons in terms of their kinetic energy?
Answer:

  1. Neutrons are classified according to their kinetic energy as
    • Slow neutrons – 0 to 1000 eV
    • Fast neutrons – 0.5 MeV to 10 MeV
  2. The neutrons with an average energy of about 0.025 eV in thermal equilibrium are called thermal neutrons because at 298K, the thermal energy KT ~ 0.025 eV. slow and fast neutrons play a vital role in nuclear reactors.
  3. In nuclear reactors, fast neutrons are converted into slow neutrons using moderators.

Question 17.
What is a chain reaction?
Answer:
Chain reaction:

  1. When one \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) nucleus undergoes fission, the energy released might be small.
  2. But from each fission reaction, three neutrons are released.
  3.  These three neutrons cause further fission in another three \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) nuclei which in turn produce nine neutrons.
  4.  These nine neutrons initiate fission in another 27 \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) nuclei and so on.
  5.  This is called a chain reaction and the number of neutrons goes on increasing almost in geometric progression.

Question 18.
What is a controlled and uncontrolled chain reaction?
Answer:

  1. There are two kinds of chain reactions:
    • Uncontrolled chain reaction.
    • Controlled chain reaction.
  2. In an uncontrolled chain reaction, the number of neutrons multiplies indefinitely, and the entire amount of energy released in a fraction of a second.
  3. The atom bomb is an example of nuclear fission in which an uncontrolled chain reaction occurs.
  4. In nuclear reactors, the controlled chain reaction is achieved.

Question 19.
What is a nuclear reactor? Mention the uses of nuclear reactors.
Answer:
Nuclear reactor: Nuclear reactor is a system in which nuclear fission takes place in a self-sustained controlled manner.
Uses of nuclear reactors:

  • A nuclear reactor is used for power generation.
  • A nuclear reactor is used for research purposes.
  • A nuclear reactor is useful to produce radioisotopes.

Question 20.
How many nuclear reactors are there in India?
Answer:
India has 22 nuclear reactors in operation. Nuclear reactors are constructed in two places in Tamilnadu, Kalpakkam and Kudankulam. Even though nuclear reactors are aimed to cater to our energy need, in practice nuclear reactors now are able to provide only 2% of energy requirement of India.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 21.
What is the difference between critical and super-critical state?
Answer:

  1. If the average number of neutrons produced per fission is equal to one, then the reactor is said to be in a critical state.
  2. In fact, all the nuclear reactors are maintained in a critical state by suitable adjustment of control rods.
  3. If it is greater than one, then the reactor is said to be supercritical and it may explode sooner or may cause massive destruction to cause another fission and the remaining neutrons are absorbed by the control rods.
  4. Usually, cadmium or boron acts as control rod material and these rods are inserted into the uranium blocks.

Question 22.
What is the role of control rods in a nuclear reactor?
Answer:

  1. The control rods are used to adjust the reaction rate.
  2. During each fission, on average 2.5 neutrons are emitted and in order to have the controlled chain reactions, only one neutron is allowed to cause another fission and the remaining neutrons are absorbed by the control rods.
  3. Usually cadmium or boron are used as control rod material and these rods are inserted into the uranium blocks.

XI. Five Marks Questions:

Question 1.
How are cathode rays produced in a discharge tube?
Answer:
1. It consists of a long-closed glass tube (of length nearly 50 cm and diameter of 4 cm) inside of which the gas in pure form is filled usually.
2. The small opening in the tube is connected to a high vacuum pump and a low-pressure gauge.
3. This tube is fitted with two metallic plates known as electrodes which are connected to a secondary of an induction coil.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 51

4. The electrode connected to positive of secondary is known as anode and the electrode to the negative of the secondary is cathode.
5. The potential of secondary is maintained at about 50 kV.
6. Suppose the pressure of the gas in discharge tube is reduced to around 110mm of Hg using vaccum pump, it is observed that no discharge takes place.
7. When the pressure is kept near 100 mm of Hg, the discharge of electricity through the tube takes place. Consequently, irregular streaks of light appear and also crackling sound is produced.
8. When the pressure is reduced to the order of 10mm of Hg, a luminous column known as positive column is formed from anode to cathode.
9. When the pressure reaches to around 0.01 mm of Hg, positive column disappears. At this time, a dark space is formed between anode and cathode which is often called Crooke’s dark space and the walls of the tube appear with green colour.
10. At this stage, some invisible rays emanate from cathode called cathode rays, which are later found be a beam of electrons.

Question 2.
Determination of the specific charge of the electron (e/m) from the path of an electron beam. When the magnetic field is switched off.
Answer:
When the magnetic field is turned off, the deflection is only due to the electric field.
The deflection in the vertical direction is due to the electric force.
Fe = eE …………….(1)
m – mass of the electron
According to Newton’s second law of motion,
Fe = mae ……………(2)
from eqn (1) and (2)
eE = mae
ae = (\(\frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{m}}\) E)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 52
Deviation of path by applying uniform electric field

Let
y – deflection on the screen
u – initial upward velocity
l – length of one of the plates
t – time
The time taken by the cathode rays to travel in electric field t = (l/v)
Note:
u = 0, ae = e/m
S = ut + 1/2 at2
y’ = ut + 1/2 aet2
y’ = 1/2 \(\left(\frac{e}{m} E\right)\left(\frac{l}{V}\right)^{2}\)
V = E/B
y’ = \(1 / 2(\mathrm{e} / \mathrm{m}) \frac{l^{2} \mathrm{~B}^{2}}{\mathrm{E}}\)
y ∝ y’
y’ = cy’
C – proportionality constant which depends on the geometry of the discharge tube
y = c \(\left(\frac{1}{2}(\mathrm{e} / \mathrm{m}) \frac{l^{2} \mathrm{~B}^{2}}{\mathrm{E}}\right)\)

e/m = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{yE}}{\mathrm{c} l^{2} \mathrm{~B}^{2}}\)

Substituting the values on RHS, e/m = 1.7 × 1011 Ckg-1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 3.
Determination of the specific charge of the electron (e/m) from the path of an electron beam when the electric field is switched off.
Answer:
1. Suppose that the electric field is switched off and only the magnetic field is switched on. Now the deflection occurs only due to the magnetic field.
2. The force experienced by the electron in a uniform magnetic field applied perpendicular to its path is
Fm = BeV …………..(1)
3. Since this force provides the centripetal force, the electron beam undergoes a semi-circular path.
F = \(\frac{m v^{2}}{R}\) ………….(2)
from eqn (1) and (2)
Bev = \(\frac{m v^{2}}{R}\)
e/m = V/BR ……………(3)
V = E/B
e/m = E/B2R ………………(4)
Substituting the values on RHS,
e/m = 1.7 × 1011 Ckg-1

Question 4.
Explain the results of Rutherford a particle scattering experiment.
Answer:
1. A source of alpha particles (radioactive material, for example, polonium) is kept inside a thick lead box with a fine hole.
2. The explain particles coming through the fine hole of the lead box pass through another fine hole made on the lead screen.
3. These particles are now allowed to fall on the thin gold foil and it is observed that the alpha particles passing through gold foil are scattered through different angles.
4. A movable screen (from 0° to 180°) which is made up of zinc sulphide (ZnS) is kept on the other side of the gold foil to collect the alpha particles.
5. Whenever alpha particles strike the screen, a flash of light is observed which can be seen through a microscope.
6. Rutherford proposed an atom model based on the results of the alpha scattering experiment.
7. In this experiment, alpha particles (positively charged particles) are allowed to fall on the atoms of a metallic gold foil.
8. The results of this experiment are given below but the experiment showed the model.

  • Most of the alpha particles are undeflected through the gold foil and went straight.
  • Some of the alpha particles are deflected through a small angle.
  • A few alpha particles (one in a thousand) are deflected through an angle more than 90°
  • Very few alpha particles returned back (backscattered) that is, deflected back by 180°

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 53

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 54
Schematic diagram for scattering of alpha particles experiments by Rutherford.

Question 5.
Explain the spectrum of Hydrogen.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 55

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 56

Emission spectrum of hydrogen:
When the hydrogen gas enclosed in a tube is heated up, it emits electromagnetic radiations of a certain sharply defined characteristic wavelength (line spectrum), called hydrogen emission spectrum.

The absorption spectrum of hydrogen:
1. When any gas is heated up, the thermal energy is supplied to excite the electrons. Similarly, by passing light on the atoms, electrons can be excited by absorbing photons.
2. Once the electrons get sufficient energy as given by Bohr’s postulate (c), it absorbs energy with particular wavelength (or frequency) and jumps from its stationary state (original state) to higher energy state. Those wavelengths (or frequencies) for which the colours are not observed are seen as dark lines in the absorption spectrum.
3. Since electrons in excited states have a very small lifetime, those electrons jump back to the ground state through spontaneous emission in a short duration (≈10-8 s) by emitting the radiation with the same wavelength (or) frequency corresponding to the colours it absorbed. This is called emission spectroscopy.
4. The following are the spectral series in hydrogen atom:

  • Lyman series
  • Balmer series
  • Paschen series
  • Brockett series
  • Pfund series.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 6.
How does a smoke detector work?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 57
1. A very interesting application of alpha decay is in smoke detectors which prevent us from any hazardous fire.
2. The smoke detector uses around 0.2 mg of man made weak radioactive isotope called americium \({ }_{95}^{241} \mathrm{Am}\).
3. This radioactive source is placed between two oppositely charged metal plates and radiations from \({ }_{95}^{241} \mathrm{Am}\) continuously ionize the nitrogen, oxygen molecules in the air space between the plates.
4. As a result, there will be a continuous flow of small steady current in the circuit. If smoke enters, the radiation is being absorbed by the smoke particles rather than air molecules. As a result, the ionization and along with it the current is reduced.
5. This drop-in current is detected by the circuit and the alarm starts
6. The radiation dosage emitted by americium is very much less than the safe level, so it can be considered harmless.

Question 7.
Obtain an expression for half-life.
Answer:
1. We can define the half-life T1/2 as the time required for the number of atoms initially present to reduce to one-half of the initial amount.
2. The half-life is the important characteristic of every radioactive sample. Some radioactive nuclei are known to have half-life as long as 1014 years and some nucleus have a very shorter lifetime (10-14 S).
3. We can express half-life in terms of the decay constant. At t = T1/2, the number of undecayed
nuclei N = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{0}}{2}\)
4. By substituting this value into the equation, we get
\(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{0}}{2}\) = N0 e-λT1/2
1/2 = e-λT1/2 (or) e+λT1/2 = 2
Taking logarithm on both sides and rearranging the terms.
T1/2 = \(\frac{\ln 2}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{0.6931}{\lambda}\) ……………(1)

5. If the number of atoms present at t = 0 is N0, then \(\frac{N_{0}}{2}\) atoms remain undecayed in first half life and \(\frac{N_{0}}{4}\) atoms remain undecayed after second half life and so on.
6. In general, after n half – lives, the number of nuclei remaining undecayed is given by
N = \(\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^{\mathrm{n}}\) N0 …………..(2)
where n can be integer or non integer. Since the activity of radioactive sample also obeys the exponential decay law, we can also write an equation for an acitivity similar to equation,
[R = λN0 e-λt]
After n half lives, the activity or decay rate of any radiosample is
R = \(\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^{\mathrm{n}}\) R0

Question 8.
Obtain an expression for mean life.
Answer:
1. The mean life time of the nucleus is the ratio of sum or integration of life times of all nuclei to the total number nuclei present initially.
2. The total number of nuclei decaying in the time interval for t to t + ∆t is equal to
R ∆t = λNe-λt ∆t.
3. It implies that until the time t, this R ∆t number of nuclei lived. So the life time of these R ∆t nuclei is equal to be tR∆t. In the limit ∆t = 0 the total life time of all the nuclei would be the integration of tRdt from the limit t = 0 to t = ∞
Mean life
τ = \(\frac{\int_{0}^{\infty} t[\mathrm{Rdt}]}{\mathrm{N}_{0}}\)
= \(\frac{\int_{0}^{\infty} t\left[\lambda N_{0} e^{-\lambda t} d t\right]}{N_{0}}\) ……………………(1)
After a few integration (refer box item), the expression for mean life time,
τ = 1/λ ………….(2)
mean life and decay constant is inversely proportional to each other. Using mean life, the half life can be rewritten as
T1/2 = τln2 = 0.6391 τ ………….(3)

Question 9.
Describe the discovery of neutrons. Discovery of Neutrons.
Answer:

  1. In 1930, two German physicists Both and Becker found that when beryllium was bombarded with a particles, highly penetrating radiation was emitted. This radiation was capable of penetrating the thick layer of lead and was unaffected by the electric and magnetic fields. Initially, It was thought aY radiation.
  2. But in the year 1932, James Chadwick discovered that those radiations are not EM waves but they are particles of mass little greater than the mass of the proton and had no charge. He called them as neutrons.
  3. The above reaction can be written as
    \({ }_{4}^{9} \mathrm{Be}+{ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He} \rightarrow{ }_{6}^{12} \mathrm{C}+{ }_{0}^{1} \mathrm{n}\)
    where \({ }_{0}^{1} \mathrm{n}\) denotes neutron

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 10.
List the properties of neutrons.
Answer:

  1. Neutrons are the constituent particles of all nuclei, except hydrogen.
  2. Neutrons are neutral particles with no charge and mass slightly greater than protons.
  3. Neutrons are not deflected by electric and magnetic fields.
  4. Neutrons are stable inside the nucleus. But outside the nucleus they are unstable. If the neutron comes out of the nucleus (free neutron), it decays with the emission of proton, electron, and antineutrino with a half-life of 13 minutes.
  5. Neutrons are classified according to their kinetic as
    • slow neutrons (0 to 1000 eV)
    • fast neutrons (0.5 MeV to 10 MeV)
  6. The neutrons with an average energy of about 0.025 eV in thermal equilibrium are called a thermal neutron because at 298K, the thermal energy KT – 0.025eV. Slow and fast neutrons play a vital role in nuclear reactors.
  7. As neutrons are neutral, they can easily penetrate any nucleus.

Question 11.
What are the applications of radioisotopes?
Answer:
I) Medical applications:

  1. In the Medical applications field, radioisotopes are used both in diagnosis and therapy.
  2. Radio Cobalt [60C] – Treatment of cancer
  3. Radio – Sodium [24Na] – detect the presence of blocks in blood vessels.
  4. Radioiodine [131I] – detection of the nature of thyroid gland and also for the treatment.
  5. Radio [56Fe] – diagnose anaemia
  6. Radio [32P] – treatment of skin diseases.

II) Agriculture:
Radio – phosphorous [32P] – Increase the crop yields.

III) Industry:
In Industry, the lubricating oil containing radioisotopes is used to study the wear and tear of the machinery.

IV) Molecular biology:
In molecular biology, radioisotopes are used in sterilising pharmaceutical, and surgical instruments.

V) Radiocarbon dating:
Radio-carbon dating is a method of estimating the age of a dead specimen by calculating the amount of 14C present in the specimen having the half-life of 14C as 5730 years.

Question 12.
Explain chain reaction in nuclear fission.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 58
Nuclear chain reaction

1. When one \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) nucleus undergoes fission, the energy released might be small. But from each fission reaction, three neutrons are released.
2. These three neutrons cause further fission in another three nuclei \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) which in turn produce nine neutrons.
3. These nine neutrons initiate fission in another 27 \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) nuclei and so on. This is called a chain reaction and the number of neutrons goes on increasing almost in a geometric progress
4. There are two kinds of chain reactions:
(i) uncontrolled chain reaction
(ii) controlled chain reaction.
5. In an uncontrolled chain reaction, the number of neutrons multiply indefinitely and the entire amount of energy released in a fraction of second.
6. The atom bomb is an example of nuclear fission in which an uncontrolled chain reaction occurs. Atom bombs produce massive destruction for mankind.
7. It is possible to calculate the typical energy released in a chain reaction.
8. In the 100th step, the number of nuclei that undergoes fission is around 2.5 x 1040
9. The total energy released after 100th step is 2.5 × 1040 × 200 MeV = 8 × 1029 J.
10. If the chain reaction is controllable, then we can harvest an enormous amount of energy for our needs.
11. It is achieved in a controlled chain reaction.
12. In the controlled chain reaction, the average number of neutron released in each stage is kept as one such that it is possible to store the released energy.
13. In nuclear reactors, the controlled chain reaction is achieved and the produced energy is used for power generation or for research purpose.

Question 13.
Calculate the average energy released per fission.
Answer:
Energy released in fission :
We can calculate the energy (Q) released in each uranium fission reaction. We choose the most
favorable fission which is given in the equation
\({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}+{ }_{0}^{1} \mathrm{n} \rightarrow{ }_{92}^{236} \mathrm{U}^{*} \rightarrow{ }_{56}^{141} \mathrm{Ba}+{ }_{36}^{92} \mathrm{Kr}+3{ }_{0}^{1} \mathrm{n}+\mathrm{Q}\)

Mass of \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\) = 235.045733 u
Mass of \({ }_{0}^{1} \mathrm{n}\) = 1.008665 u
Total mass of reactant = 236.054938 u
Mass of \({ }_{56}^{141} \mathrm{Ba}\) = 140.9177 u
Mass of \({ }_{36}^{92} \mathrm{Kr}\)= 91.8854 u
Mass of 3 neutrons = 3.025995 u
The total mass of products = 235.829095 u
Mass defect ∆m = 236.054398 u – 235.829095 u = 0.225303 u
So the energy released in each fission = 0.225303 × 931 MeV ≈ 200 MeV
This energy first appears as kinetic energy of daughter nuclei and neutrons. But later, this kinetic energy is transferred to the surrounding matter as heat.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

XII. Additional Problems – (2 Marks):

Question 1.
The radius of the 5th orbit of hydrogen atom is 13.25 Å. Calculate the wavelength of the electron in the 5th orbit.
Solution:
2πr = nλ
2 × 3.14 × 13.25 Å = 5 × λ
λ = 16.64 Å

Question 2.
Calculate the radius of \({ }_{79}^{197} \mathrm{Au}\) nucleus.
Solution:
According to the equation
R = R0 A1/3,
R = 12 × 10-15 × (197)1/3
= 697 × 10-15 m
Or R = 6.97 F

Question 3.
Compute the binding energy per nucleon of \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nucleus.
Solution:
We found that the BE of \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) = 28 Mev
Binding energy per nucleon = \(\overline{\mathrm{BE}}\) =28 MeV/4 = 7 MeV.

Question 4.
Calculate the mass of an electron from the known values of specific charge and charge of electron.
Solution:
Data:
e = 1.602 × 10-19 C
e/m = 1.759 × 1011 C Kg-1
m = e/m = \(\frac{1.602 \times 10^{-19}}{1.759 \times 10^{11}}\)
m = 9.1 × 10-31 kg

Question 5.
The radius of the 4th orbit of hydrogen atom is 2.12 A°. Calculate the wavelength of the electron in the 4th orbit.
Solution:
Data: r4 = 2.12 A°
2πr = nλ
λ4 = \(\frac{2 \pi r_{4}}{4}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 3.14 \times 2.12 \mathrm{~A}^{0}}{4}\)
λ4 = 13.313 Å

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 6.
The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. If an electron makes a transition from an energy level -0.85 eV to -1.51 eV, Calculate the wavelenth of the spectral line emitted. To which series of hydrogen spectrum does this wavelenth belong?
Solution:
Here ∆E = E2 – E1 = -0.85-(-1.51).
= 0.66 eV
∆E = 0.66 x 1.6 x 10-19 J
λ = \(\frac { hc }{ ∆E }\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{0.66 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= 18.84 x 10-7
λ = 18840 Å
This wavelength belongs to the Pachen series of the hydrogen spectrum.

Question 7.
The half-life of radon is 3.8 days. Calculate its mean life.
Solution:
Data:
T1/2 = 3.8 days
τ = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1 / 2}}{0.6931}\)
τ = T1/2 × 1.44
τ = 3.8 × 1.44
τ = 5.472 days

Question 8.
The isotope \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U}\) successively under goes three α- decays and two β – decays what is the resulting isotope?
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 59

Question 9.
A radioactive isotope of silver has half life of 20 minutues. What fraction of the original mass would remain after one hour?
Solution:
Data:
T1/2 = 20 minutes
t = 1 hour = 60 minutes
n = \(\frac{t}{T_{1 / 2}}=\frac{60}{20}\) =3
\(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{o}}}\) = (1/2)n
= (1/2)3 = 1/8

Question 10.
How long will a radioactive isotope, whose half life is T years, take for its activity to reduce to 1/8 th of its initial value?
Solution:
Data:
R/R0 = 1/8
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 60

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

XIII. Additional Problems (3 Marks):

Question 1.
Express one atomic mass unit in energy units, first in Joules and then in MeV. Using this, express the mass defect of \(_{ 8 }^{ 16 }{ O }\) in MeV.
Solution:
We have, m = 1 amu = 1.66 x 10-27 kg, c = 3 x 108 ms-1
E = mc2 = 1.66 x 10-27 x (3 x 108)2
= 14.94 x10-11 J
= \(\frac{1.494 \times 10^{-10}}{1.6 \times 10^{-13}} \mathrm{MeV}\) [ 1 MeV = 1.6 x 10-13]
= 931.5 MeV
The \(_{ 8 }^{ 16 }{ O }\) nucleus contains 8 protons and 8 neutrons
Mass of 8 protons = 8 x 1.00727 = 8. 05816 amu
Mass of 8 neutrons = 8 x 1.00866 = 8. 06928 amu
Total Mass = 16.12744 amu
Mass of \(_{ 8 }^{ 16 }{ O }\) nucleus = 15.99053 amu
Mass defect = 0.13691 amu
∆Eb = 0.13691 x 931.5 Mev
∆Eb = 127.5 Mev

Question 2.
Forthe p fund series, calculatethe wavelength of the first member. Given Rydberg constant R = 1.09737 × 107 m-1
Solution:
Data:
R = 1.09737 × 107 m-1
For longest wavelength of paschen
n1 = 5, n2 = 6
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 61

Question 3.
The wavelength of the second line of the Balmer series in the hydrogen spectrum is 4861 A° calculate the wavelength of the first line.
Solution:
Data:
λ2 = 4861 A°
n1 = 2, n2 = 3
1/λ1 = R[latex]\frac{1}{2^{2}}-\frac{1}{3^{2}}[/latex] = \(\frac{5 \mathrm{R}}{36}\)
n1 = 2, n2 = 4
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 62

Question 4.
Calculate the value of fine structure constant.
Solution:
Data:
e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
ε0 = 8.854 × 10-12 C2 N-1 m2
h = 6.6 × 10-34 Nms
c = 3 × 108 m/s
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 63

Question 5.
Determine the speed of electron in n = 3 orbit of He+ ion.
Solution:
Data:
n =3, z =2
νn = \(\frac{\alpha c Z}{n}\)

νn = \(\frac{C}{137} \frac{Z}{n}\) [∴ α = 1/137]

ν = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8} \times 2}{137 \times 3}\)

ν = \(\frac{6}{411}\) × 108
= 0.0146 × 108
ν = 1.46 × 106 m/s

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 6.
Calculate the distance of closest appraoch of a particles to the copper nucleus when a particles of 5 MeV are scattered back by a thin sheet of copper [Z for copper = 29]
Solution:
Data:
KE =1/2 mv2 = 5MeV
= 5 × 106 × 1.6 × 10-19 J
= 8 × 10-3 J[ 1 eV = 1.6 × 10-19 J]
Z = 29 r0 =?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 64
r0 = 167.04 × 10-16 m
r0 = 1.6704 × 10-14 m

Question 7.
If 200 MeV energy is released in the fission of a single nucleus of \(_{ 92 }^{ 235 }{ U }\), how many fissions must occur to produce a power of 1 kW?
Solution:
Let the number of fissions per second be n.
Then, Energy released per second = n x 200 MeV
= n x 200 x 1.6 x 10-13 J
Energy required per second = Power x Time
= 1kW x 1 s = 1000 J
Energy released = Energy required
n x 200 x 1.6 x 10-13 = 1000
n = 3.125 x 10-13

Question 8.
The half-life period of a radioactive element A is the same as the mean life of another radioactive element B. Initially both of them have the same number of atoms. The radioactive element B decays faster than A.Explain, why?
Solution:
element A decay constant λ
element B decay constant λ
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 65

Question 9.
Find the (i) angular momentum (ii) velocity of the electron in the 5th orbit of hydrogen atom.
(h = 6.6 × 10-34 Js, m = 9.1 × 10-31 kg)
Solution:
(i) Angular momentum is given by l = n\(\hbar\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{nh}}{2 \pi}\)
l = \(\frac{5 \times 6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{2 \times 3.14}\)
= 5.25 × 10-34 kgm2s-1

(ii) Velocity is given by
Velocity υ = \(\frac{l}{m r}\)
= Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 66
υ = 4.4 × 105 ms-1

Question 10.
Calculate the number of nuclei of carbon 14 undecayed after 22,920 years if the initial number of carbon – 14 atoms is 10,000. The half- life of carbon 14 is 5730 years.
Solution:
To get the time interval in terms of half- life,
n = \(\frac{t}{\mathrm{~T}_{1 / 2}}\)
= \(\frac{22,920 \mathrm{yr}}{5730 \mathrm{yr}}\) = 4
The number of nuclei remaining undecayed after 22,920 years,
N = (\(\frac{1}{2}\))n N0
= (\(\frac{1}{2}\))4 × 10,000
N = 625

Question 11.
An electron in Bohr’s hydrogen atom has an energy of – 3.4ev. what is the angular momentum of the electron?
Solution:
Given:
En = -3.4 eV
We know that, En = -13.6\(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\) eV
i.e. -3.4eV = -13.6\(\frac{e V}{n^{2}}\) (or)
n2 = \(\frac{13.6}{3.4}\) = 4
∴ n = 2

Angular momentum,
L = \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)
L = \(\frac{2 \times\left(6.6 \times 10^{-34}\right)}{2 \times 3.14}\)
= 2.1 × 10-34 kgm2 s-1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

XIV. Additional Problems (5 Marks):

Question 1.
A radioactive sample has 2.6 µg of pure which has a half life of 10 minutes. How many nuclei are present initially. Also find its initial activity.
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 67
R0 = λN0
= 1.155 × 10-3 × 12.04 × 10-16
= 13.90 × 1013 decay/second
R0 = 13.90 × 1013 Bq
In terms of curie
R0 = \(\frac{13.90 \times 10^{13}}{3.7 \times 10^{10}}\)
= 3.75 × 103 [1 Ci = 3.7 × 1010 Bq]

Question 2.
The Bohr atom model is derived with the assumption that the nucleus of the atom is stationary and only electrons revolve around the nucleus. Suppose the nucleus is also in motion, then calculate the energy of this new system.
Solution:
1. Let the mass of the electron be m and mass of the nucleus be M. Since there is no external force acting on the system, the centre of mass of hydrogen atom remains at rest. Hence, both nucleus and electron move about the centre of mass as shown in figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 68

2. Let v be the velocity of the nuclear motion and υ be the velocity of electron motion. Since the total linear momentum of the system is zero,
-mυ + Mυ = 0 or
Mυ = mυ = p
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 69
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 70
3 .Since the potential energy of the system is same, the total energy of the hydrogen can be expressed by replacing mass by reduced mass, which is
En = \(\frac{\mu_{\mathrm{m}} \mathrm{e}^{4}}{8 \varepsilon_{0}^{2} \mathrm{~h}^{2}} \frac{1}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\)
4. Since the nucleus is very heavy compared to the electron, the reduced mass is closer to the mass of the electron.

Excition energy and excitation potential:
1. The energy required to excite an electron from lower energy state to any higher energy state is known as excitation energy.
2. The excitation energy for an electron from ground state (n = 1) to first excited state (n = 2) is called first
excitation enegy, which is
EI = E2 – E1 = -3.4 eV – (-13.6eV) = 10.2 eV
3. Similarly, the excitation energy for an electron from ground state (n = 1) to second excited state (n = 3) is
called second exciation energy, which is
EII = E3 – E1 = -1.51 eV – (-13.6eV) = 12.1 eV and so on.

4. Excitation potential is defined as excitation energy per unit charge:
E1 = eV1
⇒ V1 = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{e}}\) E1 = 10.2 volt
5. Second excitation potential is,
EII = evII
=> VII = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{e}}\)EII = 12.1 volt and so on.

Ionization energy and ionization potential:
An atom is said to be ionized when an electron is completely removed from the atom that is, it reaches the state with energy The minimum energy required to remove an electron from an atom in the ground state is known as binding energy or ionization energy.
Eionisation = E – E1
= 0 – (-13.6 eV)
= 13.6 eV
When an electron is in nth state of an atom, the energy spent to remove an electron from that state – that is, its ionization energy is
Eionisation = E – En
= 0 – (-\(\frac{13.6}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\) Z2 eV)
= \(\frac{13.6}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\) Z2 eV

At normal room temperature, the electron in a hydrogen atom (Z = 1) spends most of its time in the ground state. The amount of energy spent to remove an electron from the ground state of an atom (E = 0 for n—>∞) is known as first ionization energy (13.6 eV). Then, the hydrogen atom is said to be in ionized state or simply called as hydrogen ion, denoted by H+. If we supply more energy than the ionization energy, the excess energy will be the kinetic energy of the free electron.
Ionization potential is defined as ionization energy per unit charge.
Vionisation = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{e}}\) Eionisation
= \(\frac{13.6}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\) Z2 eV
Thus, for a hydrogen atom (Z = 1), the ionization potential is
V = \(\frac{13.6}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\) volt
The radius, velocity and total energy in ground state, first excited state and second excited state is listed.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 3.
Suppose the energy of a hydrogen like atom is given as En = –\(\frac{54.4}{n^{2}}\) eV where n∈N. Calculate the following :
a) Sketch the energy levels for this atom and compute its atomic number.
b) If the atom is in ground state, compute its first excitation potential and also its ionization potential.
c) When a photon with energy 42eV and another photon with energy 56 eV are made to collide with this atom, does this atom absorb these photons?
d) Determine the radius of its first Bohr orbit
e) Calculate the kinetic and potential energies in the ground state.
Solution:
a) Given that En = –\(\frac{54.4}{n^{2}}\) eV
For n = 1, the ground state energy E1 = -54.4 eV and for n = 2, E2 = -13.6 eV.
Similarly E3 = -6.04 eV, E4 = -3.4 eV and so on.
For large value of principal quantum number – that is , n = ∞, we get E = 0 eV
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 71

b) For a hydrogen like atom, ground state energy is
E1 = –\(\frac{13.6}{\mathrm{n}^{2}}\) Z2 eV
When Z is the atomic number. Hence, comparing this energy with given energy, we get,
-13.6 Z2 = -54.4 ⇒ Z = +2. Since, atomic number cannot be negative number Z = 2.

(c) The first excitation energy is
E1 = E2 – E1 = -13.6eV – (-54.4eV) = 40.8 eV
Hence, the first excitation potential is
V1 = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{e}}\) E1 = \(\frac{(40.8 \mathrm{eV})}{\mathrm{e}}\) = 40.8 volt
The first ionization energy is
Eionisation = E – E1 = 0 – (-54.4 eV) = 54.4 eV
Hence, the first ionization potential is
Vionisation = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{e}}\) Eionisation
= \(\frac{(54.4 \mathrm{eV})}{\mathrm{e}}\)
= 54.4 volt

d) Consider two photons to be A and B.
Given that photon A with energy 42 eV and photon B with energy 51 eV.
From Bohr assumption, difference in energy levels is equal to photon energy, then atom will absorb energy, otherwise, not.

E2 – E1 = -13.6 eV – (-54.4 eV)
= 40.8 eV ≈ 41 eV
Similarly,
E3 – E1 = -6.04 eV – (-54.4 eV)
= 48.36 eV
E4 – E1 = -3.4 eV – (-54.4 eV)
= 51 eV
E3 – E2 = -6.04 eV -(-13.6 eV)
= 7.56 eV
and so on
But note that,
E2 – E1 ≠ 42 eV, E3 – E1 ≠ 42 eV,
E4 – E1 ≠42 eV and E3 – E2 ≠ 42 eV
For all possibilities, no difference in energy is an integer multiple of photon energy. Hence, photon A is not absorbed by this atom. But for Photon B, E4 – E1 = 51 eV, which means, photon B can be absorbed by this atom.

e) Since total energy is equal to negative of kinetic energy in Bohr atom model, we get
KEn = -En = -(-\(\frac{54.4}{n^{2}}\) eV)
= \(\frac{54.4}{n^{2}}\) eV
Potential energy is negative of twice the kinetic energy, which means,
Un = -2KEn = -2(\(\frac{54.4}{n^{2}}\) eV)
= \(\frac{108.8}{n^{2}}\) eV
For a ground state, put n = 1
Kinetic energy is KE1 = 54.4 eV and Potential energy is U1 = -108.8 eV

Question 4.
Compute the binding energy of \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nucleus using the following data : Atomic mass of Helium atom, M4 (He) = 4.00260 u and that of hydrogen atom, mH = 1.00785 u
Solution:
Binding energy BE [ZmH + Nmn – MA] c2
For helium nucleus, Z = 2, N = A – Z =4 – 2 = 2
Mass defect
∆m =[(2 × 1.00785 u) + (2 × 1 .008665u) – 4.00260u]∆m = 0.03038 u
B.E = 0.03038u × c2
B.E = 0.03038 × 931 MeV=28 MeV
[∴ 1 uc2 =931 MeV]
The binding energy of the \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nucleus is 28 MeV.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics

Question 5.
To determine the age of Keezhadi, the charcol of 200g sent for carbon dating. The activity of \(6 \mathrm{C}^{14}\) is found to be 38 decays/s. Calculate the age of charcoal. (Half life of \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) = 5730 years)
Solution:
The activity R of the sample R = R0 eλ – t …………..(1)
eλ – t = \(\frac{R_{0}}{R}\)
t = \(\frac{1}{\lambda} \ln \left(\frac{R_{0}}{R}\right)\) …………..(2)
Here R = 38 decays/sec = 38 Bq
To find decay constant, we use the equation
λ = \(\frac{0.6931}{\mathrm{~T}_{1 / 2}}\)

= \(\frac{0.6931}{5730 \mathrm{yr} \times 3.156 \times 10^{7} \mathrm{~S} / \mathrm{yr}}\)
[ 1 yr = 365.25 × 24 × 60 × 60S = 3.156 × 107]
λ = 3.83 × 10-12 S-1
The mass of the charcoal is 200g
In 12g of carbon, there are 6.02 × 1023 carbon atoms
So 200g contains,
\(\frac{6.02 \times 10^{23} \text { atoms } / \mathrm{mol}}{12 \mathrm{~g} / \mathrm{mol}}\) × 200 ≈ 1 × 1025 atoms
The total number of carbon -14 atoms is given by
N0 = 1 × 1025 × 1.3 × 10-12 = 1.3 × 1013 atoms
The initial activity
R0 = 3.83 × 10-12 × 1.3 × 1012 = 50 decays/sec
R0 = 50 Bq
Substituting R0 in equation (2) we get
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 8 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 72

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System) Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

12th Computer Applications Guide DNS (Domain Name System) Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answers
Question 1.
Which of the following is used to maintain all the directory of domain names?
a) Domain name system
b) Domain name space
c) Name space
d) IP address
Answer:
a) Domain name system

Question 2.
Which of the following notation is used to denote IPv4 addresses?
a) Binary
b) Dotted-decimal
c) Hexadecimal
d) a and b
Answer:
d) a and b

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 3.
How many bits are used in the IPv addresses?
a) 32
b) 64
c) 128
d) 16
Answer:
c) 128

Question 4.
Expansion of URL is
a) Uniform Resource Location
b) Universal Resource Location
c) Uniform Resource Locator
d) Universal Resource Locator
Answer:
c) Uniform Resource Locator

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 5.
How many types are available in Relative URL?
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
a) 2

Question 6.
Maximum characters used in the label of a node?
a) 255
b) 128
c) 63
d) 32
Answer:
c) 63

Question 7.
In domain name, sequence of labels are separated by
a) ;
b) .(dot)
c) :
d) NULL
Answer:
b) .(dot)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 8.
Pick the odd one out from the following.
a) node
b) label
c) domain
d) server
Answer:
d) server

Question 9.
Which of the following initiates the mapping of the domain name to IP address?
a) Zone
b) Domain
c) Resolver
d) Name servers
Answer:
b) Domain

Question 10.
Which is the contiguous area up to which the server has access?
a) Zone
b) Domain
c) Resolver
d) Name servers
Answer:
a) Zone

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 11.
ISP stands for
a) International Service provider
b) Internet Service Provider
c) Internet service Protocol
d) Index service provider
Answer:
b) Internet Service Provider

Question 12.
TLD stands for
a) Top Level Data
b) Top Logical Domain
c) Term Level Data
d) Top Level Domain
Answer:
d) Top Level Domain

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 13.
Which of the following statements are true?
i) Domains name is a part of URL.
ii) URL made up of four parts
iii) The relative URL is a part of the Absolute URL
iv) URL doesn’t contain any protocol
a) i & ii
b) ii
c) i, ii & iii
d) i, ii & iv
Answer:
b) ii

Question 14.
Assertion (A): The number of addresses used in the IPv6 addressing method is 128.
Reason (R): IPv6 address is a 128-bit unique address.
a) A is true and R is false.
b) A is false and R is true.
c) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
d) Both A and R are correct and R is not the correct explanation of A.
Answer:
b) A is false and R is true.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 15.
Match the following
a. domain – 1. The progress that initiates translation
b. zone – 2. contains a database of domain names
c. name server 3. single node
d. resolver 4. contiguous nodes
a. 1432
b. 3421
c. 3214
d. 3412
Answer:
a. 1432

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
List any four domain names.
Answer:
Domain Name:

  1. com
  2. edu
  3. gov
  4. mil

Meaning:

  1. Commercial Organisation
  2. Educational Institution
  3. Government (US)
  4. Military groups

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 2.
What is an IP address?
Answer:

  • Internet Protocol (IP) address is simply the logical address in the network layer.
  • Like how the door number/flat number is used to 10. differentiate individual house from others in the same apartment
  • IP address is also used to find the host system in the whole network.

Question 3.
What are the types of IP address?
Answer:

  1. IPv4 Address
  2. IPv6 Address

Question 4.
What is an URL?
Answer:

  • URL (Uniform Resource Locator) is the address of a document on the Internet.
  • URL is made up four parts-protocols, hostname, folder name and file name.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 5.
List out four URLs you know.
Answer:
URL:

  1. http: //www. example.com/index, html
  2. http://www.computer.com
  3. http://www.ibm.com
  4. https://www.hellotravel.com

Question 6.
What are the types of URLs?
Answer:
Depending on the location of the document the URL is divided into 2 types

    1. Absolute URL
    2. Relative URL

Question 7.
What is a domain?
Answer:

  • A domain is a single node of the Domain Namespace.
  • In the domain name space (DNS) tree structure domain is a sub structure tree. The domain can be further divided into sub domains.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 8.
What is a zone?
Answer:

  • Zone is the contiguous part up to which the server has access.
  • The domain assigned for the server does not divide into further subdomains the zone is the same as the domain.

Question 9.
What is a resolver?
Answer:

  • Resolver is a program which is responsible for initiating the translation of a domain name into an IP address.
  • A host system need to map domain name to IP address or vice versa according to the call and that work is done by resolver.

Question 10.
What are the categories available in domain name space?
Answer:
There are 3 important components in the Domain Name System. They are Namespace, Name server and Zone.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 11.
Write any four generic Top-Level Domain.
Answer:

DomainName Meaning
comCommercial Organisation
eduEducation Institutions
govGovernment (US)
milMilitary groups

Part III

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
Write a note on DNS.
Answer:

  • Domain name space was designed to achieve a hierarchical namespace.
  • In this, the names are represented as a tree-like structure with a root element on the top and this tree can have a maximum of 128 levels starting from the root element taking the level 0 to level 127.

Question 2.
Differentiate IPv4 and IPv6.
Answer:

IPv4

IPv6

It has a 32-bit address lengthIt has a 128-bit address length
It Supports Manual and DHCP address configurationIt supports Auto and renumbering address configuration
In IPv4 end to end, connection integrity is UnachievableIn IPv6, end to end connection integrity is Achievable
It can generate 4.29×109 address spaceAddress space of IPv6 is quite large it can produce 3.4×1038 address space

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 3.
Differentiate Domain name and URL
Answer:

URL

DOMAIN NAME

URL is a full web address used to locate a webpage.A domain name is the translated and simpler form of a computer’s IP address (Logical address).
Complete web address containing domain name also.Part of the URL defines an organization or entity.
The method, hostname (domain name), port, and path.Based on subdomains (top-level, intermediate level, low level)

Question 4.
What are the differences between Absolute URL and Relative URL?
Answer:

Absolute URL

Relative URL

Absolute URL is the complete address of a document on the Inter­net.Relative URL is the par­tial address of a docu­ment on the Internet.
Absolute URL contains all the information that are required to find the files on the Internet.Relative URL contains only file name or file name with folder name.
If any of the four parts is missing then the browser would not able to link to the specific fileWe can use this type of URL when the file is on the same server related to the original document.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 5.
Write a note on the domain name.
Answer:

  1. Domain name is the sequence of labels. In domain name the sequence of labels are separated ‘ by dot (.).
  2. The domain name is always read from the lower level to higher level i.e., from the leaf node to root node.
  3. Since the root node always represents NULL string, all the domain name ending with dot.

Question 6.
Differentiate web address and URL
Answer:

WEB ADDRESS

URL

A Web Address more commonly defines a unique name that helps people remember a URL.A URL is the address of a particular website, an audio stream, or document available on the Web.
It is like a memorable street address, can help people find you online.It is the Internet address of a particu­lar site or document available via the World Wide Web.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain briefly the components of DNS.
Answer:

DNS Components:
There are three important components in the Domain Name System. They are:

  1. Namespace
  2. Name server
  3. Zone

1. Name Space:

  • The domain names must be very unique and appropriate. The names should be selected from a namespace.
  • The name space can be organized in two ways
  • Flat name space
  • Hierarchical name space
  • Flat name space is where the name is assigned to the IP address. They do not have any specific structure.
  • Hierarchical name space is where the name is made up of several parts. The first part may represent the nature of organization, the second part may represent the name of organization, and third part may represent the department of the organization.
  • Domain name space was designed to achieve hierarchical name space.

2. Name Servers:

  • The information which needs to be stored in Domain name space is quite large. Single system would be inefficient to store such a huge amount as responding to requests from all over the world. It also becomes unreliable because in case of any failure the data becomes inaccessible.
  • Name Server is a main part in the Domain Name System (DNS). It trAnswer:late the domain names to IP addresses.
  • Name server contains the DNS database which consists of domain names and their corresponding IP addresses.
  • There is a need to store large number of domain names for the world wide usage, so plenty of servers are used in the hierarchical manner.
  • Name servers do the important task of searching the domain names. While you searching a website, Local Name server (provided by ISP) asks the different name servers until one of them find out your Answer. At last, it returns IP address for that domain name.

3. Zone:

  • The entire namespace is divided into many different zones. It is the area up to which the server has access.
  • Zone is defined as a group of contiguous domains and sub-domains. If the zone has a single domain, then the zone and domain are the same.
  • Every zone has a server which contains a database called a zone file. Using the zone file, the DNS server replies the queries about hosts in its zone. There are two copies of zone files available, Master file and slave file.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 2.
Classify and Explain the IP address.
Answer:

  • Internet Protocol (IP) address is simply the logical address in the network layer.
  • Like how the door number/flat number is used to differentiate an individual house from others in the same apartment.
  • An IP address is also used to find the host system in the whole network.
  • Due to increase in the number of system in a network, there is a need of more addresses which lead to two addressing methods i.e., IPv4 and IPv6.

IPv4 Address

  • It IPv4 address is a 32-bit unique address given to a computer system.
  • No two systems can have same IP address.
  • If the network has p connections then ‘ip’ addresses should be there.
  • An address space is the total number of address¬es that can be made by that protocol.
  • It is determined by the number of bits that the protocol used.
  • If the protocol uses ‘n’ bits then the address space of that protocol would be ‘2n’ addresses can be formed. So, the number of addresses that can be formed in IPv4 is 232,
  • There are two ways to represent the IP address
    • Binary notation
    • Dotted-decimal notation
  • In binary notation the address is expressed as 32-bit binary values.
    • For E.g. 00111001 10001001 111000 00000111
  • In dotted-decimal notation the address is written in decimal format separated by dots(.). For e.g. 128.143.137.144

IPv6 Address

  • IPv6 address is a 128-bit unique address given to a computer system.
  • The number of addresses that can be formed in IPv6 is 2128. In IPv6 address, the 128 bits are divided into eight 16-bits blocks.
  • Each block is then changed into 4-dig¬it Hexadecimal numbers separated by colon symbols.
  • E.g. 2001:0000:32313:DFE1:0063:0000:0000:F EFB.a

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 3.
Explain about the name server?
Answer:
Name Servers:
1. The information which needs to be stored in the Domain namespace is quite large. A single system would be inefficient and insufficient to store such a huge amount as responding to requests from all over the world. It also becomes unreliable because in case of any failure the data becomes inaccessible.

2. The solution to this problem is to distribute the information among many computers. The best way to do that is to divide the entire space into many domains and subdomains

3. DNS also allows domains to be further divided into subdomains. By this, the solution to the problem is obtained and the hierarchy of servers is also maintained.

4. Name servers store the data and provide it to clients when queried by them. Name Servers are programs that run on a physical system and store all the zone data.

5. Name Server is a main part in the Domain Name System (DNS). It translates the domain names to IP addresses.

6. Name server contains the DNS database which consists of domain names and their corresponding IP addresses.

7. There is a need to store large number of domain names for worldwide usage, so plenty of servers are used in a hierarchical manner.

8. Name servers do the important task of searching the domain names. While you searching a website, the Local Name server (provided by ISP) ask the different name servers until one of them find out your Answer. At last it returns IP address for that domain name.

Types of Name Servers
There are three types of Name Servers which control the entire Domain Name System:
(i) Root Name Server – top-level server which contains entire DNS tree, maintained by ICANN.
There are 13 servers.

(ii) Primary/Master Name Server – contains a zone resource records. These records are updatable by domain name holders such as organizations.

(iii) Secondary/Slave Name Server – contains a copy of primary server files. This server has no authority to update, but reduce the workload of master server by sharing the queries.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 4.
What is domain name space? Explain.
Answer:

  • Domain name space was designed to achieve hierarchical name space.
  • In this, the names are represented as a tree like structure with root element on the top and this tree can have a maximum of 128 levels starting from root element taking the level 0 to level 127.
  • The domain namespace where the root element is present at the top most level i.e., level 0.
  • The root element always represents the NULL string (empty string).
  • The next level to the root element is node (children of root element). Each node in the tree has a label and a domain name.

Label:

  • It is a string which can have maximum of 63 characters.
  • Each node in that level should have different labels thereby assuring the individuality of the domain name.
  • In other words, Labels are the names given to domains.
  • Domain is a sub tree in domain name space tree structure. The domain can be further divided into sub domains.

Domain name

  • It is the sequence of labels. In domain name the sequence of labels are separated by dot (.).
  • The domain name is always read from the lower level to higher level i.e., from the leaf node to root node.
  • Since the root node always represent NULL string, all the domain name ending with dot.

Basic rules of Domain names

  • Domain can consists of Alphabets a through z, and the digits 0 through 9.
  • Hyphens are allowed, but hyphens cannot be used as first character of a domain name.
  • Spaces are not alloweds
  • Special symbols (such as !, $, &,. not permitted.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 5.
Explain how the DNS is working.
Answer:

  1. When the user enters the URL (consists of a protocol, domain name, folder name, filename) in the browser, the system fist checks its DNS cache for the corresponding IP address.
  2. If the IP address is found in the cache then the information is retrieved from the cache.
  3. If not, then the system needs to perform a DNS query i.e., the system needs to query the resolver about the IP address from Internet Service Provider (ISP).
  4. Each resolver has its own cache and if it is found in that then that information is retrieved.
  5. If not, then the query is passed to the next domain server i.e., TLD (Top Level Domain) which reviews the request and directs the query to name servers associated with that specific domain.
  6. Until the query is solved it is passed to next level domains. At last, the mapping and the record are returned to the resolver who checks whether the returned value is a record or an error.
  7. Then the resolver returns the record back to the computer browser which is then viewed by the user.

12th Computer Applications Guide DNS (Domain Name System) Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part A

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
Expand DNS?
(a) Direct Name Server
(b) Domain Name System
(c) Domain Name Security
(d) Direct Name Service
Answer:
(b) Domain Name System

Question 2.
For the communication to takes place, the information should pass through …………… layers
a) six
b) two
c) end to end
d) Seven
Answer:
d) IP addresses

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 3.
While typing a web address, DNS translates it into a machine-friendly IP address.
(a) True
(b) False
Answer:
(a) True

Question 4.
DNS provides the domain name to IP address mapping through ………….
a) IP address
b) Name Servers
c) domain
d) URL
Answer:
b) Name Servers

Question 5.
Paul V. Mockapetris together with ………………. invented the Internet Domain Name System (DNS).
a) Jon Postel
b) Dennis Ritchie
c) James Gostling
d) Carrelli
Answer:
a) Jon Postel

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 6.
IP stands for …………………
(a) Input process
(b) Input
(c) Internet Protocol
(d) Internet Power
Answer:
(c) Internet Protocol

Question 7.
……………….. is available below the root domain.
a) IANA
b) IPv4
c) IPv6
d) TLD
Answer:
d) TLD

Question 8.
How many IP addressing methods are there?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 9.
…………. is a program running on a dedicated machine which handles the queries of www end-user.
a) Webserver
b) Web Host
c) DNS
d) HTML
Answer:
a) Webserver

Question 10.
If the protocol uses ‘n’ bits then the address space of that protocol would be …………………….
(a) n
(b) n2
(c) 2n
(d) 2n
Answer:
(d) 2n

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Fill in The Blanks.

1. …………… is a logical address used to uniquely identify a computer over the Network.
Answer:
IP address

2. IPv4 address is a …………… unique address given to a computer or a device.
Answer:
32 bit

3. IPv6 address is a ……………. unique address given to a computer or a device.
Answer:
128 bit

4. …………… follows Hexadecimal number notation.
Answer:
IPv6

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

5. ……………. is the address of a document on the Internet.
Answer:
URL (Uniform Resource Locator)

6. ……………… contains only folder name and the file name or just the file name.
Answer:
Relative URL

7. …………….. is a tree-like structure with a root element on the top.
Answer:
Domain namespace.

8. The domain name is always read from the …………….
Answer:
leaf node to root node.

9. In the domain name space (DNS) tree structure …………… is a substructure tree.
Answer:
domain

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

10. …………. are programs that run on a physical system and store all the zone data.
Ans :
Name Servers

11. ……………….. provides to clients when queried by them.
Answer:
Name Servers

12. ……………. non-profit organization which regulates the Internet.
Answer:
ICANN

13. ………….. is an affiliated authority of ICANN.
Answer:
IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority)

14. ……………… is a group of contiguous domains and subdomains in the Domain Name Space.
Answer:
Zone

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Assertion And Reason

Question 1.
Assertion (A): Domain Name System (DNS) maintains all the directory of domain names and helps us to access the websites using the domain names.
Reason(R): t translates the domain name into an IP address.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 2.
Assertion (A): IPv4 address is a 64-bit unique address.
Reason(R): There are two ways to represent the IP address: Binary notation, Dotted-decimal notation.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
d) (A) is false and (R) is true

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 3.
Assertion (A): Label is a string
Reason(R): Label can have a maximum of 63 characters
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 4.
Assertion (A): Domain namespace is a tree-like structure with a root element on the top
Reason(R); it can have a maximum of 127 levels starting from the root element
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 5.
Assertion (A): The Resolver is a service of ICANN
Reason(R): Resolver, a client/ server application, initiates the process of resolving the domain names.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
d) (A) is false and (R) is true

Question 6.
Assertion (A): URL Stands for Uniform Resource Locator
Reason(R): URL- the address of a specific web page or file on the Internet.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 7.
Assertion (A): A web server is a program running on a dedicated machine which handles the queries of the www end user.
Reason(R): A web server is a type of Web Host.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Find The Odd One On The Following

1. (a) File Name
(b) Protocol
(c) HTML
(d) Host Name
Answer:
(c) HTML

2. (a) Label
(b) Namespace
(c) Name server
(d) Zone
Answer:
(a) Label

3. (a) Flat Namespace
(b) Domain Namespace
(c) Host Namespace
(d) Hierarchical Namespace
Answer:
(c) Host Namespace

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

4. (a) Tree Like Structure
(b) 128 Levels
(c) NULL string
(d) Flat Namespace
Answer:
(d) Flat Namespace

5. (a) .com
(b) -ta
(c) .gov
(d) .nic
Answer:
(b) -ta

6. (a) com
(b) net
(c) bd
(d) info
Answer:
(c) bd

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

7. (a) India
(b) Malaysia
(c) Singapore
(d) Srilanka
Answer:
(b) Malaysia

8. (a) Name server
(b) DNS Database
(c) IP Address
(d) HTTP
Answer:
(d) HTTP

9. (a) Primary Name Server
(b) Secondary Name Server
(c) Node Name Server
(d) Root Name Server
Answer:
(c) Node Name Server

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

10. (a) Host
(b) Webserver
(c) DNS server
(d) Namespace
Answer:
(d) Namespace

11. (a) Name server
(b) Resolver
(c) ICANN
(d) Zone
Answer:
(c) ICANN

12. (a) 32 bit
(b) Binary Notation
(c) Hexadecimal
(d) Dotted decimal
Answer:
(c) Hexadecimal

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

13. (a) WHOIS
(b) ICANN
(c) IAN
(d) FORTRAN
Answer:
(d) FORTRAN

14. (a) 128bit
(b) 16block
(c) Hexadecimal
(d) Binary notation
Answer:
(d) Binary notation

15. (a) in
(b) cn
(c) gov
(d) pk
Answer:
(c) gov

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is a domain?
Answer:
A domain is a single node of the Domain Namespace.

Question 2.
What is Zone?
Answer:
A zone is a subset of the Domain namespace generally stored in a file.

Question 3.
What is Domain Name Space?
Answer:
Domain Namespace is an entire collection of Domains, Subdomains, and Zones.

Question 4.
What is a Name Server?
Answer:
Name server manages the database of domain names and corresponding IP addresses.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 5.
What does the zone contain?
Answer:
A zone can contain more than one subdomain.

Question 6.
What does the server contain?
Answer:
A server can contain more than one zone file (Zones).

Domain Name Meaning

DOMAIN

MEANING

comCommercial Organisation
eduEducational Institutions
govGovernment (US)
milMilitary groups
orgNonprofit Organization
netNetworking organization
infoInformation service providers

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Part B

Short Answers

Question 1.
Name the four parts of the URL?
Answer:
URL is made up of four parts-protocols, hostname, folder name, and file name. Each part has its own specific functions. Depending on the applications, additional information can be added to the URL but the common and fundamental URL consists of these four parts.

Question 2.
List the three components of DNS?
Answer:

  1. NameSpace
  2. Name server
  3. Zone

Question 3.
What is a Label?
Answer:

  • The label is a string which can have a maximum of 63 characters.
  • Each node in that level should have different labels thereby assuring the individuality of the domain name.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 4.
Name the three domain names used in Tamil language?
Answer:
India,
Singapore,
Srilanka.

Question 5.
What is the Inverse domain?
Answer:
Inverse domain performs the opposite task of the normal DNS query. It converts the IP address to the domain name.

Question 6.
What is Zone File?
Answer:
Every zone has a server which contains a database called a zone file.

Question 7.
What are the two copies of the zone file?
Answer:
There are two copies of zone files available, they are

  1. Masterfile
  2. Slave file.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 7.
Write the demerits of the Flat namespace?
Answer:
The major disadvantage of flat namespaces is that they cannot be used in large systems. Because they need to be accessed and controlled centrally to avoid ambiguity and redundancy.

Part C

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
What are the fundamentals of URL?
Answer:

  • URL is made up of four parts-protocols, hostname, folder name, and file name.
  • Each part has its own specific functions. Depending on the applications, additional information can be added to the URL but the common and fundamental URL consists of these four parts.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System) 1

    • Protocol
    • Domain name/Hostname
    • Folders
    • Filename with extension

Question 2.
What is meant by Label?
Answer:
Label:
It is a string which can have a maximum of 63 characters. Each node in that level should have different labels thereby assuring the individuality of the domain name. In other words, Labels are the names given to domains. The domain is a subtree in the domain name space tree structure. The domain can be further divided into subdomains.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Question 3.
Write a note on Country top-level domain names.
Answer:

  • Country domain uses 2-character country abbreviation according to country.
  • For e.g., google.in – for INDIA, Google’s for US.Some of the Domain Name and their meaning listed below.
    table

Question 4.
Explain the types of Name servers?
Answer:
Types of Name Servers:
There are three types of Name Servers which control the entire Domain Name System:
Root Name Server – top-level server which contains the entire DNS tree, maintained by ICANN. There are 13 servers.

Primary/Master Name Server- contains zone resource records. These records are updatable by domain name holders such as organizations.

Secondary/Slave Name Server – contains a copy of primary server files. This server has no authority to update but reduces the workload of the master server by sharing the queries.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 12 DNS (Domain Name System)

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain the Basic rules of Domain names?
Answer:
Basic rules of Domain names:

  1. A domain can consist of Alphabets a through z, and the digits 0 through 9.
  2. Hyphens are allowed, but hyphens can not be used as the first character of a domain name.
  3. Spaces are not allowed.
  4. Special symbols (such as ! $, &, _ and so on) are not permitted, length of 2, and the maximum length of 63 characters.
  5. The entire name may be at most 253 characters long.
  6. Domain names are not case-sensitive.(It may be upper, lower, or mixing of both case letters)

Question 2.
Write a note on the Hierarchical namespace?
Answer:

  • To avoid the major disadvantage of the Flat namespace, the hierarchical namespace is used in large.
  • A hierarchical namespace is where the name is made up of several parts.
    • The first part may represent the nature of the organization,
    • The second part may represent the name of the organization, and
    • Third-party may represent the department of the organization and so on.
  • In this way, the power to control the namespace can be decentralized.
  • The centralized authority can be given to nature and then the name of the organization and so on.
  • To achieve a hierarchical namespace, Domain Name Space was designed.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

12th Computer Applications Guide Network Examples and Protocols Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
The ……………., “the Net,” is a worldwide system of computer networks.
a) Internet
b) mobile
c) communication
d) protocol
Answer:
a) Internet

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 2.
Which one of the following will be easy the way to uses Internet technology and the public telecommunication system to securely share business’s information with suppliers, vendors,partners and customers,
a) Extranet
b) Intranet
c) arpanet
d) arcnet
Answer:
a) Extranet

Question 3.
Natch the following and choose the correct answer
i. HTTP -The core protocol of the World Wide Web.
ii. FTP – enables a client to send and receive complete files from a server.
iii. SMTP – Provide e-mail services.
iv. DNS- Refer to other host computers by using names rather than numbers.
a) i, ii, iii, iv
b) ii, iii, iv, I
c) iii, iv, i, ii
d) iv, iii, ii, i
Answer:
a) i, ii, iii, iv

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 4.
Communication over…………….. is be made up of voice, data,images and text messages.
a) Social media
b) mobile network
c) whatsapp
d) software
Answer:
b) mobile network

Question 5.
Wi-Fi stands for………………
a) Wireless Fidelity
b) wired fidelity
c) wired optic fibre
d) wireless optic fibre
Answer:
a) Wireless Fidelity

Question 6.
A TCP/IP network with access restricted to members of an organization
a) LAN
b) MAN
c) WAN
d) Intranet
Answer:
d) Intranet

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 7.
RFID stands for …………………
a) Radio Free identification
b) real Frequency identity
c) Radio Frequency indicators
d) Radio Frequency Identification.
Answer:
d) Radio Frequency Identification.

Question 8.
If guarantees the sending of data is successful and which checks error on operation at OSI layer is……….
a) Application layer
b) Network layer
c) Transport Layer
d) Physical layer
Answer:
c) Transport Layer

Question 9.
Which one of the following will secure data on transmissions?
a) HTTPS
b) HTTP
c) FTP
d) SMTP
Answer:
a) HTTPS

Question 10.
………………. provides e-mail service
a) DNS
b) TCP
c) FTP
d) SMTP
Answer:
d) SMTP

Question 11.
……………. refer to other host computers by using names rather than numbers.
a) DNS
b) TCP
c) FTP
d) SMTP
Answer:
a) DNS

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 12.
TCP/IP is a combination of two protocols:
i. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
ii. Internet Protocol (IP)
iii. Selection Protocol (SP)
iv. Captial Protocol (CP)
a) i, ii
b) i, iii
c) iii, iv
d) ii, iii
Answer:
a) i, ii

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Define Intranet
Answer:

  • It is a private network within an enterprise to share company data and computing resources between the employees.
  • It may consist of many interlinked local area networks.

Question 2.
What are the uses of mobile networks?
Answer:

  • Can connect the network without cable
  • Less consumption of power
  • Huge capacity than a large transmitter
  • Covering large area than a single transmitter

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 3.
List out the benefits of WiFi
Answer:

  1. It provides mobility.
  2. It provides connection to Internet.
  3. Flexibility of LAN.
  4. Ensures connectivity.
  5. It allows places that are remote to benefit from connectivity.
  6. Low cost, high benefit.

Question 4.
How many types of RFID system available and what are they?
Answer:
Two types of RFID were

  1. Active RFID and
  2. Passive RFID systems.

1. Active RFID system: The tag has its own power source.
2. Passive RFID system: The tag gets power through power from a reader antenna to the tag antenna.

Question 5.
Expand HTTP, HTTPS, FTP
Answer:

  1. HTTP – Hypertext Transfer Protocol
  2. HTTPS – Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
  3. FTP – File Transfer Protocol

Part III

Explain in brief answer

Question 1.
Compare Internet, Intranet, and Extranet
Answer:

TypeDefinitionExample
InternetA global network, public TCP/IP network used by over a billion people all over the worldSending an email to a friend
IntranetA TCP/IP network with access restricted to members of an organizationAccessing your record in the employee personnel file
ExtranetTCP/IP network with restricted access to MembersChecking availability of inventory from an outside supplier

Question 2.
List out the components of an RFID enabled system.
Answer:

  • An RFID tag: It has a silicon microchip attached to a small antenna and mounted on a substrate,
  • A Reader: It has a scanner with antennas to trans¬mit and receives signals, used for communication.
  • A Controller: It is the host computer with a Microprocessor which receives the reader input and process the data.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 3.
Write short notes on HTTP, HTTPS, FTP.
Answer:

  1. HTTP – A protocol used between a web client and a webserver to protect non-secure data transmissions. The core protocol of the World Wide Web.
  2. HTTPS – A protocol used between a web client and a web server permits secure data transmissions.
  3. FTP – Used between computers for sending and receiving data. Enables a client to send and receive complete files from a server.

Question 4.
What are the layers available in TCP/IP Reference Model?
Answer:

  1. Application Layer
  2. Transport Layer
  3. Internet Layer
  4. Network Access Layer

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 5.
Expand ARP, ICMP, SMTP, and DNS.
Answer:

  1. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
  2. Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
  3. Transfer mission Control Protocol (TCP)
  4. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
  5. Domain Name System (DNS).

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain about Internet, Intranet and Ex¬tranet.
Answer:
INTERNET:

  • The Internet, “the Net,” is a worldwide system of computer networks
  • It is the network of networks where the users at any one computer can if they have permission, get information from any other computer.
  • The Internet is a network of global connections.
  • It comprises private, public, business, academic, and government networks
  • It linked by guided, wireless, and fiber-optic technologies.
  • The Internet denotes the global communication system, including infrastructure and hard¬ware whereas the web is one of the services interconnected over the Internet.

INTRANET:

  • It is a private network within an enterprise to share company data and computing resources between the employees.
  • It may consist of many interlinked local area networks.
  • It includes connections through one or more gateway (connects two networks using different protocols together known as protocol convertor) computers to the outside Internet.

EXTRANET:
It is a private network that uses Internet technology and the public telecommunication system to securely share business information with suppliers, vendors, partners, customers, or other businesses.

Question 2.
Discuss OSI model with its layers.
Answer:
OSI Model

  • Open System Interconnection (OSI) model was found in the year 1934, a general framework that enables network protocols along with software and systems to be developed based on a general set of guidelines.
  • It describes the standards for the inter-computer communication.

OSI Layers:
1. Physical Layer:

  • It is the 1st layer.
  • It defines the electrical and physical specifications for devices.

2. Data Link Layer:

  • It is the 2nd layer.
  • It guarantees that the data transmitted are free of errors.
  • This layer has simple protocols like “802.3 for Ethernet” and “802.11 for Wi-Fi”.

3. Network Layer:

  • It is the 3rd layer.
  • It is used to determine the path of the data packets.
  • At this layer, routing of data packets is found using IP Addressing.

4. Transport Layer:

  • It is the 4th layer.
  • It guarantees the transportation/sending of data is successful.
  • It includes the error checking operation.

5. Session Layer:

  • It is the 5th layer
  • It is used to identify the established system session between different network entities.
  • It controls dialogues between computers.
  • For instance, while accessing a system remotely, the session is created between your computer and the remote system.

6. Presentation Layer:

  • It is the 6th layer.
  • It does the translation of data to the next layer (Prepare the data to the Application Layer). Encryption and decryption protocols occur in this layer such as Secure Socket Layer (SSL).

7. Application Layer:

  • It is the 7th layer.
  • It acts as the user interface platform comprising software within the system.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 3.
Difference between TCP/IP and OSI Reference Model.
Answer:
Expands To TCP/IP- Transmission Control Protocol/OSI- Open system Interconnect

Basic for comparisonTCP/IP modelOSI Model
Expands ToTCP/IP- Transmission Control Protocol/Internet ProtocolOSI- Open system Interconnect
MeaningIt is a client-server model used for the transmission of data over the internet.It is a theoretical model which is used for a computing system.
No. Of Layers4 Layers7 Layers
Developed byDepartment of Defense (DoD)ISO (International Standard Organization)
TangibleYesNo
UsageMostly usedNever use

Question 4.
Explain the development, merits, and demerits of Mobile networks.
Answer:

Merits of Mobile Networks:

  1. Higher efficiency.
  2. Increased ability to communicate in and out of the workspace.
  3. Greater access to modem apps and services.
  4. Improved networking capabilities.
  5. Quality and flexibility of services.
  6. Rapid developments in cloud technologies.

Demerits of Mobile Networks:

  1. Cost
  2. Vulnerable to security risks.
  3. Additional training is needed to use new technology.
  4. Cybercrime

Development:
The generations of mobile networks are as follows.

  1. First Generation (1G) 1981 – NMT Launch
  2. Second Generation (2G) 1991 – GSM Launch
  3. Second to Third Generation Bridge (2.5)2000 – GPRS launch
  4. Third Generation (3G) 2003 – first UK 3G launch
  5. Fourth Generation (4G) 2007
  6. Fifth Generation (5G) 2019+

1. First Generation (1G) 1981 – NMT launch:

  • During the initial periods, the mobile systems were based on analog transmission.
  • NMT stands for Nordic Mobile Telephone communication.
  • And a very poor voice quality.

2. Second Generation(2G) 1991-GSM Launch:

  • Later the second generation of mobile systems was placed on digital transmission with GSM.
  • GSM stands for (Global System for Mobile communication) was the most popular standard which is used in the second generation, using 900MHz and 1800MHz for the frequency bands.
  • The transfer mission used as TMDA stands for (Time Division Multiple Access) and CDMA One stands for (Code Division Multiple’Access) method to increase the amount of information transported on the network

3. Second to Third Generation Bridge (2.5)2000 – GPRS launch:

  • GPRS was introduced here GPRS stands for (General Packet Radio Service).
  • GPRS is a data service which enables mobile devices to send and receive messages, picture messages, and e-mails.
  • GSM data transfer mission rates typically reached 9.6kbit/s.

4. Third Generation( 3G) 2003- first UK 3G launch:

  • This generation of mobile systems merges different mobile technology standards and uses higher frequency bands for transfer mission and Code Division Multiple Access to deliver data rates of up to 2Mbit/s supports multimedia services (MMS: voice, video, and data).
  • The data transfer mission used a WCDMA. WCDMA stands for (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access).
  • Few 3G suppliers use ATMs (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) for their ‘over the air’ network within MPLS (Multiprotocol Label Switching) or IP for their backbone network.

5. Fourth Generation (4G) 2007:

  • 4G is at the research stage. 4G was based on an Adhoc networking model where there was no need for a fixed infrastructure operation.
  • Adhoc networking requires global mobility features (e.g. Mobile IP) and connectivity to a global IPv6 network to support an IP address for each mobile device.
  • Logically roaming in assorted IP networks (for example 802.11 WLAN, GPRS and UMTS) were be possible with higher data rates, from 2Mbit/s to 10-100Mbit/s, offering reduced delays and new services.

6. Fifth Generation (5G) 2019+:

  • 5G is the stage that succeeds the 4G (LTE/ WiMAX), 3G(units), and 2G(GSM) systems.
  • 5G targets to performance the high data rate, reduced latency, energy saving, cost reduction, higher system, capacity, and massive device connectivity.
  • The ITU IMT – 2020 provides speeds up to 20 gigabits per second it has been demonstrated with millimeter waves of 15 gigahertz and higher frequency.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

12th Computer Applications Guide Network Examples and Protocols Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part A

Choose the correct answers:

Question 1.
Internet Protocol delivers packets from source to destination through
(a) TCP
(b) datagram
(c) packets header
(d) HTTP
Answer:
(c) packets header

Question 2.
…………….. over the mobile network is being made up of voice, data, images, and text messages,
a) Internet
b) Intranet
c) Extranet
d) Communication
Answer:
d) Communication

Question 3.
IP connectionless datagram service was developed by
(i) Vint cerf
(ii) Bob FrAnswer:ton
(iii) Bob Kahnin
(iv) Dan Bricklin
(a) i, ii
(b) ii, iii
(c) ii, iv
(d) i, iii
Answer:
(d) i, iii

Question 4.
The second generation of the mobile system was based on …………………… transmission.
a) Digital
b) Analog
c) Both (a) and (b)
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Digital

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 5.
Which protocols have to do the end-to-end process of secure on time and manage data or communication.
(a) Physical
(b) TCP
(c) Network
(d) ARPC
Answer:
(c) Network

Question 6.
The RFID tag gets power from the reader through the …………… Method.
a) Direct
b) propagation
c) Inductive Coupling
d) Indirect
Answer:
c) Inductive Coupling

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 7.
A passive RFID system using …………….. Method.
a) EM wave Propagation
b) Direct
c) Inductive Coupling
d) Indirect
Answer:
a) EM wave Propagation

Question 8.
Find the wrongly matched pair.
(a) Network Communication Protocol – HTTP, TCP/IP
(b) Network Security Protocol – ICMP
(c) Network Management Protocol – SNMP
Answer:
(b) Network Security Protocol – ICMP

Question 9.
………………. mainly deals with financial transactions or transfer User personal data were highly sensitive.
a) HTTP
b) SMTP
c) HTTPS
d) FTTP
Answer:
c) HTTPS

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 10.
The ……………………….. is one of the services interconnected over the Internet.
Answer:
web

Abbreviations

  1. ARPA – Advanced Research Projects Agency
  2. NMT – Nordic Mobile Telephone Communication
  3. GSM – Global System For Mobile communication
  4. SIM – Subscriber Identity Module
  5. TMDA – Time Division Multiple Access
  6. CDMA – Code Division Multiple Access
  7. GPRS – General Packet Radio Service
  8. EDGE – Enhanced Data Rates for Global Evolution.
  9. LI FI – light Fidelity
  10. UMTS – Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  11. WCDMA – Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  12. ATM – Asynchronous Transfer Mode
  13. MPLS – Multiprotocol Label Switching
  14. ITU – International Telecommunication Union
  15. RFID – Radio Frequency Identification
  16. FTP – File Transfer Protocol
  17. HTTP – HyperText Transfer Protocol
  18. SMTP – Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
  19. ARP – Address Resolution Protocol
  20. ICMP – Internet Control Message Protocol

Assertion and reason

Question 1.
Assertion (A): Internet Protocol (IP) is the principle of the communications protocol. Reason (R): IP is referred to as TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 2.
Assertion (A): Network protocols Manages Data.
Reason (R): Network protocols do not manage the network communication.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 3.
Assertion (A): Network communication protocols are that Basic data communication.
Reason (R): Network communication protocols which specific as SMTP
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 4.
Assertion (A): Advanced Research Projects Agency (ARPA) of the U.S. government in 1969 and was first recognized as the ARPANet.
Reason (R): The Internet is a network of global connections – comprising private, public, business, academic, and government networks.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 5.
Assertion (A): The Internet is a global network, public TCP/IP network used by over a billion people all over the world
Reason (R): An example of the internet is that Sending an email to a friend
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 6.
Assertion (A): Intranet a TCP/IP network with access restricted to members of an organization
Reason (R): An example of Intranet is that Checking the availability of inventory from an outside sup¬plier.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 7.
Assertion (A): NMT stands for Nordic Mobile Telephone communication
Reason (R): NMT had a very low traffic density of one call per radio channel and a very poor voice quality.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 8.
Assertion (A): RFID – Radio Frequency Identification.
Reason (R): RFID uses RF wireless technology to identify.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 9.
Assertion (A): Physical Layer defines the electrical and physical specifications for devices.
Reason (R) Physical layer has simple protocols like “802.3 for Ethernet” and “802.11 for WiFi”.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 10.
Assertion (A): Network Layer is the 3rd layer determining the path of the data Packets.
Reason (R): Network Layer helps in routing of data, packets is found using IP Addressing
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 11.
Assertion (A): TCP/IP is a set of protocols that governs communications among all computers on the Internet
Reason (R): TCP/IP protocol tells how informa-tion should be packaged, sent, and received, as well as how to get to its destination.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 12.
Assertion (A): Routable protocol which uses IP addresses to deliver packets
Reason (R): It is a reliable protocol and guarantees the delivery of information
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Find the odd one on the following

1. (a) Routers
(b) Servers
(c) Computers
(d) URLs
Answer:
(d) URLs

2. (a) HTTP
(b) TCP/IP
(c) SFTP
(d) SSL
Answer:
(b) TCP/IP

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

3. (a) Suppliers
(b) Vendors
(c) Customers
(d) Employee
Answer:
(d) Employee

4. (a) Social Media
(b) E-mail
(c) Chatting
(d) Claims
Answer:
(d) Claims

5. (a) Voice
(b) Video
(c) Data
(d) Images
Answer:
(b) Video

6. (a) 1G-1984
(b) 2G-1991
(c) 3G-2003
(d) 4G-2007
Answer:
(b) 2G-1991

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

7. (a) TMDA
(b) GSM
(c) MMT
(d) CDMA
Answer:
(c) MMT

8. (a) UMTS
(b) WCDMA
(c) 1900-2200
(d) 900-180QMhz
Answer:
(d) 900-180QMhz

9, (a) 802.11
(b) CDMA
(c) UMTS
(d) WLAN
Answer:
(b) CDMA

10. (a) Reader
(b) Chip
(c) Antenna Coil
(d) Substrate
Answer:
(a) Reader

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

11. (a) Network Layer
(b) DataLink Layer
(c) Session Layer
(d) Presentation Layer
Answer:
(b) DataLink Layer

12. (a) Bytes
(b) Bits
(c) Packet
(d) Segments
Answer:
(a) Bytes

13. (a) IP
(b) SFTP
(c) ICMP
(d) ARP
Answer:
(b) SFTP

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

14. (a) HTTP
(b) SMTP
(c)TCP
(d) FTP
Answer:
(c)TCP

15. (a) X.25
(b) Ethernet
(c) Frame
(d) Relay
Answer:
(b) Ethernet

Match the following;

Question 1.
HTTP – Host Computers
ICMP – Network Communication Protocol
SFTP – Network Management Protocol
DNS – Network Security Protocol
a) 1234
b) 4321
c) 4123
d) 2134
Answer:
c) 4123

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 2.
Internet – Claims
Intranet – Median Access Control
Extranet – Global Network
ARP – Submission of Reports
a) 3412
b) 1234
c) 2143
d) 3421
Answer:
a) 3412

Question 3.
E-Commerce – Facebook
Access Employee Database – Internet
Online Discussion – Extranet
Social Media – Intranet
a) 1234
b) 3412
c) 4312
d) 4132
Answer:
d) 4132

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 4.
First Generation – GSM Launch
Second Generation – NMT Launch
Third Generation – 2007
Fourth Generation – UK 3G Launch
a) 3412
b) 1234
c) 2143
d) 3421
Answer:
c) 2143

Question 5.
First Layer – Data Link Layer
Second Layer – Transport Layer
Third Layer – Physical Layer
Fourth Layer – Session Layer
a) 1234
b) 3412
c) 4312
d) 4132
Answer:
b) 3412

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 6.
Application Layer – ARP
Network Layer – FDDI
Presentation Layer – SNMP
Data Link Layer – TSL
a) 3412
b)1234
c)2143
d) 2413
Answer:
d) 2413

Important years to remember;

1974IP connectionless datagram service was in the transmission control program
1969(ARPA) of the U.S. government was first recognized as the ARPANet.
1981First Generation
1991Second Generation
2000Second to Third Generation Bridge
2003Third Generation
2007Fourth Generation
2019+Fifth Generation
1934Open System Interconnection(OSI)

Protocols and Their usage

PROTOCOLSUSAGE
TCP/IPset of protocols permitting communications among all computers on the Internet.
HTTPA protocol used between a web client and a web server protects nonsecure data transmissions
HTTPSA protocol used between a web client and a web server permits secure data transmissions.
FTPIt is Used between computers for sending and receiving data. Enables a client to send and receive complete files from a server.
Internet Protocol (IP).It is a routable protocol which uses IP addresses to deliver packets
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)It Resolves IP addresses to MAC (Medium Access Control) addresses.
Internet Control Mes­sage Protocol (ICMP)It is used by network devices to send error messages and operational information.
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).It Provides reliable connection-oriented transmission between two hosts. It guarantees the delivery of packets between the hosts.
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)It Provides e-mail services

Part B

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Write a note on Extranet?
Answer:
EXTRANET:
It is a private network that uses Internet technology and the public telecommunication system to securely share business information with suppliers, vendors, partners, customers, or other businesses.

Question 2.
What is mean Network Protocol?
Answer:
Network protocols are that the usual procedures, rules, formal standards, and policies comprised of formats which allocate communication between more than one device connected to the network.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 3.
What is meant by Li-Fi?
Answer:
Li-Fi is a wireless technology which uses light-emitting diodes (LEDs) for data transmission Li-Fi is the short form of Light Fidelity.

Question 4.
What is mean by cell?
Answer:

  • A mobile network or cellular network is made up of a large number of signal areas called cells.
  • These cells join to form a large coverage area. Users can cross into different cells without losing their connection.

Question 5.
Write a note on Network protocols?
Answer:
Network protocols are that the usual procedures, rules, formal standards, and policies comprised of formats which allocate communication between more than one device connected to the network.

Question 6.
What is the use of Address Resolution Protocol?
Answer:

  • It Resolves IP addresses to MAC (Medium Access Control) addresses.
  • A MAC address is a hardware identification num¬ber that uniquely identifies each device on a network.

Question 7.
What is mean by DNS?
Answer:

  • DNS-Domain Name System
  • A method of referring to other host computers by using names rather than numbers.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Part C

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain the types of Networking protocols?
Answer:
The broad types of networking protocols, including:

  1. Network communication protocols are that the Basic data communication protocols specific to HTTP and TCP/IP.
  2. Network security protocols is that implement security over network communications and include HTTP, SFTP, and SSL.
  3. Network management protocols will Provide network governance and maintenance and include ICMP and SNMP.

Question 2.
List some applications of the Internet.
Answer:

  • Download programs and files
  • Social media
  • E-Mail
  • E-Banking
  • Audio and Video Conferencing
  • E-Commerce
  • File Sharing
  • E-Governance
  • Information browsing
  • Search the web addresses for access through a search engine
  • Chatting

Question 3.
Write about Mobile Networks?
Answer:
Mobile Networks:
A mobile network or cellular network is made up of a large number of signal areas called cells. These cells join to form a large coverage area. Communication over the mobile networks is being made up of voice, data, images, and text messages.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 4.
List some Applications of the Extranet.
Answer:

  • Customer communications
  • Online education/ training
  • Account status enquiry
  • Inventory enquiry
  • Online discussion
  • Supply – chain management
  • Order status enquiry
  • Warranty registration
  • Claims
  • Distributor promotions

Question 5.
Write a note on Network protocols?
Answer:
Network protocols are that the usual procedures, rules, formal standards, and policies comprised of formats which allocate communication between more than one device connected to the network.

Question 6.
Explain the working process of TCP
Answer:

  • TCP/IP is a combination of two protocols: Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and Internet Protocol (IP).
  • The Internet Protocol typically specifies the logistics of the packets that are sent out over networks; it specifies the packets which have to go, where to go, and how to get there.
  • The Transmission Contra Protocol is accountable for guaranteeing the trustworthy transmission of data. It seems that the packets for errors and submits the requests for re-transmissions in case any of them are missing.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 6.
Write the disadvantages of the First Generation of Mobile Networks?
Answer:

  • They had a very low traffic density of one call per radio channel, A very poor voice quality.
  • They used unsure and unencrypted transmission, which leads to the spoofing of its identities.

Question 7.
Write short notes on Second to Third Generation Bridge of Mobile Networks
Answer:

  • GPRS was introduced here, it is seen as an excess period of mobile networking development, between 2G and 3G.
  • GPRS is a data service which enables mobile devices to send and receive messages, picture messages, and e-mails.
  • It allows the most popular operating speeds of up to 115kbit/s, latterly maximum of 384kbit/s by using EDGE.

Question 8.
Write short notes on Wi-Fi.
Answer:

  • Wi-Fi stands for Wireless Fidelity.
  • It is a wireless network technology that permits computers and alternative devices to be connected to every alternative into a local area network and to the net without wires and cables.
  • Wi-Fi is additionally stated as a wireless local area network that stands for wireless local area network, and 802.11, that is that the technical code for the protocol.

Part D

Detailed Answers

Question 1.
Explain in detail about Second Generation of Mobile Networks.
Answer:

  • The second generation of mobile systems was placed on digital transmission with GSM.
  • GSM stands for (Global System for Mobile communication)was the most popular standard which is used in the second generation, using 900MHz and 1800MHz for the frequency bands.-
  • GSM mobile systems have grown digital transmission using SIM. SIM stands for (Subscriber Identity Module) technology to authenticate a user for identification and billing purposes and to encrypt the data to prevent listen without permission (eavesdropping).
  • The transmission used as TDMA. TMDA stands for (Time Division Multiple Access) and CDMA One stands for (Code Division MultipleAccess ) method to increase the amount of information transported on the network.
  • Mobility is supported at layer 2, which stops seamless roaming across assorted access networks and routing domains. This means each operator must cover the entire area or have agreements in place to permit roaming.

Question 2.
Explain the important protocols present in

  1. Network layer
  2. Transport Layer

Answer:

1. Network Layer:
It is the layer where data is addressed, packaged, and routed among networks.
The important Internet protocols that operate at the Network layer are:

  • Internet Protocol (IP): A routable protocol which uses IP addresses to deliver packets. It is an unreliable protocol, does not guarantee the delivery of information.
  • Address Resolution Protocol (ARP): Resolves IP addresses to MAC (Medium Access Control) addresses. (A MAC address is a hardware identification number that uniquely identifies each device on a network.)i.e., to map IP network addresses to the hardware addresses.
  • Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP): Used by network devices to send error messages and operational information. Example: A host or router might not be reached or requested service is not presented.
  • Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP): It is a communication protocol used by hosts and routers to send Multicast (group Communication) messages to multiple IP addresses at once.

2. Transport Layer: The sessions are recognized and data packets are swapped between hosts in this layer.
Two main protocols established at this layer are:

  • Mission Control Protocol (TCP): Provides reliable connection-oriented Transmission between two hosts. It ensures the delivery of packets between the hosts.
  • User Datagram Protocol (UDP): Provides connectionless, unreliable, one-to-one, or one-to-many delivery.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 11 Network Examples and Protocols

Question 3.
Write short notes on Fourth Generation of Mobile Networks
Answer:

  • 4G is at the research stage. 4G was based on an Adhoc networking model where there was no need for a fixed infrastructure operation.
  • Adhoc networking requires global mobility features (e.g. Mobile IP) and connectivity to a global IPv6 network to support an IP address for each mobile device. Logically roaming in assorted IP networks (for example 802.11 WLAN,
  • GPRS and UMTS) were possible with higher data rates, from 2Mbit/s to 10-100Mbit/s, offering reduced delays and new services.
  • Mobile devices will not expect on a fixed infrastructure, they will require enhanced intelligence to self-configure in ad-hoc networks and having routing capabilities to route over packets switched network.

Question 4.
Explain about Fifth Generation of Mobile Networks
Answer:

  • 5G is the stage that succeeds the 4G (LTE/WiMAX), 3G(UMTS), and 2G(GSM) systems.
  • 5G targets to performance the high data rate, reduced latency, energy saving, cost reduction, higher system, capacity, and massive device connectivity.
  • The two phases of 5G, First one will be Release-15 complete by March 2019, Second one Release- 16is expected to complete in March 2020, for submission to the ITU (International Telecommunication Union) as a candidate IMT- 2020 technology.
  • The ITU IMT – 2020 provides speeds up to 20 gigabits per second it has been demonstrated with millimeter waves of 15 gigahertz and higher frequency. 3 GPP standards include any network using the New Radio software. 5G New Radio can access at lower frequencies from 600 MHz to 6 GHz.
  • Speed in the lower frequencies is only modestly higher than 4G systems, estimated at 15% to 50% faster.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 13 Network Cabling Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 13 Network Cabling

12th Computer Applications Guide Network Cabling Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
ARPANET stands for
a) American Research Project Agency Network
b) Advanced Research Project Area Network
c) Advanced Research Project Agency Network
d) American Research Programs And Network
Answer:
c) Advanced Research Project Agency Network

Question 2.
WWW was invented by
a) Tim Berners Lee
b) Charles Babbage
c) Blaise Pascal
d) John Napier
Answer:
a) Tim Berners Lee

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 3.
Which cable is used in cable TV to connect with setup box?
a) UTP cable
b) Fibre optics
c) Coaxial cable
d) USB cable
Answer:
c) Coaxial cable

Question 4.
Expansion of UTP is
a) Uninterrupted Twisted Pair
b) Uninterrupted Twisted Protocol
c) Unshielded Twisted Pair
d) Universal Twisted Protocol
Answer:
c) Unshielded Twisted Pair

Question 5.
Which medium is used in the optical fibre cables to transmit data?
a) Microwave
b) infra red
c) light
d) sound
Answer:
c) light

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 6.
Which of the following is a small peripheral device with a sim slot to connect the computers to Internet?
a) USB
b) Dongles
c) Memory card
d) Mobiles
Answer:
a) USB

Question 7.
Which connector is used in the Ethernet cables?
a) RJ11
b) RJ21
c) RJ61
d) RJ45
Answer:
d) RJ45

Question 8.
Which of the following connector is called as champ connector?
a) RJ11
b) RJ21
c) RJ61
d) RJ45
Answer:
b) RJ21

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 9.
How many pins are used in RJ45 cables?
a) 8
b) 6
c) 50
d) 25
Answer:
a) 8

Question 10.
Which wiring standard is used for connecting two computers directly?
a) straight Through wiring
b) Cross Over wiring
c) Rollover wiring
d) None
Answer:
b) Cross Over wiring

Question 11.
Pick the odd one out from the following cables
a) roll over
b) cross over
c) null modem
d) straight through
Answer:
c) null modem

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 12.
Match the following
1. Ethernet – Port
2. RJ45 connector – Ethernet
3. RJ45 jack – Plug
4. RJ45 cable – 802.3
a) 1, 2, 4, 3
b) 4, 1, 3, 2
c) 4, 3, 1, 2
d) 4, 2, 1, 3
Answer:
d) 4, 2, 1, 3

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Write a note on twisted pair cable?
Answer:

  • Twisted Pair Cables is a type of cable with two or more insulated wires twisted together.
  • It started with the speed of 10 Mbps (10BASE-T cable is used).
  • It started with the speed of 10 Mbps (10BA.SE-T cable is used).
  • Then the cable is improved and the speed was higher and went to 100 Mbps and the cable was renamed 100BASE-TX.

Question 2.
What are the uses of USB cables?
Answer:

  • The Universal Serial Bus is used to connect the keyboard, mouse, and other peripheral devices.
  • Micro USB is a miniaturized version of the USB used for connecting mobile devices such as smartphones, GPS devices, and digital cameras.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 3.
Write a note on the types of RJ45 connectors?
Answer:

  1. Wiring schemes specify how the wires to be connected with the RJ45 connector.
  2. There are two wiring schemes available to terminate the twisted-pair cable on each end, which are
    • T-568A
    • T-568B.

Question 4.
What is an Ethernet port?
Answer:

  • The Ethernet port is the jack where the Ethernet cable is to be connected.
  • This port will be there In both the computers and the LAN port.

Question 5.
What is the use of the Crimping tool?
Answer:
A crimping tool is a physical tool which is used to connect the patch wire and the Ethernet connector. The tool will puncture the connector and makes the wire set in the connector.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 6.
What are the types of twisted pair cables?
Answer:
There are two types of twisted pair cables, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) and Shielded Twisted pair (STP). The UTP is used nowadays as modem cables for the Internet and they are lower in cost and installation and maintenance is easy compared to the coaxial cables.

Question 7.
What is meant by champ connector?
Answer:
The RJ-21 connector has 50 pins with 25 pins at one end and 25 pins at the other end. It is also called a champ connector or Amphenol connector. The Amphenol is a connector manufacturer. The RJ-21 interface is typically used for data communication trucking applications.

Part III

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
Write a note on crossover cables.
Answer:

  • If you require a cable to connect two computers or Ethernet devices directly together without a hub, then you will need to use a Crossover cable instead.
  • The easiest way to make a crossover cable is to make one end to T568A colour coding and the other end to T568B.
  • Another way to make the cable is to remember the colour coding used in this type. Here Green set of wires at one end are connected with the Orange set of wires at another end and vice versa.

Question 2.
Write a short note on RJ45 connector?
Answer:
RJ45 Connector:

  1. The RJ45 connector is a small plastic cup which will be used to connect the wire inside the connector and ready to connect to the Internet.
  2. The RJ45 connector looks similar to a telephone jack but it looks slightly wider. The Ethernet cables are sometimes called RJ45 cables.
  3. In RJ45 the “RJ” stands for the Registered Jack and the “45” simply refers to the number of interface standards in the cable.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 3.
What are the differences between serial and parallel ports?
Answer:

Subject

Serial Port

parallel port

Pins9 pins25 pins
Type of portMale portFemale Port
ColorUsually Purple in colorUsually Green in color
Data Transfer RateSlower than Parallel PortFaster than Serial Port
Moving BitsSerial move bits inline, one at a time.Parallel moves bits next to each other
Usage of WireSerial ports are only used 2 wires for transmitting and receiving dataParallel Port used 8 or more wire for trans­mitting and receiving data.

Question 4.
What is meant by a null modem cable?
Answer:
RS-232 cable is also used for interconnecting two computers without a modem. So it is also a null-modem cable. A cable interconnecting two devices directly are known as a null-modem cable.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 5.
What are the components involved in Ethernet cabling?
Answer:
The three main components are used in the Ethernet cabling components are

  1. Patch Cable (Twisted pair)
  2. RJ45 Connector
  3. Ethernet Ports
  4. Crimping Tool

Question 6.
What are the types of Fibre optic cables?
Answer:
There are two types of fiber optic cables available.

  1. One is single-mode (100BaseBx)
  2. Multimode (lOOBaseSX).
    • Single-mode cables are used for long-distance transmission and at a high cost
    • Multimode cables are used for short-distance transmission at a very low cost.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
What is meant by Registered Jack? Explain briefly the types of Jacks.
Answer:
Registered Jacks:

  • A Registered Jack commonly known as RJ is a network interface used for network cabling, wiring, and jack construction.
  • The primary function of the registered jack is to connect different data equipment and telecommunication devices.
  • The commonly known registered jacks are RJ-11, RJ-45, RJ-21, and RJ-28.
  • The registered jack refers to the male physical connector (Plug), a female physical connector (Jack) and it’s the wiring.

RJ-11:

  • It is the most popular modern form of the registered jack.
  • It is found in the home and office.
  • This registered jack is mainly used in telephone and landlines.
  • There are 6 pins where
    • The two pins give the transmission configuration,
    • The two pins give the receiver configuration and
    • The other two pins will be kept for reserved.
    • The two pin will have the positive terminal and the negative terminal.

RJ-14 and RJ-61:

  • The RJ-14 is the same as RJ-11 which will be used for telephone lines where same it as 6 pins whereas the RJ-61 will have 8 pins.
  • This RJ-61 will use the twisted pair cable with a modular connection.

RJ-21:

  • The RJ-21 connector has 50 pins with 25 pins at one end and 25 pins at the other end.
  • It is also called as champ connector or Amphenol connector.
  • The Amphenol is a connector manufacturer.
  • The RJ-21 interface is typically used for data communication trucking applications.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 2.
Explain wiring techniques used in Ethernet cabling.
Answer:

  • There are three types of wiring techniques to construct the Ethernet cable.
  • It is also known as color coding techniques. They are
    • Straight-Through Wiring
    • Cross-over Wiring
    • Roll-over Wiring

Straight-Through Wiring

  • In general, the Ethernet cables used for Ethernet connections are “straight through cables”.
  • These cable wires are in the same sequence at both ends of the cable, which means that pin 1 of the plug on one end is connected to pin 1 of the plug on the other end (for both standard – T568A & T568B).
  • The straight through wiring cables are mostly used for connecting PC / NIC card to a hub.
  • This is a simple physical connection used in printers, computers and other network interfaces.

Cross-over Wiring

  • Crossover cable is used to to connect two com¬puters or Ethernet devices directly together without a hub.
  • The pairs(Tx and Rx lines) will be crossed which means pin 1 & 2 of the plug on one end are connected with pin 3 & 6 of the plug on other end, and vice versa (3 & 6 to pin 1 & 2).
  • The Null modem Cables are the example of the crossover cables.

Roll-over Wiring

  • Rollover cable is a type of null-modem cable that is often used to connect a device console port to make programming changes to the device.
  • The rollover wiring have opposite pin arrangements, all the cables are rolled over to different arrangements.
  • In the rollover cable, the colored wires are reversed on other end i.e. the pins on one end are connected with other end in reverse order.
  • Rollover cable is also known as Yost cable or Console cable. It is typically flat (and light blue color) to distinguish it from other types of network cabling.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 3.
Explain about RJ45 connector.
Answer:

  • The RJ45 connector is a small plastic cup which will be used to connect the wire inside the connector and ready to connect the Internet.
  • The RJ45 connector looks similar like a telephone jack but it looks a slightly wider.
  • The Ethernet cables are sometime called as RJ45 cables.
  • In RJ45 the “RJ” stands for the Registered Jack and the “45” simply refers to the number of interface standard in the cable.
  • Each RJ45 connector has eight pins and connected to each end of the Ethernet cable, since it has 8-position, 8-contact (8P8C) modular plug,
  • It is also known as 8P8C connector. These plugs (connector) are then inserted into Ethernet port of the network card.

Wiring schemes and color codes of the connector

  • The RJ45 connector has eight small jack inside to connect eight small wires of the patch cable.
  • The eight cables are in eight different colors. Let’s discuss that eight colors and where does that eight colors connect to the RJ45 connector.
  • Wiring schemes specifies how the wires to be connected with RJ45 connector. There are two wiring schemes available to terminate the twisted-pair cable on each end, which are T-568A and T-568B.
  • Although four pairs of wires are available in the cable, Ethernet uses only two pairs: Orange and Green. The other two colors (blue and brown) can be used ISDN or phone connections.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 4.
Explain the components used in Ethernet cabling.
Answer:

The main components are used in the Ethernet cabling are

  1. Patch Cable (Twisted pair)
  2. RJ45 Connector
  3. Ethernet Ports
  4. Crimping Tool

1. Patch Cable (Twisted Pair):
1. These Cables are generally made up of 8 wires in different colors.

2. Four of them are solid colours, and the others are striped.
3. The eight colors are white green, green, white orange, blue, white blue, orange, white brown and brown. The following figure 13.8 shows the patch cable.
Ethernet cables are normally manufactured in several industrial standards such as Cat 3, Cat 5, Cat 6, Cat 6e and cat 7. “Cat” simply stands for “Category,”. Increasing the size of the cable also lead to slower transmission speed.

4. The cables together with male connectors (RJ45) on each end are commonly referred as Ethernet cables. It is also called as RJ45 cables, since Ethernet cable uses RJ45 connectors.

2. RJ45 Connector:

  • The RJ45 connector is a small plastic cup which will be used to connect the wire inside the connector and ready to connect the Internet.
  • The RJ45 connector looks similar like a telephone jack but it looks a slightly wider.
  • The Ethernet cables are sometime called as RJ45 cables.
  • In RJ45 the “RJ” stands for the Registered Jack and the “45” simply refers to the number of interface standard in the cable.
  • Each RJ45 connector has eight pins and connected to each end of the Ethernet cable.
  • Since it has 8-position, 8-contact (8P8C) modular plug, It is also known as 8P8C connector. Th£se plugs (connector) are then inserted into Ethernet port of the network card.

3. Ethernet card and Port:

  • Ethernet card is a Network Interface Card (NIC) that allows computers to connect and transmit data to the devices on the network. It may be an expansion card or built-in type.
  • Expansion card is a separate circuit board also called as PCI Ethernet card which is inserted into PCI slot on motherboard of a computer.
  • Now a days most of the computers come with built-in Ethernet cards which resides on motherboard.
  • Wireless Ethernet cards are also available, which uses radio waves to transmit data.
  • Ethernet port is an opening which is a part of an Ethernet card. It accepts RJ45 connector with Ethernet cable. It is also called as RJ45 jack. It is found on personal computers, laptops, routers, switches, hubs and modems.
  • In these days, most of the computers and laptops have a built-in Ethernet port for connecting the device to a wired network.

4. Crimping Tool:

  • Crimping is the process of joining two or more pieces of metal or wire by deforming one or both of them to hold each other.
  • A crimping tool is a physical tool which is used to connect the patch wire and the Ethernet connector.
  • The tool will puncture the connector and makes the wire set in the connector.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 5.
Explain the type of Network cables?
Answer:
There are many types of cables available in networking. Here we discuss six different cables.
1. Coaxial Cables:

  • This cable is used to connect the television sets to home antennas and transfer the information in 10 Mbps,
  • It is divided into thinnet and thicknet cables.
  • These cables have a copper wire inside and insulation Is covered on the top of the copper wire to provide protection to the cable.
  • These cables are very difficult to install and maintain because they are too big to carry and replace.
  • The coaxial cable got its name by the word “coax”. Nowadays coaxial cables are also used for dish TV where the setup box and the television is connected using the coaxial cable only.
  • Some of the cable names are Media Bridge 50-feet Coaxial cable, Amazon basics CL2- Rated Coaxial cables, etc.

Twisted Pair Cables:

  • It is type of cable with two or more insulated wires twisted together.
  • It started with the speed of 10 Mbps (10BASE-T cable is used).
  • Then the cable is improved and the speed was higher and went to 100 Mbps and the cable was renamed 100BASE-TX.
  • Then finally the cable improved more made to 10 Gbps and named as 10GBASE-T.
  • This twisted cable has 8 wires which are twisted to ignore electromagnetic interference.
  • Also, the eight wires cannot be placed in a single unit there could be a difficulty in spacious, so it is twisted to make as one wire.
  • There are two types of twisted pair cables, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) and Shielded Twisted pair (STP).
  • The UTP is used nowadays as modern cables for the Internet and they are lower in cost and installation and maintenance is easy compared to the coaxial cables.
  • STP is similar to UTP, but it is covered by an additional jacket to protect the wires from External interference.

Fiber Optics:

  • This cable is different from the other two cables.
  • The other two cables had an insulating material on the outside and the conducting material like copper inside.
  • But in this cable it is of strands of glass and pulse of light is used to send the information.
  • They are mainly used in Wide Area Network (WAN)/The WAN Is a network that extends to the very large distance to connect the computers,

Ethernet Cables:

  • Ethernet cable is the most common type of network cable mainly used for connecting the computers or devices at home or office.
  • This cable connects wired devices within the local area network (LAN) for sharing the resources and accessing the Internet.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

12th Computer Applications Guide Network Cabling Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part A

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
Which year were the co-axial cables invented?
(a) 1880
(b) 1890
(c) 1990
(d) 2000
Answer:
(a) 1880

Question 2.
The latest version of USB is ………………
a) 2.0
b) 4.0
c) 5.0
d) 3.0
Answer:
d) 3.0

Question 3.
Co-axial cables transfer the information in …………………………
(a) 10 kbps
(b) 10 Mbps
(c) 10 GBPS
(d) 10 TBPS
Answer:
(b) 10 Mbps

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 4.
……………….. cable connects wired devices within the local area network for sharing the resources and accessing the Internet.
a) wireless Cable
b) Ethernet cable
c) Coaxial Cable
d) Twisted Wire
Answer:
d) Twisted Wire

Question 5.
Co-axial cables are made up of ……………………..
(a) Steel
(b) Iron
(c) Copper
(d) Aluminium
Answer:
(c) Copper

Question 6.
………….. are used for connecting the television with the setup box.
a) UTP
b) STP
c) Twisted Cable
d) Coaxial cables
Answer:
d) Coaxial cables

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 7.
…………………….. is a type of cable with two or more insulated wires twisted together.
Answer:
Twisted pair cables

Question 8.
The ……………. uses light to transmit the information from one place to another.
a) Fibre cable
b) Network cable
c) optic cable
d) None of these
Answer:
c) optic cable

Question 9.
Assertion (A): 8 wires of the twisted cable are twisted
Reason (R): To ignore electromagnetic interference.
(a) A is true R is the reason
(b) A, R both false
(c) A is false R is true
(d) A is true, R is not the reason
Answer:
(a) A is true R is the reason

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 10.
…………….. are used for long-distance transmission and at a high cost.
a) optic cable
b) Network cable
c) Multimode cable
d) Single-mode cables
Answer:
b) Network cable

Question 11.
STP stands for ………………………
(a) Shielded Turn paper
(b) Shielded Twisted pair
(c) Soft Turn Photo
(d) Short Time processing
Answer:
(b) Shielded Twisted pair

Question 12.
The serial port will send ………….. at one time.
a) 2 bit
b) Null
c) 1 bit
d) 5 bit
Answer:
c) 1 bit

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 13.
Find the wrongly matched pair.
(a) coaxial cables – TV
(b) Twisted pair cables – ATP, UTP
(c) Fiber optic cables – Single-mode, Multimode
Answer:
(b) Twisted pair cables – ATP, UTP

Question 14.
The Null modem Cables are an example of the crossover cables.
a) coaxial
b) crossover cables
c) parallel cables
d) Serial cable
Answer:
b) crossover cables

Question 15.
The ……………. is the basic component of the Local Area Network(LAN)
a) parallel cables
b) Serial cable
c) coaxial
d) Ethernet cable
Answer:
d) Ethernet cable

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 16.
The two types of fiber optic cables are ……………………… and ………………………..
Answer:
Single-mode, Multi-mode

Fill In The Blanks

1. The …………… is a small plastic cup which will be used to connect the wire inside the connector and ready to use to connect the Internet.
Answer:
RJ45 Ethernet connector

2. The ………….. has eight small pins inside to connect eight small wires in the patch cable. The eight cables have eight different colours.
Answer:
RJ45 connector

3. The …………….. is the jack where the Ethernet cable is to be connected.
Answer:
Ethernet port

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

4. …………….. port will be there in both the computers and the LAN port.
Answer:
Ethernet port

5. The …………… is a physical tool which is used to connect the patch wire and the Ethernet connector(RJ45).
Answer:
crimping tool

6. A ……………. is a network interface used for connecting different data equipment and telecommunication devices.
Answer:
Registered Jack (RJ)

7. ……………… jack is mainly used in telephone and landlines.
Answer:
RJ11

8. ……………… cable is used to transfer the information in 10 Mbps.
Answer:
Coaxial

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is the purpose of network cables?
Answer:
The Network cables are used to transfer the data and information to another computer.

Question 2.
What is the use of coaxial cable?
Answer:
Coaxial cables are used for connecting the television with the setup box.

Question 3.
How many wires are there in the twisted cable? Why?
Answer:
Twisted cable has 13 wires which are twisted to ignore electromagnetic interference

Question 4.
What are the two types of twisted pair cables?
Answer:
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) and Shielded Twisted pair (STP).

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 5.
Expand ARPANET.
Answer:
Advanced Research Project Agency Network

Question 6.
What is ARPANET?
Answer:
It is the predecessor of the modern Internet.

Question 7.
What is the use of USB cables?
Answer:
USB cables are used to connect keyboard, mouse, and other peripheral devices

Question 8.
What is the use of parallel cables?
Answer:
The parallel cables are used to connect to the printer and other disk drivers.

Question 9.
What are the two types of fiber-optic cable?
Answer:
Single-mode ((100 Base Bx)) and Multimode ((100 Base SX))

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 10.
How serial port and parallel port differ?
Answer:
It will send 1 bit at one time whereas the parallel port will send 13 bit at one time.

Question 11.
What is the use of serial and parallel interface?
Answer:
The Serial and Parallel interface cables are used to connect the Internet to the system.

Question 12.
What is the purpose of cross-over cable?
Answer:
Cross over cable is used to join two network devices of the same type

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 13.
What is RJ Network?
Answer:
A Registered Jack (RJ) is a network interface

Question 14.
Where is the RJ11 cable used?
Answer:
RJ11 jack is mainly used in telephone and landlines

Question 15.
What is the use of a crimping tool?
Answer:
The crimping tool is used to connect the patch wire and the Ethernet connector.

Question 16.
What is an Ethernet port?
Answer:
The Ethernet port is the jack where the Ethernet cable is to be connected.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 17.
What is an Ethernet cable?
Answer:
The Ethernet cable is the basic component of the Local Area Network

Question 18.
What is the purpose of using Fiber optic cable?
Answer:
Fiber optic cables are used in Wide Area Network (WAN).

Question 19.
What is a dongle?
Answer:
The dongle is a small peripheral device which has compatible with mobile broadband.

Question 20.
How the internet is connected through a dongle?
Answer:
A sim slot in it and connects the Internet and acts as a modem to the computer.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Abbreviation:

  1. ARPANET – Advanced Research Project Agency Network
  2. WWW – World Wide Web
  3. W3C – World Wide Web Consortium
  4. LAN – Local Area Network
  5. WAN – Wide Area Network
  6. UTP – Unshielded Twisted Pair
  7. STP – Shielded Twisted pair
  8. NIC – Network Interface Card
  9. USB – Universal Serial Bus
  10. RJ – Registered Jack
  11. 8P8C – 8-position, 8-contact

Find The Odd One On The Following

l. (a) Media Bridge
(b) 50feet coaxial cable
(c) 10BASE-T
(d) CL2
Answer:
(c) 10BASE-T

2. (a) 100BaseBX
(b) 100BaseSX
(c) WAN
(d) 10 Base T
Answer:
(d) 10 Base T

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

3. (a) Keyboard
(b) Monitor
(c) Mouse
(d) peripheral devices
Answer:
(b) Monitor

4. (a) Smartphones
(b) GPS devices
(c) Digital cameras
(d) Mouse
Answer:
(d) Mouse

5. (a) Speakers
(b) Infra Red
(c) Blue tooth
(d) WiFi
Answer:
(a) Speakers

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

6. (a) RJ45Connector
(b) UTP Cable
(c) coaxial cable
(d) plastic covering
Answer:
(c) coaxial cable

7. (a) USB cable
(b) RJ45 Connector
(c) Ethernet Ports
(d) Crimping Tools
Answer:
(a) USB cable

8. (a) White Green
(b) White Red
(c) White Orange
(d) White brown
Answer:
(b) White Red

9. (a) Cat 5
(b) Cat 6e
(c) Cat 7
(d) Cat 5e
Answer:
(d) Cat 5e

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

10. (a) RJ-11
(b) RJ-21
(c) RJ-08
(d) RJ-45
Answer:
(c) RJ-08

11. (a) Registered Jack
(b) Mobile
(c) 6pin
(d) Landlines
Answer:
(b) Mobile

12. (a) ChampConnector
(b) Amphenol Connector
(c) Wireless Connector
(d) RJ21
Answer:
(c) Wireless Connector

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

13. (a) Champ over
(b) Cross Over
(c) Straight Through
(d) Roll Over
Answer:
(a) Champ over

14. (a) T568A
(b) T568B
(c) Tx, Rx lines
(d) RJ-28
Answer:
(d) RJ-28

15. (a) Twisted pair
(b) UTP
(c) FTP
(d) STP
Answer:
(c) FTP

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Choose The Incorrect Pair:

1. a) Media Bridge 50-feet Coaxial cable, Amazon basicsCL2-Rated Coaxial cables.
b) Unshielded Twisted Pair and Shielded Twisted pair.
c) USB cables and Parallel cables
d) Single-Mode and Multimode
Answer:
c) USB cables and Parallel cables

2. a) Serial and Parallel cables
b) Patch Cable, RJ45 Connector
c) Ethernet Ports, Crimping Tool
d) Coaxial cable, Serial Port
Answer:
d) Coaxial cable, Serial Port

3. a) Ethernet cable and serial cable
b) RJ45 plug, Ethernet connector.
c) Rj45 jack, Ethernet Port
d) RJ45, 802.3
Answer:
a) Ethernet cable and serial cable

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

4. a) RJ-11, RJ-45
b) RJ-45 and RJ47
c) RJ-14 and RJ-61
d) RJ-21, RJ-28
Answer:
b) RJ-45 and RJ47

5. a) USB cables, Peripheral devices
b) Coaxial cables, 10 Mbps
c) Ethernet port, LAN port
d) Parallel port, 100BaseSX
Answer:
d) Parallel port, 100BaseSX

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Match The Following:

Question 1.
A) Tim Berners Lee -1) WAN
B) Coaxial cables – 2) WWW
C) Twisted pair – 3) CL2 Related coaxial
D) Fiber optics cable – 4) STP
a) 1 2 3 4
b) 2 31 4
c) 4 3 2 1
d) 2 3 4 1
Answer:
d) 2 3 4 1

Question 2.
A) Coaxial cables – 10gbps
B) Twisted pair – 100 BASE-BX
C) Fiber optics cable – 100 GBASE-T
D) Ethernet Cable -10 Mbps
a) 1 2 3 4
b) 2 31 4
c) 4 3 2 1
d) 2 3 4 1
Answer:
c) 4 3 2 1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 3.
A) RJ45 connector -1) Crimping Tool
B) Ethernet -2) Small 8 jack inside
C) Expansion card -3) NIC
D) RJ45 Cable -4) Ethernet cable
a) 1234
b) 2 31 4
c) 4 3 2 1
d) 2 3 4 1
Answer:
d) 2 3 4 1

Question 4.
A) Ethernet Technology – RJ45, 802.3
B) RJ45 Connector(male) – RJ45 plug, Ethernet connector, 8P8C connector
C) RJ45 socket (female) – Rj45 jack, Ethernet Port
D) RJ45 Cable – Ethernet cable
a) 1 2 3 4
b) 2 31 4
c) 4 3 2 1
d) 2 3 4 1
Answer:
a) 1 2 3 4

Question 5.
A) RJ11 Jack – Peripheral devices
B) RJ45 Connector – Telephones and landlines
C) USB Cables – Crimping Tool
D) Cross over cable – Null modem Cables
a) 1 2 3 4
b) 2 31 4
c) 4 3 2 1
d) 2 3 4 1
Answer:
b) 2 31 4

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Part B

Short Answers

Question 1.
Write a note on coaxial cables?
Answer:
Coaxial Cables:
This cable was invented in the late 1880s, which is used to connect television sets to home antennas. This cable is used to transfer the information in 10 Mbps.

Question 2.
What is mean by Expansion card?
Answer:

  • The expansion card is a separate circuit board also called PCI.
  • Ethernet card is inserted into a PCI slot on the motherboard of a computer.

Question 3.
Mention the different types of cables used to connect the computer on Network?
Answer:
Computers can be connected on the network with the help of wired media (Unshielded Twisted pair, shielded Twisted pair, Co-axial cables, and Optical fiber) or wireless media (Infra Red, Bluetooth, WiFi)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 4.
List the type of Network cables
Answer:

  1. Coaxial Cables
  2. Twisted Pair Cables
  3. Fiber Optics
  4. USB Cables
  5. Serial and Parallel cables
  6. Ethernet Cables

Question 5.
Give the Pin details of RJ-11?
Answer:
Pin details of the RJ-11, there is 6 pin where the two pins give the transmission configuration, the two pins give the receiver configuration and the other two pins will be kept for reserved. The two-pin will have the positive terminal and the negative terminal.

Question 6.
What are the two types of twisted-pair cables?
Answer:
There are two types of twisted pair cables,

  1. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) and
  2. Shielded Twisted pair (STP).

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 7.
What is the use of UTP?
Answer:

  • The UTP is used nowadays as modern cables for the Internet and they are lower in cost and installation and maintenance is easy compared to the coaxial cables.
  • STP is similar to UTP, but it is covered by an additional jacket to protect the wires from External interference.

Question 8.
Write about Fiber Optics
Answer:

  • Fiber Optics cable is different from the other two cables.
  • The other two cables had an insulating material at the outside and the conducting material like copper inside.
  • But in this cable it is of strands of glass and pulse of light is used to send the information.

Question 9.
What are the two types of fiber optic cables available,
Answer:
There are two types of fiber optic cables available

  1. Single-mode (100BaseBx) another
  2. Multimode (100BaseSX).

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Question 10.
What is the use of a Single-mode Cable?
Answer:
Single-mode cables are used for long-distance transmission and at a high cost.

Question 11.
What is the use of Multi-Mode Cable?
Answer:

  • Multimode cables are used for short-distance transmission at a very low cost.
  • The optic cables are easy to maintain and install.

Question 12.
What is the use of Micro USB?
Answer:
Micro USB is a miniaturized version of the USB used for connecting mobile devices such as smartphones, GPS devices, and digital cameras.

Question 13.
What is the use of cross-over Cable?
Answer:
Cross over cable is used to join two network devices of the same type for example two PCs or two network devices.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Part C

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
Compare UTP and STP?
Answer:
UTP: The UTP is used nowadays as modem cables for the Internet and they are lower in cost and installation and maintenance is easy compared to the coaxial cables.

STP: STP is similar to UTP, but it is covered by an additional jacket to protect the wires from External interference.

Question 2.
How to determine the type of Ethernet Cable?
Answer:

  1. Straight-through: The coloured wires are in the same sequence at both ends of the cable.
  2. Cross-over: The first coloured wire at one end of the cable is the third coloured wire at the other end of the cable.
  3. Poll-over: The coloured wires are in the opposite sequence at either end of the cable.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 13 Network Cabling

Part D

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain the Crimping process to make Ethernet cables?
Answer:
Crimping process for making Ethernet cables

  1. Cut the cable with the desired length
  2. Strip the insulation sheath about 1 inch from both ends of the cable and expose the Twisted pair of wires
  3. After stripping the wire, untwist the smaller wires and arrange them into the proper wiring scheme, T568B preferred generally.
  4. Bring the wires tighter together and cut them down so that they all have the same length ( Vi inch).
  5. Insert all 8 coloured wires into the eight grooves in the connector. The wires should be, inserted until the plastic sheath is also inside the connector.
  6. Use the crimping tool to lock the RJ45 connector on the cable. It should be strong enough to handle manual traction. Now it is ready for data transmission.
  7. Use a cable tester to verify the proper connectivity of the cable, if need.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

12th Computer Applications Guide Introduction to Computer Networks Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
A set of computers connecting together is caiied as ……………..
a) Network
b) Server
c) Hub
d) Node
Answer:
a) Network

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 2.
Computer network devices that originates route and terminate the data were called as
a) Hub
b) Resource
c) Node
d) Cable
Answer:
c) Node

Question 3.
Match the period and methods available on the history of computer networking on the Internet
a) 1950 – X.25 TCP/IP
b) 1966 – SAGE
c) 1976 – WAN
d) 1972 – ARCNET

a) 4321
b) 3421
c) 1234
d) 2341
e) 4123
Answer:
e) 4123

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 4.
Western Electric introduced the first widely used……………… that implemented true
computer control.
a) Packet switch
b) Arpanet
c) Host
d) Telephone switch
Answer:
d) Telephone switch

Question 5.
Wi-Fi is short name for
a) Wireless Fidelity
b) Wired fidelity
c) Wired fiber optic
d) Wireless fiber optic
Answer:
a) Wireless Fidelity

Question 6.
People everywhere can express and publish their ideas and opinions via
a) Tele-medicine
b) blogging
c) Server
d) Node
Answer:
b) blogging

Question 7.
Which one of the following periods, the speed capacity supported towards gigabit on a computer network?
a) SABRE
b) SAGE
c) NEW FIBRE OPTICS
d) ARCNET
Answer:
c) NEW FIBRE OPTICS

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 8.
One among them was challenging to the business people on computer networking
a) Hacking
b) Viruses
c) Both a & b
d) none of this above
Answer:
c) Both a & b

Question 9.
……………. able to predict, manage, and protect the computer network at Internet
a) Artificial intelligence
b) Broadband provider
c) Cloud computing
d) Transceivers
Answer:
a) Artificial intelligence

Question 10.
……………….. use less power compared with single transmitter or satellite often cell towers nearer
a) Mobile devices
b) Transistors
c) WIFI
d) Communication
Answer:
a) Mobile devices

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 11.
People nowadays getting relaxed via
a) Business
b) Corporate company
c) Newspapers
d) Social media
Answer:
d) Social media

Question 12.
Which one of the following is not the social media
a) Gmail
b) Facebook
c) Twitter
d) Linkedin
Answer:
a) Gmail

Question 13.
Facebook was created at ………………………….year
a) 2002
b) 2004
c) 2013
d) 2010
Answer:
b) 2004

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 14.
In a mobile network, land areas for network coverage were distributed as
a) Firmware
b) cells
c) Range
d) Service
Answer:
b) cells

Question 15.
Which one was harmful to the computer
a) Bloggers
b) Browser
c) Hackers
d) Twitter
Answer:
c) Hackers

Question 16.
Which innovation made people use the Internet?
a) Social web
b) Mobile technology
c) Mobile App
d) Both a & b.
Answer:
d) Both a & b.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Define Computer Network.
Answer:

  1. A set of computers connected together for the purpose of sharing resources is called a computer networks.
  2. At present, the Internet is the most common resource shared everywhere.

Question 2.
Define Internet
Answer:
The Internet is a network of global connections – ‘ comprising private, public, business, academic and government networks – linked by guided, wireless and fiber-optic technologies.

Question 3.
What are the common uses of Computer Network?
Answer:
The common uses of computer network are

  1. Communication
  2. Resource sharing
  3. Data (or) software sharing
  4. Money-saving

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 4.
List out some feature of Mobile Network.
Answer:

  • Less consumption of power
  • Huge capacity than a large transmitter, at single frequency
  • Covering large area than a single transmitter

Question 5.
Difference between wired and wireless networks.
Answer:

Wired NetworkWireless Network
A Wired network system connected with network cable.A Wireless network is connecting Devices without cables
Example: speakers, CCTV, printers, outdoors, and scanners, etc., with cables.Example: Tablets(tab), indoor cameras and E-readers, etc., without cables (WiFi).

Part III

Explain in brief answer

Question 1.
Define ARPANET.
Answer:
First In 1969, four nodes of ARPANET were connected between four universities namely the University of California at Los Angeles, at Santa Barbara, the Stanford Research Institute and the university of Utah using the 50 Kbit/s circuits.

Packet-switched networks was the theoretical work to model was performed by Leonard Kleinrock, ARPANET was which underpinned the development of it and his theoretical work on hierarchical routing in late 1970 s with his student Farouk Kamoun remains critical to the operation of the Internet today.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 2.
What is the use of cloud storage and cloud computing?
Answer:
Cloud storage

  • It is just storage of data on online, access in different area no geographical limits was in need.
  • Cloud storage provides users with immediate access to a broad range of resources.

Cloud computing:

  • It is the on demand availability of computer sys-tem resources.
  • Especially data storage and computing power, without direct active management by the user

Question 3.
What is mean by Artificial Intelligence?
Answer:

  1. Artificial intelligence able to be better predict traffic as it collects and analyzes data in real-time,
  2. some of the network managers were better prepared for big events such as the World cup, Olympics, Valentine’s Day, which often put on the Internet under pressure.
  3. Now the networks were monitored by an algorithm that enables for anomalous build-ups of traffic and activity which may be the result of nasty activities such as (DDoS) Distributed Denial-of-Service attacks and attempted hacks.
  4. This Artificial Network powering algorithms will become the most intelligent; it might find faster and reliable methods of anticipating threats and cleaning networks.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 4.
List out some usefulness of Social Network.
Answer:

  • Group information sharing over long distances.
  • Broadcast announcements,
  • Fostering diversity of thought.

Question 5.
How Computer Networks save money saving?
Answer:
Money-saving:
Using computer networking, it’s an important financial aspect for the organization because it saves money. It reduces the paperwork, manpower and saves time.

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Define computer networking and Internet. Explain different developments on computer network and Internet.
Answer:
Computer networking:
Computer networking is a technique of digital telecommunications network one that permits nodes to share its resources.

This computer networking exchanges the data with each other through wired or wireless connections between different terminals called nodes.

Internet
The Internet is a network of global connections – comprising private, public, business, academic and government networks – linked by guided, wireless and fiber-optic technologies.

Computer networks and its development

SnoPeriodMethodHistory
1Late
1950
SAGE (Semi – Automatic Ground Environment)It was used at U.S Military Radar system.
21960SABRE(Semi Automatic Business Research Envi­ronment)At Commercial Airline Reservation system online connected with two main frame computers.
Packet switchingPacket switching was developed by Paul Baran and Donald De­vices
NPL network (National Physical Laboratory ) at united kingdom local area network (LAN) using line speed of 768kbit/s
31963Intergalactic Computer networkThe intergalactic Computer network was sent by J.C.RLicklider
41965Telephone switchAt first widely used Telephone switch was introduced by Western Electric
51966Wide Area Network(WAN)An experimental paper on has been published by Thomas Marill Lawrence G.Roberts published in the area of time sharing
61969­
1970
ARPANETFirst In 1969, four nodes of ARPANET were connected between four universities
71972X.25 TCP/IPUsing X.25 as commercial services were deployed then was using an infrastructure for expanding TCP/IP networks.
81973HostsCYCLADES was the first for making hosts which is responsible for reliable delivery of data
91973­
1979
EthernetA memo at Xerox PARC was written by Robert Metcalfe describing Ethernet in 1973.
Aloha based networking system which was developed in the 1960s
In July 1976 the paper published “Ethernet: Distributed Packet Switching for Local Computer Networks” by Robert Metcalfe and David Boggs.
Collaborated on many patients received in 1977 and 1978.
Robert Metcalfe pursued making on the open standard in 1979.
101976ARCNETARCNET was created by John Murphy of Datapoint corporation in 1976
111995NEW FIBRE OPTIC CA­BLESThe speed capacity of transmission for Ethernet was slightly elevated from 10 Mbit/s to lOOMbit/sat 1995.
Frequently, the highest speeds up to 100 Gbit/s were appended (still 2016).

Question 2.
Explain the growth of computer networking,
Answer:
Growth on the popularity of cloud storage and cloud computing. On behalf of buying physical copies of games, music, and movies, increasingly downloading (or streaming) and buy digital licenses their need via Internet.

3G and 4G:
Developments on mobile network infrastructure- both deployments of 4Gand 3G networks (older) that have allow the people in their developed areas who can allow it to their smart mobile phones as video broadcasting system and as mobile television.

4G LTE
Even though 4G LTE mobile network was not reached by many parts of world, the industry of telecommunication has been hard working on the development of their next generation

5G:

  • It is a cellular communication Technology. This 5G intense to boost up the speed the mobile connections dramatically. Exactly how much customers was in need of this 5G connection and to go.
  • It might be tested on laboratory on by prototype versions of some elements then it may be standard 5G consumers were also interested on the promise of signal coverage with 5G.

Artificial intelligence

  • It will help to maintain, manage, and protect it.
  • It is also able to be a better predict traffic as it collects and analyzes data in real-time, some of network managers were better prepared for big events such as the World cup, Olympics, Valentine’s Day, which often put on the Internet under pressure.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 3.
Mention some uses of the network at business, home, mobile, social applications.
Answer:
(i) Networks in Business:

  1. In the twenty-first century, communications are necessary for successful business operations and technology for business interaction.
  2. Computer networks were faster, the Internet became full strength and wireless communications have been formed the way business performed.
  3. By the usage of latest technologies, such as cloud computing, are being used to allow globally without scarifying security or limiting user access.
  4. Internet conversations happen faster, Quick Decision making saves a lot of time, we all know that “time is money” in business.
  5. Through e-banking we can pay or receive money from or to the customer may be easily done via gateways or by online payments were much easier on this method.
  6. Here any type of business it might large or small scale B2C, B2B, B2G,C2B, C2C, C2G, G2B,G2C, G2G or commercial that transfer of information across the Internet can be done here.

(ii) Networks at Home:
Network at home is a group of devices such as computers, mobile, speakers, cameras, game systems, and printers that connect via the network with each other. Networks at home were connected in two ways they are

  1. Wired network
  2. Wireless network

A Wired network system connected with a network cable. For example speakers, CCTV, printers, outdoors, and scanners etc., with cables.
A Wireless network is connecting devices like tablets(.tab), indoor cameras and E-readers, etc., without cables (WiFi).
Network at home plays the main role to access all such as e-banking, e-leaming, e-governance, e-health, telemedicine, call centers, video conferencing, digitalization of memories, can easy to access and use by avoiding a lot of time and stacked at the queue.
From the home we ordered delicious food from various hotels and restaurants at a time without delay can be bought via the Internet.

(iii) Mobile Networks:
A mobile network is a network connecting devices without cable (wireless). Mobile computers, such as laptops, tablets, and handheld computers, were the fastest-growing segments.

(iv) Social Application:
The very fast and easiest way to cover all the people, who are connected to in social network media. For example WhatsApp, Facebook, Twitter, blogs, Pinterest, Linkedln, classmates, and so on. Through the above social media, we share our thoughts in different formats and the different size of files.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

12th Computer Applications Guide Introduction to Computer Networks Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part A

Choose the correct answers:

Question 1.
……………….. Method was used at the U.S Military Radar system.
a)SABRE
b)ARPANET
c) SAGE
d) Networking
Answer:
c) SAGE

Question 2.
Which one of the following resources cannot be shared?
(a) printer
(b) scanner
(c) speakers
(d) monitor
Answer:
(d) monitor

Question 3.
Packet Switching was invented in the year………………..
a)1964
b) 1958
c)1988
d)1991
Answer:
a)1964

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 4.
……………….. helps in sending and receiving money via payment gateway.
a) e-banking
b) online payment
c) e-governance
d) credit/debit card
Answer:
b) online payment

Question 5.
In networking, nodes are identified by their…………………………….
(a) Protocol
(b) Layer
(c) IP address
(d) TCL address
Answer:
(c) IP address

Question 6.
The initial name of the host is known as ………………..
a) TCP/IP
b) switch
c) nodes
d) CYCLADES
Answer:
d) CYCLADES

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 7.
In 1966……………….. was introduced for time-sharing.
a) WAN
b) MAN
c)LAN
d) Networking
Answer:
a) WAN

Question 8.
Expand SAGE
(a) Semi-Automatic Ground Environment
(b) Self – Auto General Engine
(c) Super – Automatic General Engine
(d) Super – Auto Ground Environment
Answer:
(a) Semi-Automatic Ground Environment

Question 9.
WWW was created in the year ………………..
a) 1965
b) 1993
c)1988
d)1989
Answer:
d)1989

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 10.
Network of network is called ………………..
a) Internet
c) Exnet
b) Intranet
d) Network
Answer:
a) Internet

Abbreviation

1. WWW – World Wide Web
2. IP – Internet protoco!
3. SAGE – Semi Automatic Ground environment
4. SABRE – Semi Automatic Business Research Environment
5. LAN – Locai Area Network
6. NPL – National Physical Laboratory
7. WAN – Wide Area Network
8. ARPANET – Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
9. TCP – Transmission Control Protoco!
10. ARCNET – Attached Resource Computer NETwork
11. LTE – Long Term Evolution
12. DDos – Distributed Denial of Service attacks.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Very short answers

Question 1.
What is the use of Packet switching?
Answer:
It used to transfer the information between computers and network,

Question 2.
Who use SAGE first? When?
Answer:
U.S Military Radar system used SAGE (Semi – Automatic Ground Environment) at late 1950

Question 3.
What do you mean by hosting?
Answer:
The service provider that leases this infrastructure, which is known as hosting.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 4.
What Is a Telephone switch?
Answer:
It is the first widely used to implemented true computer control.

Assertion and reason

Question 1.
Assertion (A): A set of computers connected together for the purpose of sharing resources is called as computer networks
Reason(R): Multimedia means that multiple forms of media are combined to gather and provide services
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Question 2.
Assertion (A): Networks of the network is called the Internet.
Reason(R): Computer which is connected to a network called as Intranet
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 3.
Assertion (A): The data that originates and terminates at these particular nodes is called a source and destination.
Reason(R): Connecting more than one device is called a network.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 4.
Assertion (A): Packet switching was developed by Paul Baranand Donald Devices to transfer the information between computers and network.
Reason(R): NPL network (National Physical Laboratory) at UK local area network
(LAN) using line speed of 1068kbit/s was implemented by Nicholas Dech.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 5.
Assertion (A): INTERNET Stands for INTERnational NETwork (Technology, telecom, intelligence)
Reason(R): INTERNET Stands for INTER connected computer NETwork (Science, space and environment)
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 6.
Assertion (A): Mobile network is the network connecting devices without cable (wireless).
Reason(R): Mobile computers, such as laptop, tablet, and handheld computers, were the fastest-growing segments.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 7.
Assertion (A): 5G intense to boost up the speed of the mobile connections dramatically.
Reason(R): Artificial Network power algorithms will become most intelligent;
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Question 8.
Assertion (A): Covering a large area than a single transmitter, we can add more towers indefinitely and cannot be limited by any horizon limits.
Reason(R): Digital intelligence will help to maintain, manage, and protect it.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 9.
Assertion (A): computer networks were faster, the Internet became full strength and wireless communications has been transformed the way business performed.
Reason(R): The usage of latest technologies, such as cloud computing, are being used to allow globally without scarifying security or limiting user access.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 10.
Assertion (A): Resource sharing means one device accessed by many systems.
Reason(R); Resource sharing is sharing such as printers, scanner, PDA, fax machine, and modems
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Find the odd one on the following

1. (a) File server
(b) Web camera
(c) Speakers
(d) Websites
Answer:
(d) Websites

2. (a) WWW
(b) Digital Audio
(c) URL
(d) Digital Video
Answer:
(c) URL

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

3. (a) Mouse
(b) Storage Servers
(c) Applications
(d) Softwares
Answer:
(a) Mouse

4. (a) Source
(b) Destination
(c) Node
(d) WWW
Answer:
(d) WWW

5. (a) servers
(b) Mobile Phones
(c) Tabs
(d) Monitors
Answer:
(d) Monitors

6. (a) SAGE
(b) ARCNET
(c) ARPANET
(d) URL
Answer:
(c) ARPANET

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

7. (a) JohnMurphy
(b) PaulBoran
(c) James Gostling
(d) Leonard kliemock
Answer:
(c) James Gostling

8. (a) Technology
(b) Electronic
(c) Telecom
(d) Intelligence
Answer:
(b) Electronic

9. (a) Flipkart
(b) Amazon
(c) IOB
(d) E-bay
Answer:
(c) IOB

10. (a) YAHOO
(b) BING
(c) GOOGLE
(d) E-Banking
Answer:
(d) E-Banking

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

11. (a) Whatsapp
(b) Gmail
(c) Facebook
(d) Twitter
Answer:
(b) Gmail

12. (a) lG:2.4kb/s
(b) 2G:64kb/s
(c) 4G :100mb/s
(d) 3G:lMb/s
Answer:
(d) 3G:lMb/s

13. (a) SMS
(b) MMS
(c) video conferencing
(d) Farm ware
Answer:
(d) Farm ware

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

14. (a) printer
(b) Scanner
(c) Fax Machine
(d) Networking
Answer:
(d) Networking

15. (a) G2A
(b) B2C
(c) B2G
(d) G2G
Answer:
(a) G2A

16. (a) Speakers
(b) CCTV
(c) Scanner
(d) E-Readers
Answer:
(d) E-Readers

17. (a) Indoor Cameras
(b) Tablets
(c) Wi-fi
(d) printers
Answer:
(d) printers

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

18. (a) SAGE: 1950
(b) SABRE: 1960
(c) TCP/IP: 1975
(d) E-Readers
Answer:
(c) TCP/IP: 1975

19. (a) Hosts
(b) Ethernet
(c) F-Cables
(d) Modems
Answer:
(d) Modems

20. (a) Communication
(b) Money Saving
(c)-Learning
(d) Software Sharing
Answer:
(c)-Learning

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Matching the following

Question 1.
SABRE – 1995
Fibre Optic cables – 1960
Hosts – 1965
Telephone Switch -. 1973
a) 1234
b) 2341
c) 2143
d) 3124
Answer:
c) 2143

Question 2.
Resource Sharing – paper Work
Communication – Software
Money-Saving – PDA
Data Sharing – Groupware
a) 2341
b) 3412
c) 4312
d) 4321
Answer:
b) 3412

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 3.
Amazon – Social Media
Blog – Online Shopping
Gmail – Mobile Networks
3G/4G – E-mail
a) 1234
b) 2341
c) 2143
d) 3124
Answer:
c) 2143

Question 4.
Wired Network System – Bank Account
Wireless Network system – HandHeldComputres
Mobile Networks – indoor Cameras
Private Networks – CCTV
a) 1234
b) 4321
c) 2143
d) 3124
Answer:
b) 4321

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 5.
Cloud storage -Internet Computing
Cloud computing – Access in different Area
Flame Ware – abusive Messages
Hackers – skilled experts
a) 1234
b)4321
c) 2143
d) 2134
Answer:
a) 1234

Important years to remember:

1950U.S Military Radar system used SAGE in late 1950
1960SABRE for Commercial Airline Reservation system online connected with two mainframe computers.
1965Telephone switch at first widely used telephone switch was introduced by Western Electric
1966WAN (WIDE AREA NETWORK)was introduced for time-sharing.
1969­

1970

ARPANET was which underpinned the development
1973TCP/IP Using X.25 as commercial services were deployed
1995Speed capacity of transmission of the Ethernet technology was slightly increased from 10 Mbit/s to 100Mbit.
1998Ethernet supported transmission speed capacity towards gigabit.
2004Facebook was created

Part B

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the disadvantages of the Internet?
Answer:
Disadvantages of the Internet:

  1. Simply wasting precious time on the Internet by surfing, searching for unwanted things.
  2. A lot of unnecessary information is also there, why because anyone can post anything on their webpage, blogs.
  3. Hackers and viruses can easily theft our more valuable information available on the Internet. There a lot of security issues are there in E-banking.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 2.
What is a node?
Answer:
The computer is connected to a network called nodes. The data that originates and terminates at these particular nodes is called a source and destination.

Question 3.
What is the use of E-Governance?
Answer:
E-Governance made it easier to collect their certificates online, in the early days a person spends more time collecting the certificates and he has to directly many more difficulties. To avoid this bribery at office e-governance via the Internet let a new path on all for the ordinary man.

Question 4.
Write a note on Software or data sharing?
Answer:

  1. Using a computer network, application or other software will be stored at a central computer or server.
  2. We can share one software from one to another. It provides a high reliable source of data.
  3. For example, all files can not be taken a backup or duplicate on more than one computer.
  4. So if one is not unavailable due to hardware failure or any other reason, the copies can be used.

Question 5.
What is Virus?
Answer:
Malware threats or computer warms that replicates it On its own is called a virus.

Question 6.
What are the innovations changed people lifestyle to use the Internet?
Answer:
Mobile Technology and Social Web are the two innovations have been changed the people lifestyle to use the Internet.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 7.
List some social media applications used on the Internet.
Answer:
WhatsApp, Facebook, Twitter, blogs, Pinterest, Linkedln, classmates.

Question 8.
What is the use of packet switching?
Answer:
Packet switching is used to transfer the information between computers and network

Question 9.
What are the two types of Networks at home?
Answer:
Networks at home were connected in two ways they are

  1. Wired network
  2. Wireless network

Question 10.
Define Flame Wars.
Answer:
Flame wars are nothing a lengthy exchange of angry or abusive messages between users of an online forum or another discussion area.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 11.
Who are Hackers?
Answer:
Hackers were skilled computer experts, some who with their technical knowledge access our accounts.

Question 12.
Define E-Readers.
Answer:
E-Readers is similarly called an e-book reader these were designed for the purpose of reading via mobile electronic device to read digital e-books and periodically.

Question 13.
What is the various Generation of Mobile Networks with their coverage?
Answer:
1G – 2.4 Kb/s
2G – 64 Kb/s
3G – 2 Mb/s
4G – lOOMb/s
5G – More than 1 Gb/s

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 14.
What is mean by Mobile Networks?
Answer:
A mobile network is a network connecting devices without cable (wireless). Mobile computers, such as laptops, tablets, and handheld computers, were the fastest-growing segments.

Part C

Explain in brief answer

Question 1.
Define Computer networking.
Answer:

  • Computer networking is a technique of digital telecommunications network one that permits nodes to share their resources from one to another.
  • This computer networking exchanges the data as the main element.
  • These links were transferred over cable media like optic cables or wire or wireless media such as Bluetooth and WIFI.

Question 2.
Write a short note on E-Banking?
Answer:

  • E-Banking plays an important role in our day-to-day life, via Internet it can be accessed anytime, anywhere 24/7.
  • The speed and efficiency were very much better than that of done by the counter at the bank.
  • Now a day’s online payments were done via the Internet to avoid standing in the queue at the office to paybiils with very low transaction fees.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 3.
What are the disadvantages of Using the Internet?
Answer:

  • Simply wasting precious time on the Internet by surfing, searching for unwanted things.
  • A lot of unnecessary’ information is also there, why because anyone can post anything on their webpage, blogs.
  • Hackers and viruses can easily theft our more valuable information available on the Internet, There a lot of security issues are there in E-banking.

Question 4.
How computer Networks helps in communication?
Answer:

  • Using computer networks, we can interact with different people from each other all over the world.
  • It provides powerful communication among widely separated employees, team, sections.
  • They can easily communicate at a very low cost via mobile, social media, telephone, e-mail, chatting, video telephone, video conferencing, SMS, MMS, groupware, etc…

Question 5.
What is Resource Sharing?
Answer:

  • Resource sharing means one device accessed by many systems.
  • It allows all kind of programs, equipment’s and available data to anyone via network to irrespective of the physical location of the resource of them.
  • Simply resource sharing is sharing such as printers, scanner, PDA, fax machine, and modems. For example, many computers can access one printer if it is in networks.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 6.
What is Data sharing?
Answer:

  • Using a computer network, application or other software will be stored at a central computer or server and share one software from one to another is called Data Sharing.
  • For example; All files cannot be taken a backup or duplicate on more than one computer. So if one is not unavailable due to hardware failure or any other reason, the copies can be used.

Part D 

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain how Social Networks are useful to Individuals and the community?
Answer:
The usefulness of Social Networks:
Besides being a fun place to meet and relax with people, social networking leads us some extremely useful benefits to their individuals and communities:

1. Group information sharing over long distances:
Although friends and family members can keep in contact via mobile phone calls or by text messages, social nets suggest a much richer environment for staying connected.

Too many scenarios such as sharing photo albums videos or convey their wishes someone, work better these networks because an entire group can participate together with one. Overall, group discussions became more convenient as not everyone needs to be online at the exact same moment to post comments.

2. Broadcast announcements:

  1. Cities can more comfortable to spread word of emergencies and natural calamities.
  2. Venues and local shops can advertise upcoming events on social networks.
  3. Businesses able market their products to customers (and retrieve some direct feedback).

3. Fostering diversity of thought:

  1. Some critics of social networks point out that online communities attract people by similar interests and backgrounds.
  2. Indeed, when the people with different opinions do get together on online, many discussions seem to degenerate into personal attacks and so-called “flame wars.”
  3. It can be argued, by online debates are healthy in the long run.
  4. Although individuals may begin with more extreme views, over time their thinking gets influenced may begin with more extreme views, over time their thinking gets influenced by the comments of others at least to some extent.
  5. For people who stuck with a busy schedule can have some relaxation and known current affairs, news via these social networks can easier to wish someone and keep in touch their follower, loveable person.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 10 Introduction to Computer Networks

Question 2.
Write in detail about The Internet Explosion.
Answer:
The Internet Explosion

  • Internet is simply defined as the Worldwide Web connection of individual networks operated by academic, industry, government, and private parties.
  • The Internet served to interconnect with laboratories engaged in government research, and from 1994 it is expanded to serve millions of users and multiple purposes in all parts of this universe.
  • In few years, the Internet built itself as a highly powerful platform that changed their way we do business and the way we communicate. The Internet promotes as the universal source of information for billions of people, at work, at home, at school. The Internet gave high communication medium, has given an international, “Globalised” at all dimension of the world.
  • Internet is growing all the time. By two things, have marked its evolution nowadays the mobile technology and the social web. These two innovations have been changed people’s lifestyles to use the Internet. We may find many communities on the social web. Facebook was created in 2004 but gowned into the worldwide networks all over more than 2,230 million active users.
  • Mobile technology on hand made it possible to great reach the Internet and increase the Internet user all over the world.
  • The Internet allows all to be democratic in mass media. Anyone can have a webpage in
  • Internet with very low investment. Similarly, any business can reach a very large market directly, economically, and fast, no matter of location or size of their business. Almost anyone who can read and write can have access and a presence in the World Wide Web with very low investment. People everywhere can express and publish their ideas and opinions via blogging.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

12th Computer Applications Guide Connecting PHP and MYSQL Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
Which one of the following statements
instantiates the mysqil class?
a)mysqli = new mysqli()
b) $mysqli = new mysqli()
c) $mysqfl->new.mysq!i()
d) mysqli->new.mysqli()
Answer:
b) $mysqli = new mysqli()

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 2.
Which one is correct way, we can retrieve the data in the result set of MySQL using PHP?
a) mysql_fetch_row.
b) mysql_fetch_array
c) mysql_fetch_object
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 3.
How Can we Create a Database Using PHP and MySQL?
a) mysqli_create_db(“Database Name”)
b) mysqli_create_ db(” Data”)
c) create_db(“Database Name”)
d) create_db(“Data”)
Answer:
a) mysqli_create_db(“Database Name”)

Question 4.
Which is the correct function to execute the SQL queries in PHP ?
a) mysqli_query(“Connection Object’/’SQL Query”)
b) query(“Connection Object”,”SQL Query”)
c) mysql_query(”Connection Object”,”SQL Query”)
d) mysql_query(“SQL Query”)
Answer:
a) mysqli_query(“Connection Object’/’SQL Query”)

Question 5.
Which is the correct function Closing Connection in PHP ?
a) mysqli_close(“Connection Object”);
b) close(“Connection Object”);
c) mysql_close(“Connection Object”);
d) mysqli_close(“Database Object”);
Answer:
c) mysql_close(“Connection Object”);

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 6.
Which is the correct function to establish Connection in PHP ?
a) mysqli_connect(“Server Name “,” ‘User Name “,”- Password “,” DB Name”);
b) connect(“‘Server Name “,” User Name”,”Pass-word”,”DB Name”);
c) mysql_connect(“Server Name “,” User Name “,” Password “,” DB Name”);
d) mysqli_connect (“Database Object'”‘);
Answer:
c) mysql_connect(“Server Name “,” User Name “,” Password “,” DB Name”);

Question 7.
Which is the not a correct MySQL Function in PHP ?
a) Mysqli_connect() Function
b) Mysqli_close() Function
c) mysqli_select_data() Function
d) mysqli_affected_rows() Function
Answer:
c) mysqli_select_data() Function

Question 8.
How many parameter are required for MYSQLi connect function in PHP ?
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
c) 4

Question 9.
How many parameter are required for MYSQLI query function in PHP ?
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
a) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 10.
How many parameter are required for MYSQLI Close function in PHP ?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 5
Answer:
a) 1

Question 11.
Which version of PHP supports MySQLi fuctions?
a) Version 2.0
b) Version 3.0
c) Version 4.0
d) Version 5.0
Answer:
d) Version 5.0

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the MySQLi function available PHP?
Answer:

  1. Mysqli_connect( ) Function
  2. Mysqli_close( ) Function
  3. mysqli_select_db( ) Function
  4. mysqli_affected_rows( ) Function
  5. mysqli_connect_error( ) Function
  6. mysqlifetchassoc( ) Function

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 2.
What is the MySQLi function?
Answer:

  • MySQLi is an extension in PHP scripting language which gives access to the MYSQL database.
  • MySQLi extension was Introduced in version 5.0.0.

Question 3.
What are the types MySQLi function available PHP?
Answer:
Types of MySQL Functions in PHP:

  1. Database connections
  2. Managing Database connections
  3. Performing Queries
  4. Closing connection

Question 4.
Difference between the Connection and Close function?
Answer:

Connection functionClose function
This function is used to connect the Database Server machine via PHP scripting languageThis function is used to close an existing opened database connection between PHP scripting and MySQL Database Server.
This function requires four parameters to con­nect to the database server.This function requires only one parameter to connect to the database server.

Question 5.
Give few examples of MySQLi Queries.
Answer:

  • mysqli_query($con “SELECT FROM Persons”);
  • mysqli_query($con,’INSERT INTO Persons
    (FirstName,LastName,Age)      VALUES
    OGIenn’,’Quagmire’,33)”);

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 6.
What is the connection string?
Answer:
The variables are used to connect to the database server. They are

  1. $servername → Database Server IP address
  2. $usemame → Database Server User Name
  3. $password → Database Server Password
  4. $DB_Name → Database Name

The mysqli connect function uses these variables and connect Database server from PHP scripting. If the connection gets fail, output will be printed with MySQL error code. Otherwise, the connection is a success.

Question 7.
What is a web Database?
Answer:

  • A Web database is a database application de¬signed to be managed and accessed through the Internet.
  • In other words, the light databases that support the web applications are also known as Web Databases.

Question 8.
What is mysqli_fetch_assoc() Function?
Answer:
mysqli_fetch_assoc( );
Fetches a result row as an associative array.
Syntax:
mysqli_fetch_assoc(result);

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 9.
Define mysqli_connect_error() Function.
Answer:
The mysqli_connect_error() function returns the error description from the last connection error, if any.

Syntax
mysqli_connect_error();

Question 10.
Define mysqIi_affected_rows() Function.
Answer:
my sqli_affected_rows( ):
mysqli_affected_rows( ) returns the number of affected rows in the previous MYSQL operation.

Syntax:
mysqli_affected_rows(connection)

Part III

Explain in brief answers

Question 1.
Write the Syntax for MySQLi Queries.
Answer:
Syntax:
mysqli_query(“Connection Object”,”SQL Query”)

ParameterDescription
connectionRequired. Specifies the MySQL connection to use
queryRequired. Specifies the query string
resultmodeOptional. A constant. Either: MYSQLI_USE_RESULT (Use this if we have to retrieve large amount of data)
MYSQLI_STORE_RESULT (This is default)

Question 2.
Write is the purpose of MySQLi function available.
Answer:

  • MySQLi is extension in PHP scripting language which gives access to the MYSQL database.
  • The mysqli functions are designed to communicate with MySQL
  • The mysqli_query() function performs a query against the database.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 3.
Differentiate mysq I i_jaffected_ rows()
Function and mysqli_fetch_assoc() Function.
Answer:

mysqli_affected_ rows()mysqli_fetch_assoc()
It returns the number of affected rows in the pre­vious SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, REPLACE, or DELETE query.It fetches a result row as an associative ar­ray.
Specifies the MySQL connection to useSpecifies a result set identifier returned by mysqli_queryO, mysq-li_store_result()      or mysqli_use_result()
Syntax:
mysqli_affected_rows (connection);
Syntax:
mysqli_fetch_as-soc(result);

Question 4.
Write MySQL Connection Syntax with example.
Answer:
Syntax:
mysqli_eonnect(“Server Name”, “User Name”, “password”, “DB Name”);
Example:
<?php
Sservername = “localhost”;
Susername = “username”;
Spassword = “password”;
$DB_name = “SchooLDB”;
// Create connection
$conn = mysqli_connect($servemame, Susername, Spassword,$DB_name);

Question 5.
Write a note PHP MySQL database connection.
Answer:

  • The combination of PHP and MySQL has become very popular server-side web scripting language in the Internet.
  • MySQL and PHP scripting language connectivity, which covers Database connection establishment, Database Selection, SQL statement execution, and Connection termination.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Discuss in detail MySQL functions for example.
Answer:

  • In PHP Scripting language many functions are available for MySQL Database connectivity and executing SQL queries.
  • MySQLi is extension in PHP scripting language which gives access to the MYSQL database.
  • MySQLi extension was introduced version 5.0.0.
  • Some of the MySQL functions are following
  • MySQL COUNT Function The MySQL COUNT aggregate function is used to count the number of rows in a database table.
    Example: mysql>SELECT COUNT(*) FROM employee_tbl;
  • MySQL MAX Function The MySQL MAX aggregate function allows us to select the highest (maximum) value for a certain column.
    Example: mysql > SELECT MAX(daily_typing_ pages)-> FROM employee_tbl;
  • MySQL MIN Function The MySQL MIN aggregate . function allows us to select the lowest (minimum)
    value for a certain column.
    Example: MySQL > SELECT MIN(daily_typing_ pages)-> FROM employee_tbl;
  • MySQL AVG Function The MySQL AVG aggregate function selects the average value for certain table column.
    Example: MySQL > SELECT AVG(daily_typing_ pages)-> FROM employee_tbl;
  • MySQL SUM Function The MySQL SUM aggregate function allows selecting the total for a numeric column.
    Example: mysql> SELECT SUM(daily_typing_ pages)-> FROM employee_tbl;

Question 2.
Explain the Database error handling and management process in PHP?
Answer:

  • When an error occurs, depending on your config- j □ration settings, PHP displays the error message in the web browser with information relating to the error that occurred.
  • PHP offers a number of ways to handle errors.
  • We are going to look at three commonly used methods;

Die statements;

  • • The die function combines the echo and exit function in one.
  • • It is very useful when we want to output a message and stop the script execution when | an error occurs.

Custom error handlers: These are user-defined functions that are called whenever an error occurs.

PHP error reporting:

  • The error message depending on your PHP error reporting settings.
  • This method is very useful in development: environment when you have no idea what; caused the error.
  • The information displayed can help you debug your application

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 3.
Explain in details types of MySQL connection method in PHP.
Answer:
Open a Connection to MySQL
There are several methods for connecting to a MySQL database using PHP:

  • MySQL Improved (mysqli) extension
  • PDO (PHP Data Objects)
  • Legacy MySQL (mysql_) functions
  • Connecting to a remote MySQL database using PHP

Connecting to MySQL using the MySQL Improved extension
The MySQL Improved extension uses the mysqli class, which replaces the set of legacy MySQL functions.

Connecting to MySQL using PDO (PHP Data Objects)

  • The MySQL Improved extension can only be used with MySQL databases.
  • PDO, on the other hand, abstracts database access and enables you to create code that can handle different types of databases.

Connecting to MySQL using the legacy MySQL functions

  • The original PHP MySQL functions (whose names begin with mysql_) are deprecated in PHP 5.5, and will eventually be removed from PHP.
  • Therefore, you should only use these functions when absolutely necessary for backward compatibility.
  • If possible, use the MySQL Improved extension or PDO instead.

Connecting to a remote MySQL database using PHP

  • The previous examples all assume that the PHP script runs on the same server where the MySQL database is located.
  • But what if you want to use PHP to connect to a MySQL database from a remote location.
  • For example, you may want to connect to your A2 Hosting database from a home computer or from another web server.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 4.
Explain MySQLi Queries with examples.
Answer:
Performing Queries:
The main goal of MySQL and PHP connectivity is to retrieve and manipulate the data from MySQL database server. The SQL query statements are helping with PHP MySQL extension ^to achieve the objective of MySQL and PHP connection. “mysqli_query” is a function, helps to execute the SQL query statements in PHP scripting language.

Syntax:
mysqli_query(“Connection Object” “SQL Query”)
Example:
$con=mysqli_connect(“localhost”,“my_user”,“my_password”,“Student_DB”); $sql=“SELECT student_name,student_age FROM student”;mysqli_query($con,$sql);

Closing Connection:
mysqli_close( ) Function is used to close an existing opened database connection between. PHP scripting and MySQL Database Server.

Syntax:
mysqli_close(“Connection Object”);
<?php
$con=mysqli_connect(“localhost”,“$user”,“$password”,“SCHOOLDB”);
// ….some PHP code… mysqli_close($con);
?>

Example of PHP and MySQL Program:
<?php .
$servemame = “localhost”;
$usemame = “username”;
$password = “password”;
$dbname = “schoolDB”;
$connection = mysqli_connect(“$servemame”, “$usemame”, “$password” “$dbname”);
if (mysqli_connect_error ( ))
{
echo “Failed to connect to MySQL:”
mysqli_connect_error( );
}
sql stmt = “SELECT * FROM mycontacts”; //SQL select query
$result = mysqli_query($connection,$sql_stmt);//execute SQL statement$rows =
mysqli__num_r°ws($result);// get number of rows returned
if($rows) {
while ($row = mysqli_fetch_array($result)) {
echo ‘ID:’. $row[‘id’]. ‘<br>’;

12th Computer Applications Guide Connecting PHP and MYSQL Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part A

Choose the correct answers:

Question 1.
The combination of PHP and MYSQL has become very popular …………………………. web scripting language on the internet.
Answer:
Server-side

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 2.
Which of the following is not an RDBMS?
a) Oracle
b) IBM DB2
c) Microsoft SQLSERVER
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Question 3.
Which is used to convert PHP code into C++?
(a) LPLP
(b) HPHP
(c) BPBP
(d) APAP
Answer:
(b) HPHP

Question 4.
…………… is a function, helps to execute the SQL query statements in PHP scripting language.
a) mysqli_close()
b) mysqli_connect_error()
c) mysqli_query()
d) mysqli_connect()
Answer:
c) mysqli_query()

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 5.
Which of the following has written an alternative version of PHP?
(a) Facebook
(b) Twitter
(c) Instagram
(d) Whatsapp
Answer:
(a) Facebook

Fill in the blanks:

1. RDMS stands ……………….
Answer:
Relational Database Management System

2. SQL stands ……………….
Answer:
Structure query language

3. MySQLi extension was introduced version……………….
Answer:
5.0.0

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

4. ……………….is an extension in PHP scripting language which gives access to the MYSQL database.
Answer:
MySQLi

5. Connect function requires ………………. a number of parameters to connect to database server.
Answer:
four

Choose the incorrect statements:

1. a) PHP is an Open source & Community support scripting language
b) PHP is a server-side scripting language designed for Web development.
c) Only twenty Percentage of Website has been built by PHP and MySQL
d) Data is important to all computer and Internet-related applications.
Answer:
c) Only twenty Percentage of Website has been built by PHP and MySQL

2. a) mysqli_connect() function requires two parameters to connect to the database server.
b) Major of the web servers can support PHP scripting language
c) PHP can embed easily with HTML and client-side scripting language
d) PHP has a built-in function which is easily connected to the MySQL database
Answer:
a) mysqli_connect() function requires two parameters to connect to database server.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

3. a) PHP scripting language has been supported by many Software frameworks
b) MySQLi is extension in HTML.
c) MySQLi gives access to the MYSQL database.
d) MySQLi extension was introduced in version 5.0.0.
Answer:
b) MySQLi is extension in HTML.

4. a) mysqli_connect() function is used to connect to
database server
b) If the connection gets fails, the output will be printed with MySQL error code.
c) If the connection gets true, there is no output to display.
d) The main goal of HTML and PHP connectivity is to retrieve and manipulate the data
Answer:
c) If the connection gets true, there is no output to display.

5. a) The SQL query statements are helping with PHP
MySQL extension
b) mysqli_connect() function, helps to execute the SQL query statements in PHP scripting language
c) MySQL is an open-source relational database management system.
d) mysqli_close() function requires two parameters to close an existing opened database connection
Answer:
d) mysqli_close() function requires two parameters to close an existing opened database connection

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Short Answers

Question 1.
Mention Some RDBMS Softwares?
Answer:
Relational Database Management System (RDMS) softwares are MySQL, Oracle, IBM DB2, and Microsoft SQLSERVER etc.

Question 2.
What is MySQLi?
Answer:
MySQLi is an extension in PHP scripting language which gives access to the MYSQL database.

Question 3.
What are the major operations of the database?
Answer:
INSERT, SELECT, UPDATE and DELETE

Question 4.
How many parameters to connect to the database server in Mysqli_connect() Function?
Answer:
This function requires four parameters to connect to database server

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 5.
What is the mash goal of MySQL and PHP connectivity?
Answer:
To retrieve and manipulate the data from the MySQL database server.

Find the odd one on the following

Question 1.
a) MySQL
b) Java
c) DB2
d) Oracle
Answer:
b) Java

Question 2.
a) TRUNCATE
c) UPDATE
b) SELECT
d) INSERT
Answer:
a) TRUNCATE

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 3.
a) $servername
b) $client name
c) $username
d) $password
Answer:
c) $username

Question 4.
a) Mysqli_connect() Function
b) Mysqli_close() Function
c) Mysqli_create_db() Function
d) Mysqli_select_db() Function
Answer:
c) Mysqli_create_db() Function

Question 5.
a) MysqlLaffected_rows() Function
b) Mysqli_connect_error() Function
c) Mysqli_fetch_assoc() Function
d) Mysqli_delete_db() Function
Answer:
d) Mysqli_delete_db() Function

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Match the following

Question 1.
A) DB2 – 1) Connect database server
B) INSERT – 2) RDBMS
C) Mysqli_close() Function – 3) One of the major operation
D) Mysqli_connect() Function – 4) Close an existing opened database
a) 1 2 3 4
b) 4 3 2 1
c) 2 3 4 1
d) 2 4 3 1
Answer:
c) 2 3 4 1

Question 2.
A) DB2 -1) Open source
B) SQLSERVER – 2) IBM
C) MySQL – 3) Microsoft
D) Oracle – 4) Oracle Corporation
a) 2 3 1 4
b) 4 3 2 1
c) 2 3 4 1
d) 2 4 3 1
Answer:
a) 2 3 1 4

Question 3.
A) Mysqli_close() Function -1) Four parameters
B) Mysqli_connect() Function -2) Two parameters
C) mysqli_queryO Function -3) No parameters
D) mysqli_connect_errno() -4) One Parameter
a) 2 3 1 4
b) 4 3 2 1
c) 2 3 4 1
d) 4 1 2 3
Answer:
d) 4 1 2 3

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 4.
A) Mysqli_close() Function -1) Fetches a result row
B) Mysqli_connect() Function -2) To execute the SQL query
C) mysqli_query() Function -3) To connect to database server
D) mysqli_fetch_assoc() -4) To close an existing opened database
a) 2 3 1 4
b) 4 3 2 1
c) 2 3 4 1
d) 4 1 2 3
Answer:
b) 4 3 2 1

Question 5.
A) mysqli_affected_rows()Returns the number of affected rows
B) mysqli_connect_error() – Returns the error description
C) MySQL MAX Function – Select the highest value for a certain column.
D) MySQL MIN Function- – Select the lowest value for a certain column.
a) 2 3 1 4
b) 1 2 3 4
c) 2 3 4 1
d) 4 1 2 3
Answer:
b) 1 2 3 4

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

SYNTAX:

1. Closing Connection:
mysqli_close(“Connection Object”);

2. Performing Queries
mysqli_query(“Connection Object”,”SQL Query”)

3. Database Connections:
mysqli_connect(“Server Name Password””DB Name”);

Part B

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is MySQL?
Answer:

  • MySQL is the most popular Open Source Relational SQL Database Management System.
  • MySQL is one of the best RDBMS being used for developing various web-based software, applications.

Question 2.
Write a Snippet code to check database connection?
Answer:
// Check connection
if(!$conn){
die(“Connection failed: “ . mysqli_connect_error( ));
}
echo “Connected successfully”;
?>

Question 3.
What is the use of SQL statements in PHP?
Answer:
The SQL query statements are helping with PHP MySQL extension to achieve the objective of MySQL and PHP connection.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 9 Connecting PHP and MYSQL

Question 4.
How the connection will get success in the mysqli_connect() function?
Answer:

  • The MySQL connect function uses these variables and connects the Database server from PHP scripting.
  • If the connection gets fail, the output will be printed with MySQL error code. Otherwise, the connection is a success.

Part C

Brief Answers

Question 1.
Write any 3 special features of PHP?
Answer:

  1. PHP can embed easily with HTML and client-side scripting language
  2. PHP has a built-in function that is easily connected to the MySQL database
  3. PHP scripting language has been supported by many Software frameworks

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

12th Computer Applications Guide Open Source Concepts Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
If the source code of a software is freely accessible by the public, then it is known as
a) freeware
b) Firmware
c) Open source
d) Public source
Answer:
c) Open source

Question 2.
Which of the following is a software pro¬gram that replicates the functioning of a computer network?
a) Network software
b) Network simulation
c) Network testing
d) Network calculator
Answer:
b) Network simulation

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 3.
Which of the following can document every incident that happened in the simulation and are used for examination?
a) Net Exam
b) Network hardware
c) Trace file
d) Net document
Answer:
c) Trace file

Question 4.
Which is an example of network simulator?
a) simulator
b) TCL
c) Ns2
d) C++
Answer:
c) Ns2

Question 5.
Fill in the blanks: NS2 comprises of key languages?
a) 13
b) 3
c) 2
d) 4
Answer:
c) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 6.
Choose the Correct Pair from the following to build NS2
a) UNIX & TCL
b) UNIX & C++
c) C++ & OTCL
d) C++ & NS2
Answer:
c) C++ & OTCL

Question 7.
Which of the following is not a network simulation software?
a) Ns2
b) OPNET
c) SSFNet
d) C++
Answer:
a) Ns2

Question 8.
Which of the following is a open source network monitoring software?
a) C++
b) OPNET
c) Open NMS
d) OMNet++
Answer:
c) Open NMS

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 9.
Open NMS was released in
a) 1999
b) 2000
c) 2003
d) 2004
Answer:
d) 2004

Question 10.
OpenNMS Group was created by
a) Balog
b) Matt Brozowski
c) David Flustace
d) All of them.
Answer:
d) All of them.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Explain the History of open-source software.
Answer:
History of open source software:

  1. In the early day of computing, programmers and developers shared software in order to learn from each other
  2. Eventually, it moved to the wayside of commercialization of software in 1970-1980
  3. The Netscape communication corporation released their popular Netscape Communicator Internet suite as free software. This made others look into how to bring the free software ideas.
  4. The Open Source Initiative was founded in Feb 1998 to encourage the use of the new term open-source.

Question 2.
What is meant by a network simulator?
Answer:

  • A network simulator is a software program that replicates the functioning of a computer network.
  • In simulators, the computer network is typically demonstrated with devices, traffic etc. and the performance is evaluated.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 3.
What is a trace file?
Answer:
A significant output of the simulation is the trace files. Trace files can document every incident that happened in the simulation and are used for examination.
C++ and Object-oriented Tool Command Language (OTCL) and network monitoring.

Question 4.
Write short notes on NS2.
Answer:
NS2 is the abbreviation of NETWORK SIMULA-TOR version 2. NS2 has C++ and Object-oriented Tool Command Language (OTcl) of languages 2. It is one the open-source application software

Question 5.
Explain NRCFOSS.
Answer:
NRCFOSS: National Resource Centre for Free and Open Source Software an Institution of Government of India. To help in the development of FOSS in India.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 6.
Write a short note on Open NMS?
Answer:
There are two types in this Meridian and Horizon.

  • Meridian: When we need stability and long-term support choose Meridian which is best for Enterprises as well as businesses.
  • Horizon: Horizon used where innovation occurs frequently. It is Best for IT-ecosystem, new technologies monitoring.

Part III

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
What are the uses of Open source Network Software?
Answer:

  • There are many opensource softwares, so, we can select and use any software that suits our needs.
  • The software can be used without any cost and restrictions.
  • We can share our ideas with the team.
  • We can learn many ideas and make our program writing skills more efficient.
  • We can add the most required features to the software User friendly.

Question 2.
Explain Free software.
Answer:
Free software a concept developed in the 1980s by an MIT computer science researcher, Richard Stallman is defined by four conditions, as outlined by the nonprofit Free Software Foundation.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 3.
List out the Popular open-source software.
Answer:

  • NS2 , OPEN NMS, Ubuntu , MySQL, PDF Creator, Open Office, 7zip, GnuCash, GIMP, BLENDER,
  • AUDACITY, VLC, MOZILAi FIREFOX, MAGENTO, ANDROID, PHP

Question 4.
Write note on open source hardware.
Answer:
In this period of increased competition and cyber crimes, the computers used by indivudals or business organisations may have spy hardwares of rivals. Open source hardware technology helps in such threats. In this technique we get the components of the hardware and its circuit diagram, so that we can remove suspicious spyware if found.

Question 5.
What are the main functional areas of Open NMS?
Answer:

  1. Service monitoring, where a number of monitor modules can govern if network-based services (ICMP, HTTP, DNS, etc.) are accessible.
  2. Data Gathering by using SNMP and JMX.
  3. Event management and notifications, which comprises alarm reduction and a robust announcement system with accelerations and duty schedules.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 6.
Explain Types of Organizations related to Open Source.
Answer:

  1. Organizations related to Open Source
  2. Apache Software Foundation
  3. The Document Foundation The Eclipse Foundation
  4. Free Software Foundation
  5. Linux Foundation
  6. OpenCourseWare Consortium
  7. Open Source Initiative

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Differentiate Proprietary and open-source software.
Answer:

                      Open Source Software

Proprietary Software

It is developed and tested through open collaborationIt is owned by the indi­vidual or the organiza­tion that developed if
Anyone with the aca­demic knowledge can access, inspect, modi­fy and redistribute the source code.Only the owner or pub­lisher who holds the legal property rights of the source code can ac­cess it.
The project is managed by an open-source community of develop­ers and programmersThe project is managed by a dosed group of in­dividuals or a team that developed it
They are not aimed at unskilled users outside of the programming communityThere are focused on a limited market of both skilled and unskilled end users
It Provides better flex­ibility which means more freedom which encourages innovationThere is a very limit­ed scope of innovation with the restrictions and all
Example; Android, Firefox etcExample: Windows, macOS

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 2.
List out the Benefits of Open Source Software.
Answer:
There are many open source softwares, so, we can select and use any software that suits our needs.

  • The complete options of the software can be used without any cost and restrictions.
  • We can share our ideas with the team, write the required code and share it with many.
  • As we can identify the programming techniques of group members, we can learn many ideas and make our program writing skills more efficient.
  • The coding in open source softwares is being groomed by many enthusiastic members of the group. So if we report problems that we have in the program they are quickly mended by the group’s effort.
  • As we can make changes to the open-source softwares, we can add the most required features in the software.
  • Much open-source software is very user friendly.

Question 3.
Explain various Open Source Licenses.
Answer:
Types of open source license

  1. Apache License 2.0
  2. BSD 3-Clause “New” or “Revised” license
  3. BSD 2-Clause “Simplified” or “FreeBSD” license
  4. GNU General Public License (GPL)
  5. GNU Library or “Lesser” Genera! Public License (LGPL)
  6. MIT license
  7. Mozilla Public License 2.0
  8. Common Development and Distribution License
  9. Eclipse Public License
  10. When you change the source code. OSS requires the inclusion, of what you altered as well as your methods.
  11. The software created after code modifications may or may not be made available for free.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

12th Computer Applications Guide Open Source Concepts Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part A

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
…………… software has been developed by a variety of programmers.
a) Open source
b) Free Software
c) Proprietary’ Software
d) All of these
Answer:
a) Open source

Question 2.
Proprietary Software is owned by an …………………………
(a) Organization
(b) Individual
(c) both a and b
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) both a and b

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 3.
Which of the following organization is not related to Open Source?
a) Apache Software Foundation
b) The Document Foundation
c) The Eclipse Foundation
d) Initiative Foundation.
Answer:
d) Initiative Foundation.

Question 4.
The free software concept is developed in ……………
a) 1980s
b) 1970s
c) 1990s
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) 1980s

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 5.
Pick the odd one out
(a) Apache Software Foundation
(b) The document Foundation
(c) The Eclipse Foundation
(d) The round Foundation
Answer:
(d) The round Foundation

Question 6.
Which of the following is not an open-source application?
a) AUDACITY
b) VLC
c) Mozilla Firefox
d) MS Office
Answer:
d) MS Office

Question 7.
BOSS developed by ……………………..
(a) A-DAC
(b) M-DAC
(c) D-MAC
(d) C-DAC
Answer:
(d) C-DAC

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 8.
…………… a pure event base software tool with super simulation design
a) OpenNMS
b) API
c) NS2
d) OTCL
Answer:
b) API

Question 9.
How many Indian Languages are supported by BOSS?
(a) 15
(b) 10
(c) 5
(d) many
Answer:
(d) many

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 10.
In OpenNMS, Data are Gathering by using ……………..
a) SNMP
b) JMX
c) Both a and b
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both a and b

Question 11.
Which of the following is a network-based service?
a) ICMP
b) HTTP
c) DNS
d) All of the above
Answer:
d) All of the above

Question 12.
The free software was developed in the year …………………….
(a) 1972
(b) 1978
(c) 1980
(d) 2003
Answer:
(c) 1980

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Abbreviation

  1. NRCFOSS- National Resource Centre for Free and Open Source Software
  2. BOSS – Bharat Operating System Solutions
  3. C-DAC – Centre for Development of Advanced Computing
  4. GNU – General Public License
  5. FCAPS – Fault, configuration, accounting, performance, security
  6. NMS – Network Management System)
  7. OTCL – Object-oriented Tool Command Language
  8. SSFNet – Scalable Simulation Framework Net Models
  9. API – Application Program Interface
  10. SOURCE CODE – Set of Instructions that decide, how the software should work
  11. NS2 – Network Simulation 2
  12. OpenNMS – Open Source Network Management Software

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Assertion And Reason

Question 1.
Assertion (A): In a computer network, network simulation is a method whereby a software program models the activities of a network by calculating the communication between the different network objects such as(routers, nodes, switches, access points, links etc.).
Reason(R): A network simulator is a software program that replicates the functioning of a computer network.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:

Question 2.
Assertion (A): There is much Open Source software. So, we can select and use any software that suits our needs.
Reason(R): The complete options of the software can be used without any cost and restrictions.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 3.
Assertion (A): Open NMS (Network Management System) is a free and open-source initiative grade network monitoring and management platform.
Reason(R); It is established and maintained by a community of users, developers and by the Open NMS Group, it offering services, training and support.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Question 4.
Assertion (A); Service monitoring, where a number of monitor modules can govern if network-based services (ICMP, HTTP, DNS, etc.) are accessible.
Reason(R): Data Gathering by using HTML and JSP.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 5.
Assertion (A): AJAX has C++and Object-oriented Tool Command Language (OTCL) of languages
Reason(R): NS2 link together for C++ and the OTCL using TCLCL.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
d) (A) is false and (R) is true

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Match The Following:
1. Richard Stallman – Software Program
2. BOSS – Open-source Application software
3. BSD 2-Clause – LGPL
4. BSD 3-Clause – Free software concept
5. GNU Library – Data Gathering
6. NS2 – Revised license
7. Open NMS – C++, OTCL
8. Network Simulation – FCAPS
9. BLENDER – Free BSD license
10. SNMP – C-DAC
Answers
1. Free software a concept
2. C-DAC
3. FreeBSD license
4. Revised license
5. LGPL
6. C++, OTCL
7. FCAPS
8. Software Program
9. Open source Application software
10. Data Gathering

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is a trace file?
Answer:
Trace file is a document file, consists of every incident that happens in a simulation.

Question 2.
What is the use of Network monitoring software notifications?
Answer:
It is used to help the user or administrator for fixed errors.

Question 3.
Mention some large enterprise management products?
Answer:
HP Open View, IBM Micro muse or IBM Tivoli.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 4.
How NS2 links C++ and OTCL?
Answer:
It links together for C++ and the OTCL using TCLCL.

Question 5.
What is the use of trace files?
Answer:
Trace files can document every incident that happened in the simulation and are used for examination.

Question 6.
What does open-source denote?
Answer:
Open Source denotes some program whose I source code is made available for usage

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Find The Odd One On The Following

1. (a) Support
(b) Training
(c) Edit Source By User
(d) Security
Answer:
(c) Edit Source By User

2. (a) Apache
(b) Microsoft
(c) Linux
(d) Document
Answer:
(b) Microsoft

3. (a) GUI
(b) GPL
(c) LG PL
(d) MIT
Answer:
(a) GUI

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

4. (a) Routers
(b) Nodes
(c) OpenSource
(d) Access points
Answer:
(c) OpenSource

5. (a) Openoffice
(b) VLC
(c) Microsoft word
(d) NS2
Answer:
(c) Microsoft word

6. (a) Fault
(b) Communication
(c) Accounting
(d) Performance
Answer:
(b) Communication

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

7. (a) Event Management
(b) Service Monitoring
(c) Data Collection
(d) MAGENTO
Answer:
(d) MAGENTO

8. (a) ICMP
(b) HTTP
(c) JMX
(d) DNS
Answer:
(c) JMX

9. (a) Mozilla Firefox
(b) Chrome
(c) Internet Explorer
(d) Android
Answer:
(d) Android

10. (a) Bjarne Stroustrup
(b) Steve Giles
(c) Brian Weaver
(d) LukeRindfuss.
Answer:
(a) Bjarne Stroustrup

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Important Years To Remember:

1980Free software concept developed
1999Open NMS was released by Steve Giles, Brian Weaver, and Luke Rindfuss
2004OpenNMS Group was created by Balog, Matt Brozowski, and David Hustace

Part B

Short Answers

Question 1.
Write a short note on open source software and developers?
Answer:
Open-Source Software and Developers:
OSS projects are collaboration opportunities that improve skills and build connections in the field. Domains that developers can contribute to the open-source community include:

  1. Communication tools.
  2. Distributed revision control systems.
  3. Bug trackers and task lists.
  4. Testing and debugging tools.

Question 2.
What is the network simulator?
Answer:

  • A network simulator is a software program that replicates the functioning of a computer network.
  • In simulators, the computer network is typically demonstrated with devices, traffic etc. and the performance is evaluated.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 3.
Write a short note on BOSS.
Answer:

  • BOSS (Bharat Operating System Solutions) Operating System Developed in India by C-DAC (Centre for Development of Advanced Computing) Help to prompt the use of open-source software in India.
  • It Supports many Indian languages.

Part C

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
Write some Organizations related to Open Source.
Answer:

  • Apache Software Foundation
  • The Document Foundation
  • The Eclipse Foundation
  • Free Software Foundation
  • Linux Foundation
  • Open Courseware Consortium
  • Open Source Initiative

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 2.
List the various types of open NMS?
Answer:
There are two types in this Meridian and Horizon.

  • Meridian: When we need stability and long-term support choose Meridian which is best for Enterprises as well as businesses.
  • Horizon: Horizon used where innovation occurs frequently. It is Best for IT-ecosystem, new technologies monitoring.

Question 3.
Write a short note on Open-Source Software and Developers
Answer:

  • OSS projects are collaboration opportunities that improve skills and build connections in the field.
  • Domains that developers can contribute to the open-source community include:
    • Communication tools.
    • Distributed revision control systems.
    • Bug trackers and task lists.
    • Testing and debugging tools.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Part D

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Differentiate Open Source Software with free software?
Answer:
Open-Source Software vs. Free Software:
Although the terms are often used interchangeably, OSS is slightly different from free software. Both deal with the ability to download and modify software without restriction or charge.

However, free software a concept developed in the 1980s by an MIT computer science researcher, Richard Stallman is defined by four conditions, as outlined by the nonprofit Free Software Foundation. These “four freedoms” emphasize the ability of users to use and enjoy software as they see fit.

In contrast, the OSS criteria, which the Open Source Initiative developed a decade later, place more emphasis on the modification of software, and the consequences of altering source code, licensing, and distribution.

Obviously, the two overlap; some would say the differences between OSS and free software are more philosophical than practical. However, neither should be confused with freeware. Freeware usually refers to proprietary software that users can download at no cost, but whose source code cannot be changed.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 2.
Explain in detail about Open NMS.
Answer:

  • Open NMS (Network Management System) is a free and open-source initiative-grade network monitoring and management platform.
  • It is established and maintained by a community of users, developers, and the Open NMS Group.
  • It offering services, training, and support.

The goal is for Open NMS

  • The goal is for Open NMS to be an actually distributed, scalable management application platform for all features of the FCAPS (Fault, Configuration, Accounting, Performance, Security) network management model.
  • Presently the emphasis is on Fault and Performance Management.
  • It was intended to cope with tens of thousands of devices from a single server as well as achieve unlimited devices using a cluster of servers.

Features:

  • OpenNMS comprises a discovery engine to routinely configure and manage network devices without operator intervention. It is written in Java and is issued under the GNU (General Public License.)
  • OpenNMS is the World’s first software for Network monitor and management with open-source options.

OpenNMS- Types:
There are two types in this Meridian and Horizon.
Meridian: When we need stability and long-term support choose Meridian which is best for Enterprises as well as businesses.
Horizon:

  • It is used where innovation occurs frequently.
  • It is Best for IT-ecosystem, new technology monitoring.

History:

  • OpenNMS was Released in 1999 by Steve Giles, Brian Weaver, and Luke Rindfuss.
  • In 2004 OpenNMS Group was created by Balog, Matt Brozovvski, and David Hustace.
  • It is written in Java and can run on all type of platform,
  • It gives us Event management & Notification, Discovery & Provisioning, service monitoring, and Data Collection.
  • Won lot of awards for best of open-source software.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 14 Open Source Concepts

Question 3.
Explain in Detail Open NMS?
Answer:
Open NMS

  • Open NMS (Network Management System)is a free and open-source initiative-grade network monitoring and management platform.
  • It is established and maintained by a community of users, developers, and by the Open NMS
    Group, it offering services, training, and support.
  • The goal is for Open NMS to be an actually distributed, scalable management application platform for all features of the FCAPS (Fault, configuration, accounting, performance,
    security) network management model.
  • Presently the emphasis is on Fault and Performance Management.
    It was intended to cope with tens of thousands of devices from a single server as well as achieve unlimited devices using a cluster of servers.
  • Open NMS comprises a discovery engine to routinely configure and manage network devices without operator intervention.
  • It is written in Java and is issued under the GNU (General Public License.)
  • Open NMS is the Worlds first software for Network monitor and management with open source options. There are two types in this Meridian and Horizon.
  • When we need stability and long-term support choose Meridian which is best for Enterprises as well as businesses, for Horizon used where innovation occurs frequently. It is Best for IT-ecosystem, new technologies monitoring.

Open Source Hardware:

  1. Remix
  2. Remake
  3. Remanufacture
  4. Redistribute
  5. Resell
  6. Study and Learn